HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540, E82550,

E82560 and HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP

E87640, E87650, E87660
Service and Support Training
Copyright and License Trademark Credits

© Copyright 2017 HP Development Company, Adobe®, Adobe Photoshop®, Acrobat®, and

L.P. PostScript® are trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.
Reproduction, adaptation, or translation
without prior written permission is prohibited, Apple and the Apple logo are trademarks of
except as allowed under the copyright laws. Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries. iPod is a trademark of Apple
The information contained herein is subject to Computer, Inc. iPod is for legal or rightholder-
change without notice. authorized copying only. Don't steal music.
The only warranties for HP products and Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® XP, and
services are set forth in the express warranty Windows Vista® are U.S. registered trademarks
statements accompanying such products and of Microsoft Corporation.
services. Nothing herein should be construed
as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall UNIX® is a registered trademark of The Open
not be liable for technical or editorial errors or Group.
omissions contained herein.

Edition 1, 4/2017
Table of contents

1 Tour the printer ............................................................................................................................................. 1

Student performance objectives ........................................................................................................................... 2
Printer introduction ............................................................................................................................................... 3
Printer overview .................................................................................................................................. 3
HP LaserJet Managed and HP Color Managed A3 Copier Workgroup Features .................................. 3
Product features and comparison ....................................................................................................... 6
Overview ............................................................................................................................ 6
Printer specifications ........................................................................................................ 7
Overview ......................................................................................................... 7
Technical specifications .................................................................................. 7
Supported operating systems ...................................................................... 12
Mobile printing solutions .............................................................................. 14
Printer dimensions ....................................................................................... 15
Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions ...... 15
Operating-environment range ..................................................................... 16
Configuration options ..................................................................................................... 16
HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87640, E87640, E87650 ....................... 16
HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540, E82550, E82560 ................................. 18
Paper handling .................................................................................................................................. 19
Paper handling specifications ......................................................................................... 19
Paper handling ................................................................................................................ 20
Paper handling overview .............................................................................. 20
Understand paper use .................................................................................. 20
Copy and Scan features ..................................................................................................................... 21
Printer views ........................................................................................................................................................ 23
Printer front view .............................................................................................................................. 23
Printer back view ............................................................................................................................... 24
Interface ports ................................................................................................................................... 25
Control-panel view ............................................................................................................................ 26
Supported operating systems ............................................................................................................................. 28
Set up and configuration tools ............................................................................................................................ 30
Remote management .......................................................................................................................................... 31

ENWW iii
 Accessories .......................................................................................................................................................... 32
Supplies ............................................................................................................................................................... 33
Warranty .............................................................................................................................................................. 35

2 Set up and configure .................................................................................................................................... 37

Student performance objectives ......................................................................................................................... 38
Set up process overview ...................................................................................................................................... 39
Install and set up the printer hardware ............................................................................................................... 40
Install the toner cartridges ............................................................................................................... 40
Connect the cables ............................................................................................................................ 41
Load Trays ......................................................................................................................................... 41
HP LaserJet MFP Analog Fax Accessory 500 ..................................................................................... 41
HP JetDirect Wireless Print Server with NFC and HP JetDirect USB Wireless Print Server ............... 41
Print the configuration page ............................................................................................................. 42
Use Initial Setup to enable features and configure basic settings ................................................... 42
Install printer software ..................................................................................................................... 42
Install printer software overview ................................................................................... 42
Windows 8 ....................................................................................................................... 43
Windows 10 ..................................................................................................................... 43
Mac OS X .......................................................................................................................... 43

3 Use and maintain ......................................................................................................................................... 45

Student performance objectives ......................................................................................................................... 46
Paper trays ........................................................................................................................................................... 47
Load paper ......................................................................................................................................... 47
Introduction .................................................................................................................... 47
Load paper to Tray 1 ....................................................................................................... 47
Introduction .................................................................................................. 47
Use alternative letterhead mode ................................................................. 50
Load paper to Tray 2 ....................................................................................................... 50
Introduction .................................................................................................. 50
Use alternative letterhead mode ................................................................. 54
Print tasks ......................................................................................................................................... 54
Print tasks (Windows) ..................................................................................................... 54
How to print (Windows) ................................................................................ 54
Automatically print on both sides (Windows) .............................................. 55
Print multiple pages per sheet (Windows) ................................................... 55
Select the paper type (Windows) ................................................................. 56
Additional print tasks ................................................................................... 57
Print tasks (OS X) ............................................................................................................ 58
How to print (OS X) ....................................................................................... 58

iv ENWW
 Automatically print on both sides (OS X) ..................................................... 58
Print multiple pages per sheet (OS X) .......................................................... 58
Select the paper type (OS X) ......................................................................... 58
Additional print tasks ................................................................................... 60
Configure trays for paper type and size .............................................................................................................. 61
Configure trays for paper type and size overview ............................................................................ 61
Configure a tray when loading paper ................................................................................................ 61
Configure a tray to match print job settings ..................................................................................... 61
Configure a tray by using the control panel ...................................................................................... 62
HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) ........................................................................................................................ 63
HP Embedded Web Server overview ................................................................................................. 63
EWS Tabs and menus ........................................................................................................................ 63
Print ...................................................................................................................................................................... 64
Print overview ................................................................................................................................... 64
Print tasks (Windows) ....................................................................................................................... 64
How to print (Windows) .................................................................................................. 64
Automatically print on both sides (Windows) ................................................................ 66
Manually print on both sides (Windows) ........................................................................ 66
Print multiple pages per sheet (Windows) ..................................................................... 67
Select the paper type (Windows) .................................................................................... 67
Additional print tasks ...................................................................................................... 68
Print tasks (OS X) ............................................................................................................................... 68
How to print (OS X) .......................................................................................................... 68
Automatically print on both sides (OS X) ........................................................................ 68
Manually print on both sides (OS X) ................................................................................ 69
Print multiple pages per sheet (OS X) ............................................................................. 69
Select the paper type (OS X) ........................................................................................... 69
Additional print tasks ...................................................................................................... 71
Mobile printing .................................................................................................................................. 71
Introduction .................................................................................................................... 71
Wireless Direct Print and NFC Printing ............................................................................ 71
HP ePrint via email .......................................................................................................... 72
HP ePrint software .......................................................................................................... 73
AirPrint ............................................................................................................................ 73
Google Cloud Print .......................................................................................................... 73
Android embedded printing ............................................................................................ 74
Copy, scan, and Digital Send (HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet) .......................................................................... 75
Copy, scan, and Digital Send overview ............................................................................................. 75
Copy ................................................................................................................................................... 75
Make a copy ..................................................................................................................... 75
Copy on both sides (duplex) ............................................................................................ 77

ENWW v
 Copy mixed-size documents ........................................................................................... 79
Overview ....................................................................................................... 79
Load the paper in the document feeder ....................................................... 79
Copy mixed sized documents ....................................................................... 79
Copy or scan a document into a booklet format ............................................................ 80
Introduction .................................................................................................. 80
Copy document to booklet format ............................................................... 80
Scan document to the printer memory in booklet format .......................... 81
Copy or scan pages from books or other bound documents ......................................... 82
Introduction .................................................................................................. 82
Book Placement ............................................................................................ 82
Copy or scan pages ....................................................................................... 82
Reduce or enlarge a copy image ..................................................................................... 83
Copy or scan both sides of an identification card ........................................................... 84
Additional options when copying ................................................................................... 84
Scan ................................................................................................................................................... 86
Set up Scan to E-mail using the HP Embedded Web Server .......................................... 86
Introduction .................................................................................................. 86
Before you begin ........................................................................................... 87
Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) ............................... 87
Step two: Configure the Network Identification settings ............................ 87
Step three: Configure the Send to E-mail feature ........................................ 88
Set up Send to E-mail to use Office 365 Outlook (optional) ........................ 95
Set up Scan to Network Folder using the HP Embedded Web Server ............................ 97
Introduction .................................................................................................. 97
Before you begin ........................................................................................... 97
Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server .......................................... 97
Step two: Set up Save to Network Folder .................................................... 97
Set up Save to USB using the HP Embedded Web Server ............................................ 106
Introduction ................................................................................................ 106
Before you begin ........................................................................................ 106
Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server ....................................... 106
Step two: Enable Save to USB Setup .......................................................... 106
Default scan settings for Save to USB setup ............................................. 107
Default file settings for Save to USB Setup ............................................... 107
Scan to SharePoint® ...................................................................................................... 108
Scan to Job Storage ...................................................................................................... 108
Quick Sets ..................................................................................................................... 108
Scan and send to email ................................................................................................. 109
Introduction ................................................................................................ 109
Scan and send a document to email .......................................................... 109

vi ENWW
 Scan and send to network folder .................................................................................. 111
Introduction ................................................................................................ 111
Scan and save the document to a folder ................................................... 112
Scan to USB Drive .......................................................................................................... 114
Additional options when scanning ............................................................................... 114
HP JetAdvantage business solutions ........................................................................... 116
Additional scan tasks .................................................................................................... 116
Fax ................................................................................................................................................... 116
Fax overview ................................................................................................................. 116
Set up fax ...................................................................................................................... 117
Introduction ................................................................................................ 117
Set up fax by using the printer control panel ............................................ 117
Change fax configurations ............................................................................................ 118
Introduction ................................................................................................ 118
Fax dialing settings .................................................................................... 118
General fax send settings .......................................................................... 119
Fax receive settings .................................................................................... 119
Send a fax ..................................................................................................................... 120
Additional fax tasks ...................................................................................................... 121
Block incoming faxes .................................................................................................... 122
Introduction ................................................................................................ 122
Create a list of blocked fax numbers .......................................................... 122
Delete numbers from the list of blocked fax numbers .............................. 122
Create and manage fax speed dial lists ........................................................................ 123
Introduction ................................................................................................ 123
Create a speed dial list ............................................................................... 123
Add a number to an existing speed dial list ............................................... 123
Search a speed dial list by name ................................................................ 123
Delete a single number from a speed dial list ........................................... 124
Delete a speed dial list ............................................................................... 124
Create a fax printing schedule ...................................................................................... 124
Configure default options for fax receive jobs ............................................................. 125
Configure fax billing codes ........................................................................................... 125
Fax error messages on the printer control panel ......................................................... 126
Overview ..................................................................................................... 126
Fax send messages .................................................................................... 128
Fax receive messages ................................................................................. 129
General fax problems ................................................................................................... 129
Overview ..................................................................................................... 129
The fax failed to send ................................................................................. 129

ENWW vii
 An Out of Memory status message displays on the printer control
panel ........................................................................................................... 129
Print quality of a photo is poor or prints as a gray box ............................. 130
You selected the Stop button to cancel a fax, but the fax was still sent ... 130
No fax address book button displays ........................................................ 130
Not able to locate the Fax settings in HP Web Jetadmin ........................... 130
The header is appended to the top of the page when the overlay
option is enabled ........................................................................................ 130
A mix of names and numbers is in the recipients box ............................... 130
A one-page fax prints as two pages .......................................................... 130
A document stops in the document feeder in the middle of faxing .......... 130
The volume for sounds coming from the fax accessory is too high or
too low ........................................................................................................ 131
Home Screen Customization ............................................................................................................................. 132
Security features ............................................................................................................................................... 133
Security features overview ............................................................................................................. 133
Manage security settings ................................................................................................................ 133
Manage security settings overview .............................................................................. 133
Security statements ..................................................................................................... 133
IP Security ..................................................................................................................... 133
Assign a system password ........................................................................................... 134
Encryption support: HP High Performance Secure Hard Disks .................................... 134
Enhanced security features .......................................................................................... 134
Data and network security ......................................................................... 134
Feature operation ....................................................................................... 135
HP SureStart ............................................................................................... 135
Whitelisting ................................................................................................ 135
Runtime Intrusion Detection ...................................................................... 135
Feature availability ..................................................................................... 135
Security tab ................................................................................................................... 135
Networking tab ............................................................................................................. 136
Access control .................................................................................................................................. 137
Enable and configure sign-in methods ........................................................................ 137
Device User Accounts .................................................................................................... 137
Data and file security ...................................................................................................................... 137
Data and file security overview .................................................................................... 137
Encryption support: HP High-Performance Secure Hard Disks ................................... 137
Protect stored data ....................................................................................................... 138
Lock the formatter cage .................................................................................................................. 138
Customer self-repair (CSR) parts and supplies ................................................................................................. 139
CSR parts and supplies overview .................................................................................................... 139

viii ENWW
 Tray 2 HCI ......................................................................................................................................... 140
Toner cartridges .............................................................................................................................. 142
Toner collection unit (mono) ........................................................................................................... 146
Toner collection unit (color) ............................................................................................................ 147
Staples ............................................................................................................................................. 147
Replace the staple cartridge in the stapler stacker area ............................................. 147
Replace the staple cartridges in the booklet maker area ............................................ 147
Replace the inner finisher staple cartridge .................................................................. 148
Replace the high-volume finisher staple cartridge ...................................................... 149
Clear paper jams ................................................................................................................................................ 150
Paper jam locations ......................................................................................................................... 150
13.A1 tray 1 paper jam .................................................................................................................... 150
13.A2, 13.A3 tray 2, tray 3 paper jam ............................................................................................. 151
Solve wired network problems .......................................................................................................................... 155
Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 155
Poor physical connection ................................................................................................................ 155
The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the product .................................................... 155
The computer is unable to communicate with the product ........................................................... 155
The product is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network ...................................... 156
New software programs might be causing compatibility problems .............................................. 156
The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly ............................................................. 156
The product is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect .................................................. 156

4 Support .................................................................................................................................................... 157

Student performance objectives ....................................................................................................................... 158
Software ............................................................................................................................................................ 160
Software troubleshooting overview ............................................................................................... 160
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................. 160
Firmware ............................................................................................................................................................ 162
Generate Debug Data from the EWS ............................................................................................... 162
Reset firmware from within the EWS .............................................................................................. 162
Pre-boot menu ................................................................................................................................ 163
Overview ....................................................................................................................... 163
SVGA touchscreen control panel .................................................................................. 163
Half-VGA control panel ................................................................................................. 163
Four-line graphical display control panel ..................................................................... 163
Pre-boot menu options ................................................................................................ 163
Overview ..................................................................................................... 163
Continue ...................................................................................................... 164
Sign In ......................................................................................................... 164
Administrator ............................................................................................. 164

ENWW ix
 Service Tools ............................................................................................... 165
Access and navigate the Pre-boot menu ...................................................................... 165
Overview ..................................................................................................... 165
SVGA touchscreen control panel ................................................................ 165
Half-VGA touchscreen control panel .......................................................... 166
Four-line graphical display control panel with two LEDs .......................... 166
Four-line graphical display control panel with three LEDs ........................ 166
Sign in to the Pre-boot menu ....................................................................................... 167
Hardware ........................................................................................................................................................... 168
Service-level walkaround ............................................................................................................... 168
Printer front view .......................................................................................................... 168
Printer back view .......................................................................................................... 169
Interface ports .............................................................................................................. 170
Control-panel view ........................................................................................................ 171
Theory of operation ........................................................................................................................ 172
Product overview (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) ........................ 172
Product overview (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) ................................. 173
Feeding system ............................................................................................................. 173
Feeding system overview ........................................................................... 173
Main components and functions ................................................................ 175
Tray 1, 2, 4, 5 .............................................................................................. 181
Pickup Unit, HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540, E82550, E82560 and
HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87640, E87640, E87650 ..................... 182
Registration (REGI) unit, HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540, E82550,
E82560 and HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87640, E87650, E87660 . 182
Tray 1 feeder assembly .............................................................................. 183
Drive system ................................................................................................................. 184
Pickup and cassette lift drive ..................................................................... 184
Feed drive ................................................................................................... 185
Registration drive ....................................................................................... 186
Fuser release/output drive ......................................................................... 187
Fuser unit ...................................................................................................................... 187
Fuser unit overview .................................................................................... 187
Fuser unit drive ........................................................................................... 189
Fuser unit temperature control .................................................................. 189
Loop control ................................................................................................ 190
Image creation (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) ............................ 190
Printing process overview .......................................................................... 190
Imaging unit ............................................................................................... 191
Toner cartridge ........................................................................................... 195
Intermediate transfer belt unit .................................................................. 196

x ENWW
 Toner reservoir unit .................................................................................... 198
Laser scanner assembly (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) ............. 199
Laser scanner assembly overview ............................................................. 199
Laser scanning optical path ....................................................................... 200
Laser synchronizing detectors ................................................................... 201
Automatic CPR adjustment ........................................................................ 202
Drive system (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) ............................... 205
Drive motors ............................................................................................... 205
Main drive unit motors ............................................................................... 207
Toner supply/reservoir drive ...................................................................... 208
Engage transfer roller drive ....................................................................... 208
TCU drive ..................................................................................................... 209
Image creation (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) ..................................... 209
Printing process overview .......................................................................... 209
Imaging unit ............................................................................................... 210
Laser scanner assembly (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) ...................... 215
Laser scanner assembly overview ............................................................. 215
Laser scanning optical path ....................................................................... 216
Laser synchronizing detectors ................................................................... 217
Drive system (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) ........................................ 218
Drive motors ............................................................................................... 218
Main drive unit motors ............................................................................... 220
Toner supply drive ...................................................................................... 221
Toner reservoir drive .................................................................................. 221
Flatbed Scanner System ............................................................................................... 221
Flatbed scanner system overview ............................................................. 221
Scanning system components ................................................................... 224
Caution for moving the scanner ................................................................. 230
Flow Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) dn/z bundles (GX) (HP Color LaserJet MFP
E87640, E87650, E87660, HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) .................... 231
Flow ADF overview ..................................................................................... 231
Sensors ....................................................................................................... 232
Ultra Sonic Multi-feed (USM) ...................................................................... 233
Flow ADF drive system ............................................................................... 233
Flow ADF Registration ................................................................................ 236
Flow ADF Scanning Position ....................................................................... 237
Mixed Size Original (MSO) ........................................................................... 237
Dual sensor cleaning method .................................................................... 238
Flow ADF z bundles (GX) ............................................................................. 239
Hardware configuration ................................................................................................ 239
Introduction ................................................................................................ 239

ENWW xi
 Main controller ........................................................................................... 242
USB HUB PCA .............................................................................................. 250
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 5) ......................................... 252
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 3) (HP LaserJet MFP
E82540, E82550, E82560) ......................................................................... 253
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 4) ......................................... 255
Fuser drive board ........................................................................................ 257
High voltage power supply (HVPS) PCA (HP Color LaserJet MFP
E87640, E87650, E87660) ......................................................................... 258
Eraser PCA (color models) .......................................................................... 261
High voltage power supply (HVPS) board (HP LaserJet MFP E82540,
E82550, E82560) ........................................................................................ 261
Eraser PCA (mono models) ......................................................................... 263
Waste Sensor PCA ....................................................................................... 264
Paper Size sensor PCA ................................................................................ 264
Flow ADF PCA .............................................................................................. 264
Scan joint PCA ............................................................................................. 265
CCDM PCA .................................................................................................... 266
WLED IF PCA ................................................................................................ 266
WLED PCA ................................................................................................... 266
Dual cassette feeder (DCF) ........................................................................................... 267
High capacity input tray (HCI) ....................................................................................... 272
Side high capacity input tray (sHCI) .............................................................................. 277
Finisher system (Inner finisher) .................................................................................... 283
Sectional view ............................................................................................. 283
Paper path .................................................................................................. 284
PCA connection information ...................................................................... 284
Finisher system (Stapling/Booklet finisher) ................................................................. 286
Finisher sectional view ............................................................................... 286
Paper path .................................................................................................. 289
Electrical parts layout ................................................................................ 291
Each unit functions ..................................................................................... 296
PCA connection information ...................................................................... 297

5 Service ...................................................................................................................................................... 301

Student performance objectives ....................................................................................................................... 302
Service overview ................................................................................................................................................ 303
Service notes ..................................................................................................................................................... 304
General service warnings .................................................................................................................................. 305
Required tools ................................................................................................................................................... 306
For additional service and support ................................................................................................................... 307

xii ENWW
 Service approach ............................................................................................................................................... 308
Precautions when replacing parts .................................................................................................. 308
Precautions when assembling and disassembling ...................................................... 308
Precautions when handling PCA ................................................................................... 308
Releasing plastic latches .............................................................................................. 309
Before performing service .............................................................................................................. 309
After performing service ................................................................................................................. 309
Post-service test ............................................................................................................................. 310
Print-quality test .......................................................................................................... 310
Copy-quality test .......................................................................................................... 310
Fax-quality test (fax models only) ............................................................................... 310
Parts removal order ...................................................................................................... 310
Order parts, accessories, and supplies ........................................................................................... 310
Ordering ........................................................................................................................ 310
Orderable parts ............................................................................................................. 311
Supplies and accessories .............................................................................................. 311
Related documentation and software ......................................................................... 312
Maintenance ...................................................................................................................................................... 313
Machine cleaning for maintenance ................................................................................................. 313
Cleaning the laser scanner assembly window (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640,
E87650, E87660 only) .................................................................................................. 313
Cleaning the scan glass ................................................................................................ 314
Cleaning the flow document feeder white bar and CIS ................................................ 315
Cleaning the paper dust stick ....................................................................................... 315
Removal and replacement procedures (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) ........................... 317
Accessories ...................................................................................................................................... 317
Removal and replacement: Trusted platform module ................................................. 318
Install accessory: HP Foreign interface harness (FIH) solution .................................... 319
NFC Kit Installation ....................................................................................................... 320
Replacement of maintenance parts ................................................................................................ 321
Toner collection unit (TCU) (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) ......... 322
Imaging drum unit (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) ...................... 323
Developer unit (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) ............................ 324
Fuser unit ...................................................................................................................... 325
Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) cleaner (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650,
E87660) ......................................................................................................................... 326
Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) unit (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650,
E87660) ......................................................................................................................... 327
Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers ................................................................ 328
Tray 1 pickup/reverse/feed roller ................................................................................. 329
Flow ADF pickup roller assembly .................................................................................. 330

ENWW xiii
 Flow ADF separation roller assembly ........................................................................... 331
Formatter cover ................................................................................................................................................. 332
Accelerator board .............................................................................................................................................. 333
Island of data (IOD) ............................................................................................................................................ 334
Formatter hard disk drive (HDD) ....................................................................................................................... 335
Formatter ........................................................................................................................................................... 336
Control panel ..................................................................................................................................................... 337
Keyboard (z models) .......................................................................................................................................... 338
Intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU) ......................................................................................................... 339
Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) ........................................... 340
Front top inner cover ....................................................................................................................... 341
Front power cover ........................................................................................................................... 342
Front power switch .......................................................................................................................... 343
Output bin ........................................................................................................................................ 344
Top right cover ................................................................................................................................. 345
Left cover ......................................................................................................................................... 346
Lower rear cover .............................................................................................................................. 347
Upper rear cover .............................................................................................................................. 348
Left rear corner cover ...................................................................................................................... 349
Right rear cover ............................................................................................................................... 350
Paper dust brush (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) ........................................... 351
Front cover ...................................................................................................................................... 352
Inner front cover (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) ........................................... 353
Front cover open sensor (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) ............................... 354
High voltage power supply (HVPS) board (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) ..... 355
Laser scanner assembly (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) ............................... 356
Laser scanner assembly fan (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) ......................... 357
Tray 2 (color) .................................................................................................................................... 358
Formatter and cage (ACCESS ONLY) ................................................................................................ 359
Main board (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) .................................................... 360
Main board and cage (ACCESS ONLY) .............................................................................................. 361
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) cover ......................................................................................... 362
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) fans ........................................................................................... 363
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) board 1 ...................................................................................... 364
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) board 2 ...................................................................................... 365
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) board 3 ...................................................................................... 366
LVPS board 3 and cage (ACCESS ONLY) ........................................................................................... 367
Fuser drive board ............................................................................................................................ 368
Fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage (ACCESS ONLY) .................................................................. 369
Developer fan .................................................................................................................................. 370
Lower tray connector ...................................................................................................................... 371

xiv ENWW
 Fuser fan .......................................................................................................................................... 372
Main drive unit (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) .............................................. 373
Alienation motor ............................................................................................................................. 374
Inductor unit .................................................................................................................................... 375
Auto closing unit ............................................................................................................................. 376
Fuser/output drive unit ................................................................................................................... 377
Right door open sensor ................................................................................................................... 378
Right door open switch ................................................................................................................... 379
Pickup drive unit 1 ........................................................................................................................... 380
Pickup drive unit 2 ........................................................................................................................... 381
Feed/Tray 1 drive unit ..................................................................................................................... 382
Registration drive assembly ........................................................................................................... 383
Toner supply drive unit (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) ................................. 384
Toner supply and toner reservoir motors ....................................................................................... 385
CRUM connector .............................................................................................................................. 386
Toner collection unit (TCU) drive (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) ................... 387
Toner collection unit (TCU) sensor (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) ................ 388
Reservoir unit (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) ................................................ 389
Auto size sensor .............................................................................................................................. 390
Front cover open sensor (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) ............................... 391
Feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper (ACCESS ONLY) .............................. 392
Right door ........................................................................................................................................ 393
Fuser out sensor (on the right door) ............................................................................................... 394
Feed 2 sensor (on the right door) ................................................................................................... 395
Tray 1(on the right door) ................................................................................................................. 396
Tray 1 empty sensor ....................................................................................................................... 397
Tray 1 paper length sensor ............................................................................................................. 398
Tray 1 solenoid ................................................................................................................................ 399
Output unit ...................................................................................................................................... 400
Return sensor (on the output unit) ................................................................................................. 401
Duplex 1 sensor (on the output unit) .............................................................................................. 402
Output 1 bin full sensor (on the output unit) .................................................................................. 403
Output gate solenoid (on the output unit) ...................................................................................... 404
Pickup unit 2 .................................................................................................................................... 405
Pickup lifting and empty sensor (pickup unit 2) ............................................................................. 406
Prefeed sensor 2 (pickup unit 2) ..................................................................................................... 407
Pickup unit 1 .................................................................................................................................... 408
Pickup lifting and empty sensor (pickup unit 1) ............................................................................. 409
Prefeed sensor 1 (pickup unit 1) ..................................................................................................... 410
Registration assembly (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) .................................. 411
Registration sensor assembly (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) ...................... 412

ENWW xv
 Internal hard disk drive (HDD) ......................................................................................................... 413
Removal and replacement procedures (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) .................................... 414
Accessories ...................................................................................................................................... 414
Removal and replacement: Trusted platform module ................................................. 415
Install accessory: HP Foreign interface harness (FIH) solution .................................... 416
NFC Kit Installation ....................................................................................................... 417
Replacement of maintenance parts ................................................................................................ 418
Tray 2 (mono) ................................................................................................................ 419
Toner collection unit (TCU) (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) ................... 420
Imaging drum unit (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) ............................... 421
Developer unit (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) ..................................... 422
Fuser unit ...................................................................................................................... 423
Paper transfer belt (PTB) (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) ..................... 424
Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers ................................................................ 425
Tray 1 pickup/reverse/feed roller ................................................................................. 426
Flow ADF pickup roller assembly .................................................................................. 427
Flow ADF separation roller assembly ........................................................................... 428
Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) .................................................... 429
Front top inner cover ....................................................................................................................... 430
Front power cover ........................................................................................................................... 431
Front power switch .......................................................................................................................... 432
Output bin ........................................................................................................................................ 433
Top right cover ................................................................................................................................. 434
Left cover ......................................................................................................................................... 435
Lower rear cover .............................................................................................................................. 436
Upper rear cover .............................................................................................................................. 437
Left rear corner cover ...................................................................................................................... 438
Right rear cover ............................................................................................................................... 439
Paper dust brush (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) .................................................... 440
Front cover ...................................................................................................................................... 441
Inner front cover (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) .................................................... 442
Front cover open sensor (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) ........................................ 443
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) cover ......................................................................................... 444
Laser scanner assembly (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) ......................................... 445
Developer fan .................................................................................................................................. 446
Formatter and cage (ACCESS ONLY) ................................................................................................ 447
High voltage power supply (HVPS) board (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) .............. 448
Main board (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) .............................................................. 449
Main board and cage (ACCESS ONLY) .............................................................................................. 450
Toner supply drive unit (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) .......................................... 451
CRUM connector (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) ..................................................... 452

xvi ENWW
 Low voltage power supply (LVPS) fans ........................................................................................... 453
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) board 1 ...................................................................................... 454
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) board 2 ...................................................................................... 455
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) board 3 ...................................................................................... 456
LVPS board 3 and cage (ACCESS ONLY) ........................................................................................... 457
Fuser drive board ............................................................................................................................ 458
Fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage (ACCESS ONLY) .................................................................. 459
Fuser fan .......................................................................................................................................... 460
Main drive unit (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) ........................................................ 461
Inductor unit .................................................................................................................................... 462
Auto closing unit ............................................................................................................................. 463
Fuser/output drive unit ................................................................................................................... 464
Right door open sensor ................................................................................................................... 465
Right door open switch ................................................................................................................... 466
Pickup drive unit 1 ........................................................................................................................... 467
Pickup drive unit 2 ........................................................................................................................... 468
Feed/Tray 1 drive unit ..................................................................................................................... 469
Registration drive assembly ........................................................................................................... 470
Toner collection unit (TCU) sensor (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) ......................... 471
Reservoir unit (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) ......................................................... 472
Auto size sensor .............................................................................................................................. 473
Front cover open sensor (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) ........................................ 474
Feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper (ACCESS ONLY) .............................. 475
Right door ........................................................................................................................................ 476
Fuser out sensor (on the right door) ............................................................................................... 477
Feed 2 sensor (on the right door) ................................................................................................... 478
Tray 1 unit (on the right door) ......................................................................................................... 479
Tray 1 empty sensor ....................................................................................................................... 480
Tray 1 paper length sensor ............................................................................................................. 481
Tray 1 solenoid ................................................................................................................................ 482
Output unit ...................................................................................................................................... 483
Return sensor (on the output unit) ................................................................................................. 484
Duplex 1 sensor (on the output unit) .............................................................................................. 485
Output 1 bin full sensor (on the output unit) .................................................................................. 486
Output gate solenoid (on the output unit) ...................................................................................... 487
Internal hard disk drive (HDD) ......................................................................................................... 488
Pickup unit 2 .................................................................................................................................... 489
Pickup lifting and empty sensor (pickup unit 2) ............................................................................. 490
Prefeed sensor 2 (pickup unit 2) ..................................................................................................... 491
Pickup unit 1 .................................................................................................................................... 492
Pickup lifting and empty sensor (pickup unit 1) ............................................................................. 493

ENWW xvii
 Prefeed sensor 1 (pickup unit 1) ..................................................................................................... 494
Registration assembly (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) ........................................... 495
Registration sensor assembly (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) ............................... 496
High voltage terminal (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) ............................................ 497
Flow (z bundles) document feeder .................................................................................................................... 498
Document feeder jam access cover ................................................................................................ 498
Document feeder input tray ............................................................................................................ 499
Document feeder contact image sensor (CIS) ................................................................................ 500
Document feeder front motor ........................................................................................................ 501
Document feeder rear motors ........................................................................................................ 502
Document feeder PCA fan ............................................................................................................... 503
Document feeder contact image sensor (CIS) fan .......................................................................... 504
Document feeder ultrasonic sensor with PCA ................................................................................ 505
Document feeder white backing (z bundles) .................................................................................. 506
Document feeder white backing (dn bundles) ................................................................................ 506
Scanner unit (image scanner unit) .................................................................................................................... 507
Scanner whole unit .......................................................................................................................... 507
Scan glass ........................................................................................................................................ 508
Scanner LED lamp module .............................................................................................................. 509
Scanner imaging unit ...................................................................................................................... 510
Scan joint board ............................................................................................................................... 511
Scanner APS sensor ........................................................................................................................ 512
Front cover open switch (HP Color LaserJet MFP E77822, E77825, E77830) ............................... 513
Scanner front cover open switch (HP LaserJet MFP E72525, E72530, E72535) ........................... 514
Right door open switch ................................................................................................................... 515
Dual HCI feeder (DCF) ........................................................................................................................................ 516
Dual HCI feeder (DCF) rear cover ..................................................................................................... 517
Dual HCI feeder (DCF) right door ..................................................................................................... 518
Dual HCI feeder (DCF) motor ........................................................................................................... 519
Dual HCI feeder (DCF) pickup motor ................................................................................................ 520
Dual HCI feeder (DCF) PCA ............................................................................................................... 521
Dual HCI feeder (DCF) pickup units ................................................................................................. 522
Bottom high-capacity input (HCI) tray .............................................................................................................. 523
Bottom HCI rear cover ..................................................................................................................... 523
Bottom HCI tray feed motor ............................................................................................................ 523
Bottom HCI tray pickup motor ........................................................................................................ 524
Bottom HCI tray PCA ........................................................................................................................ 525
Bottom HCI tray lift-up motor ......................................................................................................... 526
Bottom HCI tray shaft motor ........................................................................................................... 527
Side high capacity input (sHCI) .......................................................................................................................... 528
sHCI right cover ............................................................................................................................... 528

xviii ENWW
 sHCI cable cover .............................................................................................................................. 528
sHCI rear cover ................................................................................................................................. 528
sHCI feed motor ............................................................................................................................... 528
sHCI pickup motor ........................................................................................................................... 529
sHCI PCA ........................................................................................................................................... 530
sHCI lift-up motor ............................................................................................................................ 531
Inner finisher ...................................................................................................................................................... 532
Remove and replace ........................................................................................................................ 532
Entrance sensor ............................................................................................................ 533
Entrance motor ............................................................................................................. 534
Exit sensor .................................................................................................................... 535
Exit motor ..................................................................................................................... 536
Sub Paddle Shaft Sub assembly ................................................................................... 537
Front Jogger Motor ....................................................................................................... 538
Front Jogger Home Sensor ........................................................................................... 539
Rear Jogger Motor ......................................................................................................... 540
Rear Jogger Home Sensor ............................................................................................ 541
Stapler ........................................................................................................................... 542
Stapler position sensor assembly ................................................................................ 543
Traverse Motor .............................................................................................................. 544
Stacker Motor ................................................................................................................ 545
Stacker Encoder Sensor ................................................................................................ 546
Stacker Lower Limit Switch ........................................................................................... 547
Stack Beam Sensor ....................................................................................................... 548
Stack Position Sensor ................................................................................................... 549
Paper Holding Lever Solenoid ...................................................................................... 550
Paper Support Motor .................................................................................................... 551
Paper Support Home Sensor ........................................................................................ 552
Ejector Motor assembly ................................................................................................ 553
Main Paddle Motor ........................................................................................................ 554
Main Paddle Home Sensor ............................................................................................ 555
Main Paddle ................................................................................................................... 556
Ejector assembly ........................................................................................................... 557
Punch Dust Full Sensor ................................................................................................. 558
Door Switch ................................................................................................................... 559
Top Door Switch ............................................................................................................ 560
End Fence Home Sensor ............................................................................................... 561

6 Course exam .............................................................................................................................................. 563

Course exam overview ...................................................................................................................................... 564

ENWW xix
 7 Library ...................................................................................................................................................... 565
Additional resources .......................................................................................................................................... 566

8 Course elements ........................................................................................................................................ 567

Appendix A HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540, E82550, E82560 and HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87640,
E87640, E87650 service and support training training ..................................................................................... 571

xx ENWW
1 Tour the printer

ENWW 1
 Student performance objectives
Tour the printer

This course module provides an overview of the printers, compares the printers to the previous models, and
introduces some of the new and important printer features.

By the completion of this module, learners should be able to:

● Identify and describe key features and specifications of the HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540, E82550,
E82560 and HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87640, E87650, E87660 printers.

● Locate and identify major printer components.

● Describe the printer models for both printer lines.

● Describe new features and technologies.

● Understand which tools are available for setting up and configuring the printer.

● Understand which tools are available for remotely managing the printer.

● Identify key features of HP FutureSmart 4 firmware.

● List the available accessories and supplies.

2 Chapter 1 Tour the printer ENWW

Printer introduction
Printer overview
The HP LaserJet Managed and HP Color LaserJet Managed A3 multiple function copiers print up to 60 pages
per minute (ppm) Letter/A4 for both mono and color at a competitive hardware and operation cost per page
(OCCP) than that of its HP’s Enterprise LaserJet and Color Enterprise LaserJet printers. Separate imaging unit,
developer and toner cartridge allow higher yields on Long life consumables (LLC) and maintenance items.
Dual head scanners scan speeds up to 120/240 images per minute (imp) for Flow devices. These devices are
suitable for Enterprise, Public Sector and Managed Small and Medium Business (SMB) markets, primarily
focusing on Direct MPS, Partner MPS and Channel MPS markets.

These devices all share the same HP formatter, FutureSmart 4 firmware, Universal and discrete print drivers,
most advanced security features, full solutions and remote management support, 8 inch control panel and
user interface as HP’s LaserJet Enterprise devices. The Z models offer Flow features such as built in OCR, Scan
and send directly to Microsoft’s SharePoint, retractable keyboard, document feeder input up to 250 sheets,
and faster scan speeds.

They offer common parts for improved serviceability resulting in a low service cost per page with leadership
in reliability.

All printers share the same advanced optional inner finisher and console finishing devices with or without hole
punch capability. Overall, they have a higher input capacity for both workgroup and department devices.

HP LaserJet Managed and HP Color Managed A3 Copier Workgroup Features

A partial list of features for Workgroup both mono and color devices includes the following:

● Mono prints up to 60 ppm Letter/A4

● Color prints up to 60 ppm Letter/A4

● Scan/Copy speeds DN models 90/120 ipm, Flow 120/240 ipm Letter/A4

● ADF input capacity DN model up to 100 sheets, Z (Flow) model up to 250 sheets

● Auto duplex with 100% duplex efficiency Letter/A4

● Color 8 inch touch screen control panel

● Enhanced Power control

◦ Energy Star and Blue Angel compliant

◦ Auto-on/Auto-off

◦ 1 watt standby mode

● Extensibility: FutureSmart 4 firmware, OXP interface, and hardware integration pocket (HIP) provide
integration with HP and third party solutions.

● Easy access USB: Walk up for printing and scanning without a computer and updating firmware.

● Easy to use setup and configuration tools

◦ Wizard-based, first-time setup

● Optional wireless and remote printing

ENWW Printer introduction 3

 ◦ Near field Communication (NFC) accessory supports Touch to Print and Direct Wireless printing.

◦ HP ePrint

◦ Apple AirPrint

◦ Google CloudPrint

● Input Capacity

◦ Tray 1 100 sheets (standard)

◦ 2x520 sheet feeders (standard)

◦ Optional 2x520 sheet feeder or 2K bottom HCI (Letter/A4) or 3K side HCI (sHCI)

◦ Maximum input capacity 6,140 sheets

● Optional Finishing Output

◦ 500 sheet output tray (standard)

◦ Inner finisher up to 550 sheets with optional Hole Punch (2/3, 2/4 and Swedish)

◦ Stapler/Stacker High-volume Finisher up to 3,250 sheets with optional hole punch (2/3, 2/4 and
Swedish)

◦ Booklet Finisher up to 2,250 sheets with optional hole punch (2/3, 2/4 and Swedish) (supports C
and V folds)

◦ Job Separator

● Other Optional Accessories

◦ Analog Fax

◦ Cabinet Stand

◦ 2x internal USB ports

◦ 500GB FIPPS (optional) hard disk drive

◦ Trusted Platform Module (TPM)

◦ Wireless printing

● Flow (Z models) Features:

◦ Retractable keyboard

◦ HP EveryPage Technologies including ultrasonic multi-feed detection

◦ Embedded optical character recognition (OCR)

◦ Automated page orientation (for pages that have at least 100 characters of text)

◦ Microsoft SharePoint capable

◦ Automatic document feeder (ADF)

4 Chapter 1 Tour the printer ENWW

 ● Input capacity up to 250 sheets

● Scans up to 120/240 imp

ENWW Printer introduction 5

 Product features and comparison
Overview
This sections contains information on product specifications and configuration options.

● Printer specifications

● Configuration options

6 Chapter 1 Tour the printer ENWW

Printer specifications

Overview

IMPORTANT: The following specifications are correct at the time of publication, but they are subject to
change. For current information, see www.hp.com/support/colorlje87600mfp, www.hp.com/support/
colorlje82500mfp.

● Technical specifications

● Supported operating systems

● Mobile printing solutions

● Printer dimensions

● Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions

● Operating-environment range

Technical specifications

Table 1-1 E87640dn, E87640z, E87650dn, E87650z, E87650z, E87660dn, E87660z

Model number E87640dn E87640z E87650dn E87650z E87660dn E87660z

Product number X3A87A X3A86A X3A90A X3A89A X3A93A X3A92A

Paper handling Tray 1 (100-sheet

capacity)

Tray 2 (520-sheet
capacity)

Tray 3 (520-sheet
capacity)

2 x 520-sheet paper Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

feeder

2,000-sheet high- Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

capacity input tray

3,000-sheet side- Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

mount high-capacity
input tray

Printer cabinet Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

Stapler/stacker Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

finishing accessory*

Booklet maker Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

finishing accessory*

Inner finisher Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

accessory*

2/3 hole punch Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

accessory*

2/4 hole punch Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

accessory*

ENWW Printer introduction 7

 Table 1-1 E87640dn, E87640z, E87650dn, E87650z, E87650z, E87660dn, E87660z (continued)

Model number E87640dn E87640z E87650dn E87650z E87660dn E87660z

Product number X3A87A X3A86A X3A90A X3A89A X3A93A X3A92A

Swedish hole punch Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

accessory*

HP Job separator Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

Automatic duplex
printing

Connectivity 10/100/1000
Ethernet LAN
connection with IPv4
and IPv6

Hi-Speed USB 2.0

Easy-access USB port

for printing without a
computer and
upgrading the
firmware

Hardware Integration
Pocket for connecting
accessory and third-
party devices

Memory 7 GB base memory

Mass storage 2 x 320 GB HP Secure

High-Performance
Hard Disk

Security HP Trusted Platform

Module

Control-panel display Color touchscreen

control panel

Retractable keyboard Not Not Not

supported supported supported

Print Prints 40 pages per Not Not Not Not

minute (ppm) on A4 supported supported supported supported
and on letter-size
paper.

Prints 50 pages per Not Not Not Not

minute (ppm) on A4 supported supported supported supported
and on letter-size
paper

Prints 60 pages per Not Not Not Not

minute (ppm) on A4 supported supported supported supported
and on letter-size
paper

Easy-access USB
printing (no computer
required)

Fax Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

8 Chapter 1 Tour the printer ENWW

Table 1-1 E87640dn, E87640z, E87650dn, E87650z, E87650z, E87660dn, E87660z (continued)

Model number E87640dn E87640z E87650dn E87650z E87660dn E87660z

Product number X3A87A X3A86A X3A90A X3A89A X3A93A X3A92A

Copy and Scan Scans 90 pages per Not Not Not

minute (ppm) on A4 supported supported supported
and letter-size paper

Scans 120 pages per Not Not Not

minute (ppm) on A4 supported supported supported
and letter-size paper

250-page document
feeder with dual-head
scanning for single-
pass duplex copying
and scanning

HP EveryPage Not Not Not

Technologies including supported supported supported
ultrasonic multi-feed
detection

Embedded optical Not Not Not

character recognition supported supported supported
(OCR) provides the
ability to convert
printed pages into text
that can be edited or
searched using a
computer

SMART Label feature Not Not Not

provides paper-edge supported supported supported
detection for
automatic page
cropping

Automatic page Not Not Not

orientation for pages supported supported supported
that have at least 100
characters of text

Automatic tone Not Not Not

adjustment sets supported supported supported
contrast, brightness,
and background
removal for each page

Digital Send Send documents to E-

mail, USB, and shared
folders on a network

Send documents to Not Not Not

SharePoint® supported supported supported
* Hole punch accessories are optional for the stapler/stacker, inner-finisher, and booklet maker accessories.

ENWW Printer introduction 9

 Table 1-2 E82540dn, E82540z, E82550dn, E82550z, E82560dn. E82560z
Model number E82540dn E82540z E82550dn E82550z E82560dn E82560z

Product number X3A69A X3A68A X3A72A X3A71A X3A75A X3A74A

Paper handling Tray 1 (100-sheet

capacity)

Tray 2 (520-sheet
capacity)

Tray 3 (520-sheet
capacity)

2 x 520-sheet paper Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

feeder

2,000-sheet high- Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

capacity input tray

3,000-sheet side- Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

mount high-capacity
input tray

Printer cabinet Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

Stapler/stacker Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

finishing accessory*

Booklet maker Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

finishing accessory*

Inner finisher Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

accessory*

2/3 hole punch Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

accessory*

2/4 hole punch Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

accessory*

Swedish hole punch Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

accessory*

HP Job separator Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

Automatic duplex
printing

Connectivity 10/100/1000
Ethernet LAN
connection with IPv4
and IPv6

Hi-Speed USB 2.0

Easy-access USB port

for printing without a
computer and
upgrading the
firmware

Hardware Integration
Pocket for connecting
accessory and third-
party devices

10 Chapter 1 Tour the printer ENWW

Table 1-2 E82540dn, E82540z, E82550dn, E82550z, E82560dn. E82560z (continued)

Model number E82540dn E82540z E82550dn E82550z E82560dn E82560z

Product number X3A69A X3A68A X3A72A X3A71A X3A75A X3A74A

Memory 7 GB base memory

Mass storage 2 x 320 GB HP Secure

High-Performance
Hard Disk

Security HP Trusted Platform

Module

Control-panel display Color touchscreen

control panel

Retractable keyboard Not Not Not

supported supported supported

Print Prints 40 pages per Not Not Not Not

minute (ppm) on A4 supported supported supported supported
and on letter-size
paper.

Prints 50 pages per Not Not Not Not

minute (ppm) on A4 supported supported supported supported
and on letter-size
paper

Prints 60 pages per Not Not Not Not

minute (ppm) on A4 supported supported supported supported
and on letter-size
paper

Easy-access USB
printing (no computer
required)

Fax Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

Copy and Scan Scans 90 pages per Not Not Not

minute (ppm) on A4 supported supported supported
and letter-size paper

Scans 120 pages per Not Not Not

minute (ppm) on A4 supported supported supported
and letter-size paper

250-page document
feeder with dual-head
scanning for single-
pass duplex copying
and scanning

HP EveryPage Not Not Not

Technologies including supported supported supported
ultrasonic multi-feed
detection

ENWW Printer introduction 11

 Table 1-2 E82540dn, E82540z, E82550dn, E82550z, E82560dn. E82560z (continued)

Model number E82540dn E82540z E82550dn E82550z E82560dn E82560z

Product number X3A69A X3A68A X3A72A X3A71A X3A75A X3A74A

Embedded optical Not Not Not

character recognition supported supported supported
(OCR) provides the
ability to convert
printed pages into text
that can be edited or
searched using a
computer

SMART Label feature Not Not Not

provides paper-edge supported supported supported
detection for
automatic page
cropping

Automatic page Not Not Not

orientation for pages supported supported supported
that have at least 100
characters of text

Automatic tone Not Not Not

adjustment sets supported supported supported
contrast, brightness,
and background
removal for each page

Digital Send Send documents to E-

mail, USB, and shared
folders on a network

Send documents to Not Not Not

SharePoint® supported supported supported
* Hole punch accessories are optional for the stapler/stacker, inner-finisher, and booklet maker accessories.

Supported operating systems

The following information applies to the Printer-Specific Windows PCL 6 and HP print drivers for OS X and to
the software installer.

Windows: The HP Software Installer can be downloaded from the printer support website for this printer and
installs the “HP PCL.6” version 3 print driver, the “HP PCL 6” version 3 print driver, or the “HP PCL-6” version 4
print driver, depending on the Windows operating system, along with optional software when using the
software installer. Download the "HP PCL.6" version 3 print driver, the "HP PCL 6" version 3 print driver, and
the "HP PCL-6" version 4 print driver from the printer-support website for this printer: www.hp.com/support/
colorlje87600mfp, www.hp.com/support/colorlje82500mfp.

OS X: Mac computers are supported with this printer. Download HP Easy Start either from 123.hp.com/
LaserJet or from the Printer Support page, and then use HP Easy Start to install the HP print driver. HP Easy
Start is not included in the HP Software Installer.

1. Go to 123.hp.com/LaserJet.

2. Follow the steps provided to download the printer software.

Linux: For information and print drivers for Linux, go to www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting.

12 Chapter 1 Tour the printer ENWW

 UNIX: For information and print drivers for UNIX®, go to www.hp.com/go/unixmodelscripts.

Table 1-3 Supported operating systems and print drivers

Operating system Print driver installed (from the software Notes
on the web)

Windows® XP SP3, 32-bit The “HP PCL.6” printer-specific print driver Microsoft retired mainstream support for
is installed for this operating system as Windows XP in April 2009. HP will continue
part of the software installation. to provide best effort support for the
discontinued XP operating system. Some
features and page sizes in the print driver
are not supported.

Windows Vista®, 32-bit The “HP PCL.6” printer-specific print driver Microsoft retired mainstream support for
is installed for this operating system as Windows Vista in April 2012. HP will
part of the software installation. continue to provide best effort support for
the discontinued Vista operating system.
Some features and page sizes in the print
driver are not supported.

Windows Server 2003 SP2, 32-bit The “HP PCL.6” printer-specific print driver Microsoft retired mainstream support for
is available for download from the printer- Windows Server 2003 in July 2010. HP will
support website. Download the driver, and continue to provide best effort support for
then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to the discontinued Server 2003 operating
install it. system. Some features and page sizes in
the print driver are not supported.

Windows 7 SP1, 32-bit and 64-bit The “HP PCL 6” printer-specific print driver
is installed for this operating system as
part of the software installation.

Windows 8, 32-bit and 64-bit The “HP PCL 6” printer-specific print driver Windows 8 RT support is provided through
is installed for this operating system as Microsoft IN OS Version 4, 32- bit driver.
part of the software installation.

Windows 8.1, 32-bit and 64-bit The “HP PCL-6” V4 printer-specific print Windows 8.1 RT support is provided
driver is installed for this operating system through Microsoft IN OS Version 4, 32- bit
as part of the software installation. driver.

Windows 10, 32-bit and 64-bit The “HP PCL-6” V4 printer-specific print
driver is installed for this operating system
as part of the software installation.

Windows Server 2008 SP2, 32-bit The “HP PCL.6” printer-specific print driver Microsoft retired mainstream support for
is available for download from the printer- Windows Server 2008 in January 2015. HP
support website. Download the driver, and will continue to provide best effort support
then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to for the discontinued Server 2008 operating
install it. system. Some features and page sizes in
the print driver are not supported.

Windows Server 2008 SP2, 64-bit The “HP PCL 6” printer-specific print driver
is available for download from the printer-
support website. Download the driver, and
then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to
install it.

Windows Server 2008 R2, SP 1, 64-bit The “HP PCL 6” printer-specific print driver
is available for download from the printer-
support website. Download the driver, and
then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to
install it.

ENWW Printer introduction 13

 Table 1-3 Supported operating systems and print drivers (continued)

Operating system Print driver installed (from the software Notes

on the web)

Windows Server 2012, 64-bit The PCL 6 printer-specific print driver is

available for download from the printer-
support website. Download the driver, and
then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to
install it.

Windows Server 2012 R2, 64-bit The PCL 6 printer-specific print driver is
available for download from the printer-
support website. Download the driver, and
then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to
install it.

OS X 10.10 Yosemite, OS X 10.11 El To install the print driver, download HP

Capitan, and OS X 10.12 Sierra Easy Start from 123.hp.com/LaserJet.
Follow the steps provided to install the
printer software and print driver.

NOTE: Supported operating systems can change. For a current list of supported operating systems, go to
www.hp.com/support/colorlje87600mfp, www.hp.com/support/colorlje82500mfp for HP's all-inclusive help
for the printer.

NOTE: For details on client and server operating systems and for HP UPD driver support for this printer, go
to www.hp.com/go/upd. Under Additional information, click the links.

Table 1-4 Minimum system requirements

Windows OS X

● An Internet connection ● Internet connection

● Dedicated USB 1.1 or 2.0 connection or a network ● 1 GB of available hard-disk space

connection

● 2 GB of available hard-disk space

Mobile printing solutions

HP offers multiple mobile and ePrint solutions to enable easy printing to an HP printer from a laptop, tablet,
smartphone, or other mobile device. To see the full list and to determine the best choice, go to
www.hp.com/go/LaserJetMobilePrinting.

NOTE: Update the printer firmware to ensure all mobile printing and ePrint capabilities are supported.

● Wi-Fi Direct (wireless models only)

● HP ePrint via email (Requires HP Web Services to be enabled and the printer to be registered with
HP Connected)

● HP ePrint app (Available for Android, iOS, and Blackberry)

● HP All-in-One Remote app for iOS and Android devices

● HP ePrint software

14 Chapter 1 Tour the printer ENWW

 ● Google Cloud Print

● AirPrint

● Android Printing

Printer dimensions

2
3 2
3

Table 1-5 Dimensions of the E87640dn, E87640z, E87650dn, E87650z, E87660dn, and E87660z models

Printer fully closed Printer fully opened

1. Height 928 mm (36.5 in) 1378 mm (54.2 in)

2. Depth 780 mm (30.7 in) 1290 mm (50.7 in)

3. Width 584 mm (22.9 in) 1290 mm (50.7 in)

Weight 122 kg (268.96 lb)

Table 1-6 Dimensions of the E82540dn, E82540z, E82550dn, E82550z, E82560dn, and E82560z models

Printer fully closed Printer fully opened

1. Height 928 mm (36.5 in) 1378 mm (54.2 in)

2. Depth 780 mm (30.7 in) 1290 mm (50.7 in)

3. Width 584 mm (22.9 in) 1290 mm (50.7 in)

Weight 97.3 kg (214.5 lb)

Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions

See www.hp.com/support/colorlje87600mfp, www.hp.com/support/colorlje82500mfp for current

information.

CAUTION: Power requirements are based on the country/region where the printer is sold. Do not convert
operating voltages. This will damage the printer and void the printer warranty.

ENWW Printer introduction 15

 Operating-environment range

Table 1-7 Operating-environment specifications

Environment Recommended Allowed

Temperature 17° to 25°C (62.6° to 77°F) 10° to 30°C (50° to 86°F)

Relative humidity 30% to 70% relative humidity (RH) 10% to 80% (RH)

Altitude Not applicable 0 to 3048 m (0 to 10,000 ft)

Configuration options

HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87640, E87640, E87650

8 1
2

3
7

6 5 4

Number Component Product number

1 HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87640, E87640, ● E87640

E87650
◦ dn models: X3A78A

◦ z models: X3A77A

● E87640

◦ dn models: X3A81A

◦ z models: X3A80A

● E87650

◦ dn models: X3A84A

◦ z models: X3A83A

2 HP LaserJet Workgroup Cabinet Y1G17A

3 HP LaserJet 2000 Sheet High Capacity Tray WG Y1F99A

4 HP LaserJet Dual Cassette Workgroup Feeder Y1F97A

16 Chapter 1 Tour the printer ENWW

 Number Component Product number

5 HP LaserJet Paper Tray Heaters WG Y1G22A

The following accessories are also available:

● Y1G22A#BGJ — HP LaserJet Paper Tray

Heaters Accessory WG (110V)

● Y1G22A#B19 — HP LaserJet Paper Tray

Heaters Accessory WG (220V)

6 HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker Finisher1 Y1G18A

The following punch kits are available:

● Y1G10A — HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/3

Accessory

● Y1G11A — HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/4

Accessory

● Y1G12A — HP LaserJet Hole Punch Swedish

Accessory

7 HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher1 Y1G07A

The following punch kits are available:

● Y1G10A — HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/3

Accessory

● Y1G11A — HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/4

Accessory

● Y1G12A — HP LaserJet Hole Punch Swedish

Accessory

8 HP LaserJet Inner Finisher1 Y1G00A

The following punch kits are available:

● Y1G02A — HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/3

Punch

● Y1G03A — HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/4

Punch

● Y1G04A — HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Swedish

Punch

9 HP LaserJet Job Separator WG Y1G15A

HP Second Exit Y1G23A

1 The HP Second Exit is required the HP LaserJet Inner Finisher, HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher, and HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker Finisher.

ENWW Printer introduction 17

 HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540, E82550, E82560

1 2

9 6 4
8 7
5

Number Component Product number

1 HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540, E82550, E82560 ● E82540

◦ dn models: X3A60A

◦ z models: X3A59A

● E82540

◦ dn models: X3A63A

◦ z models: X3A62A

● E87650

◦ dn models: X3A66A

◦ z models: X3A65A

2 HP Spacer Y1G24A

3 HP LaserJet Workgroup Cabinet Y1G17A

4 HP LaserJet 2000 Sheet High Capacity Tray WG Y1F99A

5 HP LaserJet Dual Cassette Workgroup Feeder Y1F97A

6 HP LaserJet Paper Tray Heaters WG Y1G22A

The following accessories are also available:

● Y1G22A#BGJ — HP LaserJet Paper Tray

Heaters Accessory WG (110V)

● Y1G22A#B19 — HP LaserJet Paper Tray

Heaters Accessory WG (220V)

7 HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker Finisher1 Y1G19A

The following punch kits are available:

● Y1G10A — HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/3

Accessory

● Y1G11A — HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/4

Accessory

● Y1G12A — HP LaserJet Hole Punch Swedish

Accessory

18 Chapter 1 Tour the printer ENWW

 Number Component Product number

8 HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher1 Y1G07A

The following punch kits are available:

● Y1G10A — HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/3

Accessory

● Y1G11A — HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/4

Accessory

● Y1G12A — HP LaserJet Hole Punch Swedish

Accessory

9 HP LaserJet Inner Finisher1 Y1G00A

The following punch kits are available:

● Y1G02A — HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/3

Punch

● Y1G03A — HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/4

Punch

● Y1G04A — HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Swedish

Punch

10 HP LaserJet Job Separator WG Y1G15A

HP Second Exit Y1G23A

1 The HP Second Exit is required the HP LaserJet Inner Finisher, HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher, and HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker Finisher.

Paper handling
Paper handling specifications
Table 1-8 Paper handling specifications
Media type Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3

Min: 98.0x148.0mm (3.86x5.83 in) Min: 1439x210mm (5.48x8.27in) Min: 139x210mm (5.48x8.27in)

Max: 297.9x432.0mm (11.69x17.0 Max: 297x364mm (11.69x14.33in) Max: 297x364mm (11.69x17.0 in)
in)

Any Type

Plain

HP EcoFFICIENT

HP Matte 90g

Light 60-74g

Bond

Recycled

HP Matte 105g

HP Matte 120g

ENWW Printer introduction 19

 Table 1-8 Paper handling specifications (continued)

HP Soft Gloss
120g*

HP Glossy 120g*

Mid-Weight
96-110g

Heavy 111-130g

Mid-WtGlossy
96-110g*

Hvy Glossy
111-130g*

HP Matte 150g

HP Glossy 150g*

Extra Heavy
131-175g

XHvyGlossy
131-175g*

HP Matte 200g

Cardstock
176-220g

Labels

Letterhead

Envelope

Preprinted

Prepunched

Colored
* Color models only

Paper handling

Paper handling overview

Both printers accept the same paper sizes and weights. Find complete specifications at the printer-specific
support sites or by searching the printer model number on www.hp.com.

Understand paper use

For best results, use genuine, HP toner cartridges.

This printer supports a variety of paper and other print media. Paper or print media that does not meet the
following guidelines might cause poor print quality, increased jams, and premature wear on the printer.

It is possible for paper to meet all of these guidelines and still not produce satisfactory results. This might be
the result of improper handling, unacceptable temperature and/or humidity levels, or other variables over
which HP has no control.

20 Chapter 1 Tour the printer ENWW

 CAUTION: Using paper or print media that does not meet HP's specifications might cause problems for the
printer, requiring repair. This repair is not covered by the HP warranty or service agreements.

● For best results, use only HP-brand paper and print media designed for LaserJet printers or multiuse.

● Use paper or print media made for LaserJet printers.

● HP cannot recommend the use of other brands of media because HP cannot control their quality.

Use the following guidelines to obtain satisfactory results when using special paper or print media. Set the
paper type and size in the printer driver to obtain the best results.

Media type Do Do not

Envelopes ● Store envelopes flat. ● Do not use envelopes that are

wrinkled, nicked, stuck together, or
● Use envelopes where the seam otherwise damaged.
extends all the way to the corner of
the envelope. ● Do not use envelopes that have
clasps, snaps, windows, or coated
linings.

Labels ● Use only labels that have no exposed ● Do not use labels that have wrinkles
backing between them. or bubbles, or are damaged.

● Use labels that lie flat. ● Do not print partial sheets of labels.

● Use only full sheets of labels.

Letterhead or preprinted forms ● Use only letterhead or forms ● Do not use raised or metallic
approved for use in LaserJet printers. letterhead.

Heavy paper ● Use only heavy paper that is ● Do not use paper that is heavier than
approved for use in LaserJet printers the recommended media
and meets the weight specifications specification for this printer unless it
for this printer. is HP paper that has been approved
for use in this printer.

Glossy or coated paper ● Use only glossy or coated paper that ● Do not use glossy or coated paper
is approved for use in LaserJet designed for use in ink printers.
printers.

● Print on the correct side of this type

of paper.

● Only print simplex when using this

type of paper.

Copy and Scan features

This MFP has a built-in flatbed scanner and ADF. The scanner and ADF are used for the copy, fax, and digital-
send features.

Copy: The printer can make copies of single-page or multiple-page documents up to SA3 (12x18) size.

Scan: The printer can scan black and white or color documents for the following features:

● Fax

● Send to SharePoint®

● Save to Device Memory

ENWW Printer introduction 21

 ● Save to Network Folder

● Save to USB

ADF features:

● High capacity: HP EveryPage, and Single Pass Duplex.

● Standard media formats: Letter, Legal, A4, A3, and 11x17

● HP EveryPage (Flow models only): Ultrasonic sensor detects when multiple pages are picked up or
when a page has a note attached to it.

● Single-pass duplex scanning: A second scan head that is built in to the ADF scans the back side of the
document.

22 Chapter 1 Tour the printer ENWW

Printer views
Printer front view
1 2
3
17 4
16 5
6
7
15 8
9 10

12

13
14 11

1 Automatic document feeder cover (access for clearing jams)

2 Automatic document feeder width guides

3 Automatic document feeder input tray

4 Automatic document feeder output tray

5 Control panel with color touchscreen display (tilts up for easier viewing)

6 Physical keyboard (Flow models only). Pull the keyboard straight out to use it.

CAUTION: Close the keyboard when it is not in use.

7 Right door (access for clearing jams)

8 On/off button

9 Tray 1

10 Power switch

11 Power connection

12 Front door (access to the toner cartridges)

13 Tray 2

14 Tray 3

ENWW Printer views 23

 15 Output bin

16 Easy-access USB port

Insert a USB flash drive for printing or scanning without a computer or to update the printer firmware.

NOTE: An administrator must enable this port before use.

17 Hardware integration pocket (for connecting accessory and third-party devices)

Printer back view

1 Formatter cover

2 Interface ports

3 Serial number and product number label

24 Chapter 1 Tour the printer ENWW

Interface ports

1 USB port for connecting external USB devices

NOTE: For easy-access USB printing, use the USB port near the control panel.

2 Local area network (LAN) Ethernet network port

3 Hi-Speed USB 2.0 printing port

ENWW Printer views 25

 Control-panel view
NOTE: Tilt the control panel for easier viewing.

The Home screen provides access to the printer features and indicates the current status of the printer.

Return to the Home screen at any time by touching the Home button. Touch the Home button on
the left side of the printer control panel, or touch the Home button in the upper-left corner of most screens.

NOTE: The features that appear on the Home screen can vary, depending on the printer configuration.

2 3 4 5

6
1

1 Touch the Home button to return to the Home screen.

Home button

2 Reset button The Reset button returns the printer to default settings and is always present if users are not logged
in. The Reset button is not present when the Sign Out button is present. Touch the Reset button to
resume and release jobs from the previous pause state and interrupt mode, reset the quick copy
count in the copy count field, exit special modes, reset the display language and the keyboard
layout.

3 Sign In or Sign Out Touch the Sign In button to access secured features.
button
Touch the Sign Out button to sign out of the printer. The printer restores all options to the default
settings.

NOTE: This button displays only if the administrator has configured the printer to require
permission for access to features.

26 Chapter 1 Tour the printer ENWW

 4 Touch the information button to access a screen that provides access to several types of printer
Information information. Touch the buttons at the bottom of the screen for the following information:
button ● Display Language: Change the language setting for the current user session.

● Sleep Mode: Place the printer into sleep mode.

● Wi-Fi Direct: View information for how to connect directly to the printer using a phone, tablet,
or other device with Wi-Fi.

● Wireless: View or change wireless connection settings (only when an optional wireless
accessory is installed).

● Ethernet: View or change Ethernet connection settings.

● HP Web Services: View information to connect and print to the printer using HP Web Services
(ePrint).

5 Touch the Help button to open the embedded help system.

Help button
The status line provides information about the overall printer status.

6 Applications area Touch any of the icons to open the application. Swipe the screen sideways to access more
applications.

NOTE: The available applications vary by printer. The administrator can configure which
applications appear and the order in which they appear.

7 Start Copy button Touch the Start Copy button to start a copy job.

8 Home-screen page Indicates the number of pages on the Home screen or in an application. The current page is
indicator highlighted. Swipe the screen sideways to scroll between pages.

ENWW Printer views 27

 Supported operating systems
The following information applies to the Printer-Specific Windows PCL 6 and HP print drivers for OS X and to
the software installer.

Windows: The HP Software Installer can be downloaded from the printer support website for this printer and
installs the “HP PCL.6” version 3 print driver, the “HP PCL 6” version 3 print driver, or the “HP PCL-6” version 4
print driver, depending on the Windows operating system, along with optional software when using the
software installer. Download the "HP PCL.6" version 3 print driver, the "HP PCL 6" version 3 print driver, and
the "HP PCL-6" version 4 print driver from the printer-support website for this printer: www.hp.com/support/
colorlje87600mfp, www.hp.com/support/colorlje82500mfp.

OS X: Mac computers are supported with this printer. Download HP Easy Start either from 123.hp.com/
LaserJet or from the Printer Support page, and then use HP Easy Start to install the HP print driver. HP Easy
Start is not included in the HP Software Installer.

1. Go to 123.hp.com/LaserJet.

2. Follow the steps provided to download the printer software.

Linux: For information and print drivers for Linux, go to www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting.

UNIX: For information and print drivers for UNIX®, go to www.hp.com/go/unixmodelscripts.

Table 1-9 Supported operating systems and print drivers

Operating system Print driver installed (from the software Notes
on the web)

Windows® XP SP3, 32-bit The “HP PCL.6” printer-specific print driver Microsoft retired mainstream support for
is installed for this operating system as Windows XP in April 2009. HP will continue
part of the software installation. to provide best effort support for the
discontinued XP operating system. Some
features and page sizes in the print driver
are not supported.

Windows Vista®, 32-bit The “HP PCL.6” printer-specific print driver Microsoft retired mainstream support for
is installed for this operating system as Windows Vista in April 2012. HP will
part of the software installation. continue to provide best effort support for
the discontinued Vista operating system.
Some features and page sizes in the print
driver are not supported.

Windows Server 2003 SP2, 32-bit The “HP PCL.6” printer-specific print driver Microsoft retired mainstream support for
is available for download from the printer- Windows Server 2003 in July 2010. HP will
support website. Download the driver, and continue to provide best effort support for
then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to the discontinued Server 2003 operating
install it. system. Some features and page sizes in
the print driver are not supported.

Windows 7 SP1, 32-bit and 64-bit The “HP PCL 6” printer-specific print driver
is installed for this operating system as
part of the software installation.

Windows 8, 32-bit and 64-bit The “HP PCL 6” printer-specific print driver Windows 8 RT support is provided through
is installed for this operating system as Microsoft IN OS Version 4, 32- bit driver.
part of the software installation.

Windows 8.1, 32-bit and 64-bit The “HP PCL-6” V4 printer-specific print Windows 8.1 RT support is provided
driver is installed for this operating system through Microsoft IN OS Version 4, 32- bit
as part of the software installation. driver.

28 Chapter 1 Tour the printer ENWW

 Table 1-9 Supported operating systems and print drivers (continued)

Operating system Print driver installed (from the software Notes

on the web)

Windows 10, 32-bit and 64-bit The “HP PCL-6” V4 printer-specific print
driver is installed for this operating system
as part of the software installation.

Windows Server 2008 SP2, 32-bit The “HP PCL.6” printer-specific print driver Microsoft retired mainstream support for
is available for download from the printer- Windows Server 2008 in January 2015. HP
support website. Download the driver, and will continue to provide best effort support
then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to for the discontinued Server 2008 operating
install it. system. Some features and page sizes in
the print driver are not supported.

Windows Server 2008 SP2, 64-bit The “HP PCL 6” printer-specific print driver
is available for download from the printer-
support website. Download the driver, and
then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to
install it.

Windows Server 2008 R2, SP 1, 64-bit The “HP PCL 6” printer-specific print driver
is available for download from the printer-
support website. Download the driver, and
then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to
install it.

Windows Server 2012, 64-bit The PCL 6 printer-specific print driver is

available for download from the printer-
support website. Download the driver, and
then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to
install it.

Windows Server 2012 R2, 64-bit The PCL 6 printer-specific print driver is
available for download from the printer-
support website. Download the driver, and
then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to
install it.

OS X 10.10 Yosemite, OS X 10.11 El To install the print driver, download HP

Capitan, and OS X 10.12 Sierra Easy Start from 123.hp.com/LaserJet.
Follow the steps provided to install the
printer software and print driver.

NOTE: Supported operating systems can change. For a current list of supported operating systems, go to
www.hp.com/support/colorlje87600mfp, www.hp.com/support/colorlje82500mfp for HP's all-inclusive help
for the printer.

NOTE: For details on client and server operating systems and for HP UPD driver support for this printer, go
to www.hp.com/go/upd. Under Additional information, click the links.

Table 1-10 Minimum system requirements

Windows OS X

● An Internet connection ● Internet connection

● Dedicated USB 1.1 or 2.0 connection or a network ● 1 GB of available hard-disk space

connection

● 2 GB of available hard-disk space

ENWW Supported operating systems 29

 Set up and configuration tools
The printer includes set up and configuration tools for enabling and configuring features and settings. The
tools include:

Set-up Wizards

Set-up Wizards guide the user through the steps necessary to enable and configure the basic settings of
certain features. Additional settings might need to be configured using the printer control panel menus or the
printer EWS.

Wizards are available in the printer EWS (Windows and Mac). Available Wizards include:

● E-mail Setup Wizard

● Security Configuration Wizard

HP Utility for OS X (Mac only)

Use the HP Utility to check printer status or to view or change printer settings from the computer.

30 Chapter 1 Tour the printer ENWW

Remote management
Use the control panel to enable or configure most product features. Some features require the embedded web
server for remote configuration. Enterprise customers might need to manage products located in remote
offices or need to manage a fleet of products. The remote management options for the HP LaserJet Managed
MFP E82540, E82550, E82560 and HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87640, E87650, E87660 include:

● HP Embedded Web Server (EWS): Included with the product, the EWS is a Web-based tool used to
monitor the product, enable product features, and configure product settings. Additional information is
included in other sections of this course.

● HP Web Jetadmin: A free utility from HP that enables administrators to remotely manage individual
products or a fleet of products on a network.

NOTE: More information about each of the remote-management options is at www.hp.com. Search
Grow@hp for updated training resources for each of the products.

ENWW Remote management 31

 Accessories
The following accessories are available for the HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540, E82550, E82560 and
HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87640, E87650, E87660.

See the printer User Guide for full descriptions and part numbers.

Table 1-11 Accessories

Item Part number HP Color LaserJet Managed HP LaserJet Managed MFP

MFP E87640, E87640, E87650 E82540, E82550, E82560

TPM –Trusted Platform Module F5S62A

FiH USB - Foreign Interface B5L31A

Harness

AA Kit - Two internal USB ports B5L28A

for solutions

HDD - HP Secure High B5L29A

Performance Hard Disk Drive

HP JetDirect USB Wireless Print J8031A

Server

HP JetDirect Wireless Print J8030A

Server with NFC

HIP2 Adapter KT-HIP2ADP

Analog Fax Accessory CC487A Optional Optional

32 Chapter 1 Tour the printer ENWW

Supplies
Table 1-12 Supplies–HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87640, E87640, E87650

Item Product number

Cyan toner cartridge W9041MC

Magenta toner cartridge W9043MC

Yellow toner cartridge W9042MC

Black toner cartridge W9040MC

HP LaserJet CYMK Imaging Drum Unit W9044MC

HP LaserJet Toner Collection Unit W9048MC

Kit-HP LaserJet Blk Developer Unit Z7Y70A

Kit-HP LaserJet Yellow Developer Unit Z7Y91A

Kit-HP LaserJet Magenta Developer Unit Z7Y82A

Kit-HP LaserJet Cyan Developer Unit Z9M02A

Kit-HP LaserJet 110V Fuser Z7Y77A

Kit-HP LaserJet 220V Fuser Z9M03A

Kit- HP LaserJet Image Transfer Z7Y79A

Kit-HP LaserJet Image Transfer Cleaner Z7Y81A

Kit HP LaserJet Transfer Roller Z9M04A

Kit - HP LaserJet Trays 2-x Rollers Z7Y83A

Kit-HP LaserJet Tray 1 Roller Z7Y88A

Kit-HP LaserJet Flow ADF Pick Roller Z8W50A

Kit-HP LaserJet Flow ADF Separation Roller Z8W51A

Kit-HP LaserJet ADF Pick Roller Z7Y64A

Kit-HP LaserJet ADF Separation Roller Z7Y65A

Table 1-13 Supplies–HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540, E82550, E82560

Item Description Part number

Black Toner Cartridge Replacement black cartridge W9005MC

Kit-HP LaserJet Black Drum Unit HP LaserJet Black Drum Unit Kit W9006MC

HP LaserJet Toner Collection Unit HP LaserJet Toner Collection Unit W9007MC

Kit-HP LaserJet Blk Developer Unit HP LaserJet Blk Developer Unit Kit Z9M05A

Kit-HP LaserJet 110V Fuser HP LaserJet 110V Fuser Kit Z9M06A

Kit-HP LaserJet 220V Fuser HP LaserJet 220V Fuser Kit Z9M07A

Kit HP LaserJet Transfer Roller HP LaserJet Transfer Roller Kit Z9M08A

ENWW Supplies 33
 Table 1-13 Supplies–HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540, E82550, E82560 (continued)

Item Description Part number

Kit - HP LaserJet Trays 2-x Rollers HP LaserJet Trays 2-x Rollers Kit Z7Y83A

Kit-HP LaserJet Tray 1 Roller HP LaserJet Tray 1 Roller Kit Z7Y88A

Kit-HP LaserJet Flow ADF Pick Roller Z8W50A

Kit-HP LaserJet Flow ADF Separation Roller HP LaserJet Flow ADF Separation Roller Kit Z8W51A

Kit-HP LaserJet ADF Pick Roller HP LaserJet ADF Pick Roller Kit Z7Y64A

Kit-HP LaserJet ADF Separation Roller HP LaserJet ADF Separation Roller Kit Z7Y65A

34 Chapter 1 Tour the printer ENWW

Warranty
The HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540, E82550, E82560 and HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87640,
E87650, E87660 printers have 90-day, HP parts-only limited warranties.

ENWW Warranty 35
36 Chapter 1 Tour the printer ENWW
2 Set up and configure

ENWW 37
 Student performance objectives
Set up and configure

This course module describes how to unpack, set up, and test the printer hardware. When all of the steps in
this section are complete, the printer will be operational, but some advanced features might not be fully
configured. Use the instructions in the Use and maintain module of this course to enable and configure
advanced settings.

By the completion of this module, students should be able to:

● Set up the printer hardware

● Connect the printer cables

● Load trays

● Print a Configuration Page to test the printer

38 Chapter 2 Set up and configure ENWW

Set up process overview
The set up process for the HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540, E82550, E82560 and HP Color LaserJet
Managed MFP E87640, E87650, E87660 is explained in detail in the On-site Installation Guide.

The general steps for setting up the product are:

❑ Unpack the box or boxes

❑ Remove all packing material

❑ Install any paper trays or feeders (if applicable)

❑ Attach all necessary power and network cables

❑ Load paper in the paper trays

❑ Enable features and configure basic settings

❑ Print a Configuration Page report

ENWW Set up process overview 39

 Install and set up the printer hardware
Install the toner cartridges
1. Open the front door.

2. Remove the toner cartridge from the product.

3. Slide the new toner cartridge from its bag, and then remove all packing materials.

Figure 2-1 Remove toner cartridge packing materials (1 of 3)

Figure 2-2 Remove toner cartridge packing materials (2 of 3)

Figure 2-3 Remove toner cartridge packing materials (3 of 3)

4. Thoroughly roll the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge.

5. Carefully remove the cap from the toner cartridge or pull the sealing tape out of the toner cartridge.

NOTE: If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot
water sets toner into fabric.

Figure 2-4 Remove toner cartridge cap

6. Hold the toner cartridge and align it with the corresponding slot inside the machine. Insert it back into its
slot until locks in place.

7. Close the front door. Ensure that the door is securely closed.

8.

40 Chapter 2 Set up and configure ENWW

Connect the cables

1 Local area network (LAN) Ethernet (RJ-45) network port

2 Hi-Speed USB 2.0 printing port

3 USB port for connecting external USB devices (this port might be covered)

NOTE: For Easy-access USB printing, use the USB port near the control panel.

Load Trays
The paper trays are standard paper trays. Make certain that all packing material has been removed, insert the
paper stack, align the side and end paper-guides with the paper, and then close the tray.

CAUTION: Using paper or print media that does not meet HP's specifications might cause problems for the
printer, requiring repair. This repair is not covered by the HP warranty or service agreements.

● For best results, use only HP-brand paper and print media designed for LaserJet printers or multiuse.

● Use paper or print media made for LaserJet printers.

● HP cannot recommend the use of other brands of media because HP cannot control their quality.

HP LaserJet MFP Analog Fax Accessory 500

You can use the HP LaserJet MFP Analog Fax Accessory 500 driver to send faxes from your computer to one or
more HP multifunction peripherals (MFP).

Go to hp.com for more information

HP JetDirect Wireless Print Server with NFC and HP JetDirect USB Wireless Print
Server
HP Jetdirect print servers and wireless accessories add wireless printing capability to supported HP LaserJet
printers, and select HP Officejet Enterprise printers, in order to receive print jobs from a wireless-capable
laptop, smartphone, or tablet.

Go to hp.com for more information

ENWW Install and set up the printer hardware 41

 Print the configuration page
NOTE: Depending on the model, up to three pages print when printing a configuration page. In addition to
the main configuration page, the HP embedded Jetdirect configuration pages print.

Print the configuration page from a touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports tile or button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Reports

● Configuration/Status Pages

3. Touch Configuration Page to select it.

4. Touch the Print button to print the pages.

Use Initial Setup to enable features and configure basic settings

In HP FutureSmart 4, Initial Setup on the control panel allows administrators to manage items that are
required for initial product setup, such as:

● Language settings

● Date/time format features

● Date/time

The following features can be enabled through the Initial Setup menu, if desired. If the administrator chooses
not to enable the features while setting up the product, the features can also be enabled through the
Settings menu, the EWS, or Web Jetadmin. Some features can be managed using DSS.

● Email (MFP products only)

● Fax (MFP products only)

● Retrieve from USB settings

NOTE:

● Optional settings for these features are configured by accessing the Settings setup menus on the
control panel, through the EWS, or using Web Jetadmin.

● USB features are enabled through the EWS or Web Jetadmin.

Install printer software

Install printer software overview
The HP PCL 6 driver is installed for Windows operating systems along with other optional software. Mac
computers and Apple mobile devices are supported with this printer. The Mac print driver and print utility are
available for download from hp.com and may also be available via Apple Software Update. The HP Mac
software is not included in the in-box CD. The CD provides steps to download the Mac installer software from
hp.com.

42 Chapter 2 Set up and configure ENWW

 1. Go to www.hp.com/support.

2. Select the country/region.

3. Click Drivers & Downloads.

4. Enter a printer name or number.

5. In the Download Options area, click Drivers, Software & Firmware.

6. Click the relevant operating system version.

7. Click the Download button.

NOTE: For advanced setup for network-connected printers, enter the printer IP address in the address bar of
a Web browser after software installation is complete. To find the IP address, touch the Network button on
the printer control panel.

More support information for printer drivers

For more printer and problem-solving information, see the User Guide on the printer CD, and go to
www.hp.com/support. Once on this website, users should:

1. Select the relevant country/region.

2. Click Printer Support & Troubleshooting.

3. Enter the printer name.

4. Select Search.

5. Select the relevant support document.

Windows 8
Placeholder for video/animation content

Windows 10
Placeholder for video/animation content

Mac OS X
Placeholder for video/animation content

ENWW Install and set up the printer hardware 43

44 Chapter 2 Set up and configure ENWW
3 Use and maintain

ENWW 45
 Student performance objectives
Use and maintain

This module explains how to use the major features of the printers, how to clean or maintain components of
the printer, how to troubleshoot common issues, how to install CSR parts, and how to clear common paper
jams.

A customer should be able to perform all of the actions and tasks described.

By the completion of this module, students should be able to:

● Identify and use the features of the control panel.

● Use the HP Embedded Web Server

● Understand the paper handling features and options including how to load paper.

● Describe printing features including print tasks, mobile printing, and Easy-access USB printing.

● Understand how to the printer's security features including managing security settings, access control,
and data security.

● Describe the Customer Self-Repair (CSR) parts policy and replace CSR parts and supplies.

● Identify maintenance and troubleshooting steps for print jams.

46 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

Paper trays
Load paper
Introduction
CAUTION: Do not extend more than one paper tray at a time.

Do not use paper tray as a step.

Keep hands out of paper trays when closing.

All trays must be closed when moving the printer.

Load paper to Tray 1

Introduction

The following information describes how to load paper into Tray 1. This tray holds up to 100 sheets of 75
g/m2 (20 lb) paper or 10 envelopes.

NOTE: Select the correct paper type in the print driver before printing.

1. Open Tray 1.

ENWW Paper trays 47

 2. Pull out the tray extension to support the paper.

48 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

3. Use the adjustment latch to spread the paper
guides to the correct size, and then load paper in
the tray.
Make sure that the paper fits under the fill line on
the paper guides.
NOTE: The maximum stack height is 10 mm
(0.4 in), or approximately 100 sheets of 75 g/m2
(20 lb) paper.

4. Using the adjustment latch, adjust the side guides

so that they lightly touch the paper stack, but do
not bend it.

ENWW Paper trays 49

 Use alternative letterhead mode

Use the Alternative Letterhead Mode feature to load letterhead or preprinted paper into the tray the same
way for all jobs, whether printing to one side of the sheet of paper or to both sides. When using this mode,
load paper as for automatic duplex printing.

To use the feature, enable it by using the printer control-panel menus.

Enable Alternative Letterhead Mode by using the printer control-panel menus

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Settings.

2. Open the following menus:

● Copy/Print

● Manage Trays

● Alternative Letterhead Mode

3. Select On.

Load paper to Tray 2

Introduction

The following information describes how to load paper in Tray 2 and Tray 3. These trays hold up to 520 sheets
of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper.

CAUTION: The procedure to load paper to Tray 2 and Tray 3 is the same. Only Tray 2 is shown here.

1. Open the tray.

NOTE: Do not open this tray while it is in use.

50 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

2. Before loading paper, adjust the paper-width
guides by holding down the blue lock/unlock
toggle switch on the rear paper-width guide,
pinching the blue adjustment latch on the front
paper-width guide, and then sliding the guides to
the fully open position.

3. Adjust the paper-length guide by pushing in at

the bottom of the blue adjustment latch while
sliding the guide to the size of the paper being
used.

ENWW Paper trays 51

 4. Load paper into the tray.

5. Adjust the paper-length and paper-width guides

to the size of the paper being used. Check the
paper to verify the guides lightly touch the stack,
but do not bend it.
NOTE: Do not adjust the paper guides tightly
against the paper stack. Adjust them to the
indentations or markings in the tray.
NOTE: To prevent jams, adjust the paper guides
to the correct size and do not overfill the tray. Be
sure that the top of the stack is below the tray
full indicator.

52 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

6. Close the tray.

7. The tray configuration message displays on the

printer control panel.
8. Select OK to accept the detected type and size, or
select Modify to choose a different paper size or
type.
For custom-size paper, specify the X and Y
dimensions for the paper when the prompt
displays on the printer control panel.

ENWW Paper trays 53

 Use alternative letterhead mode

Use the Alternative Letterhead Mode feature to load letterhead or preprinted paper into the tray the same
way for all jobs, whether printing to one side of the sheet of paper or to both sides. When using this mode,
load paper as for automatic duplex printing.

To use the feature, enable it by using the printer control-panel menus.

Enable Alternative Letterhead Mode by using the printer control-panel menus

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Settings.

2. Open the following menus:

● Copy/Print

● Manage Trays

● Alternative Letterhead Mode

3. Select On.

Print tasks
Print tasks (Windows)

How to print (Windows)

The following procedure describes the basic printing process for Windows.

1. From the software program, select the Print option.

2. Select the printer from the list of printers. To change settings, click the Properties or Preferences
button to open the print driver.

NOTE: The name of the button varies for different software programs.

NOTE: In Windows 10, 8.1, and 8, these applications will have a different layout with different features
from what is described below for desktop applications. To access the print feature from a Start screen
app, complete the following steps:

● Windows 10: Select Print, and then select the printer.

● Windows 8.1 or 8: Select Devices, select Print, and then select the printer.

For the HP PCL-6 V4 driver, the HP AiO Printer Remote application downloads additional driver features
when More settings is selected.

NOTE: For more information, click the Help (?) button in the print driver.

3. Click the tabs in the print driver to configure the available options. For example, set the paper
orientation on the Finishing tab, and set the paper source, paper type, paper size, and quality settings
on the Paper/Quality tab.

4. Click the OK button to return to the Print dialog box. Select the number of copies to print from this
screen.

5. Click the Print button to print the job.

54 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

Automatically print on both sides (Windows)

Use this procedure for printers that have an automatic duplexer installed. If the printer does not have an
automatic duplexer installed, or to print on paper types that the duplexer does not support, print on both
sides manually.

1. From the software program, select the Print option.

2. Select the printer from the list of printers, and then click the Properties or Preferences button to open
the print driver.

NOTE: The name of the button varies for different software programs.

NOTE: In Windows 10, 8.1, and 8, these applications will have a different layout with different features
from what is described below for desktop applications. To access the print feature from a Start screen
app, complete the following steps:

● Windows 10: Select Print, and then select the printer.

● Windows 8.1 or 8: Select Devices, select Print, and then select the printer.

For the HP PCL-6 V4 driver, the HP AiO Printer Remote application downloads additional driver features
when More settings is selected.

3. Click the Finishing tab.

4. Select Print on both sides. Click OK to close the Document Properties dialog.

5. In the Print dialog, click Print to print the job.

Print multiple pages per sheet (Windows)

1. From the software program, select the Print option.

2. Select the printer from the list of printers, and then click the Properties or Preferences button to open
the print driver.

NOTE: The name of the button varies for different software programs.

NOTE: In Windows 10, 8.1, and 8, these applications will have a different layout with different features
from what is described below for desktop applications. To access the print feature from a Start screen
app, complete the following steps:

● Windows 10: Select Print, and then select the printer.

● Windows 8.1 or 8: Select Devices, select Print, and then select the printer.

For the HP PCL-6 V4 driver, the HP AiO Printer Remote application downloads additional driver features
when More settings is selected.

3. Click the Finishing tab.

4. Select the number of pages per sheet from the Pages per sheet drop-down.

5. Select the correct Print page borders, Page order, and Orientation options. Click OK to close the
Document Properties dialog.

6. In the Print dialog, click Print to print the job.

ENWW Paper trays 55

 Select the paper type (Windows)

1. From the software program, select the Print option.

2. Select the printer from the list of printers, and then click the Properties or Preferences button to open
the print driver.

NOTE: The name of the button varies for different software programs.

NOTE: In Windows 10, 8.1, and 8, these applications will have a different layout with different features
from what is described below for desktop applications. To access the print feature from a Start screen
app, complete the following steps:

● Windows 10: Select Print, and then select the printer.

● Windows 8.1 or 8: Select Devices, select Print, and then select the printer.

For the HP PCL-6 V4 driver, the HP AiO Printer Remote application downloads additional driver features
when More settings is selected.

3. Click the Paper/Quality tab.

4. Select the paper type from the Paper type drop-down list.

5. Click OK to close the Document Properties dialog. In the Print dialog, click Print to print the job.

If the tray needs to be configured, a tray configuration message displays on the printer control panel.

6. Load the tray with the specified type and size of paper, and then close the tray.

7. Touch the OK button to accept the detected type and size, or touch the Modify button to choose a
different paper size or type.

8. Select the correct type and size, and then touch the OK button.

56 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

Additional print tasks

Go to www.hp.com/support/colorlje87600mfp, www.hp.com/support/colorlje82500mfp.

Instructions are available for performing specific print tasks, such as the following:

● Create and use printing shortcuts or presets

● Select the paper size, or use a custom paper size

● Select the page orientation

● Create a booklet

● Scale a document to fit a specific paper size

● Print the first or last pages of the document on different paper

● Print watermarks on a document

● Print stamps on a document

ENWW Paper trays 57

 Print tasks (OS X)

How to print (OS X)

The following procedure describes the basic printing process for OS X.

1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.

2. Select the printer.

3. Click Show Details or Copies & Pages, and then select other menus to adjust the print settings.

NOTE: The name of the item varies for different software programs.

4. Click the Print button.

Automatically print on both sides (OS X)

NOTE: This information applies to printers that include an automatic duplexer.

NOTE: This feature is available if you install the HP print driver. It might not be available if you are using
AirPrint.

1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.

2. Select the printer.

3. Click Show Details or Copies & Pages, and then click the Layout menu.

NOTE: The name of the item varies for different software programs.

4. Select a binding option from the Two-Sided drop-down list.

5. Click the Print button.

Print multiple pages per sheet (OS X)

1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.

2. Select the printer.

3. Click Show Details or Copies & Pages, and then click the Layout menu.

NOTE: The name of the item varies for different software programs.

4. From the Pages per Sheet drop-down list, select the number of pages that you want to print on each
sheet.

5. In the Layout Direction area, select the order and placement of the pages on the sheet.

6. From the Borders menu, select the type of border to print around each page on the sheet.

7. Click the Print button.

Select the paper type (OS X)

1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.

2. Select the printer.

58 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

 3. Click Show Details or Copies & Pages, and then click the Media & Quality menu or the Paper/Quality
menu.

NOTE: The name of the item varies for different software programs.

4. Select from the Media & Quality or Paper/Quality options.

NOTE: This list contains the master set of options available. Some options are not available on all
printers.

● Media Type: Select the option for the type of paper for the print job.

● Print Quality: Select the resolution level for the print job.

● Edge-To-Edge Printing: Select this option to print close to the paper edges.

● EconoMode: Select this option to conserve toner when printing drafts of documents.

5. Click the Print button.

ENWW Paper trays 59

 Additional print tasks

Go to www.hp.com/support/colorlje87600mfp, www.hp.com/support/colorlje82500mfp.

Instructions are available for performing specific print tasks, such as the following:

● Create and use printing shortcuts or presets

● Select the paper size, or use a custom paper size

● Select the page orientation

● Create a booklet

● Scale a document to fit a specific paper size

● Print the first or last pages of the document on different paper

● Print watermarks on a document

● Print stamps on a document

60 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

Configure trays for paper type and size
Configure trays for paper type and size overview
By default, the printer pulls from the highest number tray, if the size and type is correct in the print job.
Configuring a tray on this printer changes the speed settings to obtain the best print quality for the type of
paper being used. When using special paper for all or most print jobs on the printer, change this default tray
setting on the printer.

The following table lists tray settings designed for different printing needs.

Paper use Configure the printer Print

Load Tray 1 and one other tray with the Load paper in Tray 1. No configuration is From the software program, print the job.
same paper, and have the printer pick needed, if the default settings for type and
paper from one tray if the other one is size have not been changed.
empty.

Occasionally use special paper, such as Load special paper in Tray 1. From the software program print dialog,
heavy paper or letterhead, from a tray that choose the paper type that matches the
usually contains plain paper. special paper loaded in the tray before
sending the print job. Select Tray 1 as the
paper source from the Paper Quality tab
(Windows) or Paper Feed menu (Mac).

Frequently use special paper, such as Load special paper in Tray 1, and configure From the software program print dialog,
heavy paper or letterhead, from one tray. the tray for the paper type. choose the paper type that matches the
special paper loaded in the tray before
sending the print job. Select Tray 1 as the
paper source from the Paper Quality tab
(Windows) or Paper Feed menu (Mac).

Configure a tray when loading paper

1. Load paper in the tray.

2. The tray configuration message displays on the printer control panel.

3. Touch the OK button to accept the detected type and size, or touch the Modify button to choose a
different paper size or type.

4. Select the correct type and size, and then touch the OK button.

Configure a tray to match print job settings

1. In the software program, specify the source tray, the paper size, and the paper type.

2. Send the job to the printer.

If the tray needs to be configured, a tray configuration message displays on the printer control panel. If
the tray is empty or the paper type is incorrect, you may receive a prompt to load paper in Tray 1.

3. Load the tray with the specified type and size of paper, and then close the tray.

4. Touch the OK button to accept the detected type and size, or touch the Modify button to choose a
different paper size or type.

5. Select the correct type and size, and then touch the OK button.

ENWW Configure trays for paper type and size 61

 Configure a tray by using the control panel
Users can also configure the trays for type and size without a prompt from the printer.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Trays button.

2. Touch the line for the desired tray, and then touch the Modify button.

3. Select the paper type and size from the lists of options.

4. Touch the OK button to save the selection.

62 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
HP Embedded Web Server overview
All HP LaserJet printers include the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS). Use the EWS to remotely monitor printer
status, check supplies, and change printer settings.

The EWS is available whenever the printer is connected to an IP-based network. The network does not have to
be connected to the Internet. The EWS is not available for USB-connected printers.

Tabs across the top of the EWS interface arrange features into groups such as Print and Security. The number
of tabs varies depending on the printer features and capabilities. Each tab has a frame on the left that lists
the available features. Click on a feature to display the available settings in the main frame.

IMPORTANT: Click the Apply button at the bottom of the screen to save changes. Sometimes it is necessary
to scroll down to the bottom of the window to see the button.

To start the EWS:

1. Open a Web-browser window, type the printer IP address or host name in the address field, and then
press Enter.

2. The EWS does not require a password by default. It might be necessary to sign in with a user name and
password if an administrator has secured the EWS.

Learn more about the EWS in the Web-based training course HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) Fundamentals
Training.

EWS Tabs and menus

The printer capabilities and the version of HP FutureSmart firmware loaded determine which tabs and menu
items display in the EWS.

The available tabs for the HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540, E82550, E82560 and HP Color LaserJet
Managed MFP E87640, E87650, E87660 include:

● Information

● General

● Copy/Print

● Scan/Digital Send

● Fax

● Troubleshooting

● Security

● HP Web Services

● Networking

ENWW HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) 63

 Print
Print overview
The printers use typical print drivers for both Windows and Mac OS. Windows users can use either the discrete
(printer specific) print driver or the UPD. The overall operation and functionality of the discrete driver and the
UPD are very similar.

Print tasks (Windows)

How to print (Windows)
The following procedure describes the basic printing process for Windows.

1. From the software program, select the Print option.

64 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

 2. Select the printer from the list of printers. To change settings, click or tap the Properties or Preferences
button to open the print driver.

NOTE: The name of the button varies for different software programs.

NOTE: To access these features from a Windows 8 or 8.1 Start screen app, select Devices, select Print,
and then select the printer.

NOTE: For more information, click the Help (?) button in the print driver.

NOTE: The print driver might look different than what is shown here, but the steps are the same.

3. Click or tap the tabs in the print driver to configure the available options. For example, set the paper
orientation on the Finishing tab, and set the paper source, paper type, paper size, and quality settings
on the Paper/Quality tab.

4. Click or tap the OK button to return to the Print dialog box. Select the number of copies to print from
this screen.

5. Click or tap the OK button to print the job.

ENWW Print 65
 Automatically print on both sides (Windows)
Use this procedure for printers that have an automatic duplexer installed. If the printer does not have an
automatic duplexer installed, or to print on paper types that the duplexer does not support, print on both
sides manually.

1. From the software program, select the Print option.

2. Select the printer from the list of printers, and then click or tap the Properties or Preferences button to
open the print driver.

NOTE: The name of the button varies for different software programs.

NOTE: To access these features from a Windows 8 or 8.1 Start screen app, select Devices, select Print,
and then select the printer.

3. Click or tap the Finishing tab.

4. Select the Print on both sides check box. Click the OK button to close the Document Properties dialog
box.

5. In the Print dialog box, click the OK button to print the job.

Manually print on both sides (Windows)

Use this procedure for printers that do not have an automatic duplexer installed or to print on paper that the
duplexer does not support.

1. From the software program, select the Print option.

2. Select the printer from the list of printers, and then click or tap the Properties or Preferences button to
open the print driver.

NOTE: The name of the button varies for different software programs.

NOTE: To access these features from a Windows 8 or 8.1 Start screen app, select Devices, select Print,
and then select the printer.

3. Click or tap the Finishing tab.

4. Select the Print on both sides (manually) check box. Click the OK button to print the first side of the job.

5. Retrieve the printed stack from the output bin, and place it in Tray 1.

6. If prompted, touch the appropriate control panel button to continue.

66 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

Print multiple pages per sheet (Windows)
1. From the software program, select the Print option.

2. Select the printer from the list of printers, and then click or tap the Properties or Preferences button to
open the print driver.

NOTE: The name of the button varies for different software programs.

NOTE: To access these features from a Windows 8 or 8.1 Start screen app, select Devices, select Print,
and then select the printer.

3. Click or tap the Finishing tab.

4. Select the number of pages per sheet from the Pages per sheet drop-down list.

5. Select the correct Print page borders, Page order, and Orientation options. Click the OK button to close
the Document Properties dialog box.

6. In the Print dialog box, click the OK button to print the job.

Select the paper type (Windows)

1. From the software program, select the Print option.

2. Select the printer from the list of printers, and then click or tap the Properties or Preferences button to
open the print driver.

NOTE: The name of the button varies for different software programs.

NOTE: To access these features from a Windows 8 or 8.1 Start screen app, select Devices, select Print,
and then select the printer.

3. Click or tap the Paper/Quality tab.

4. From the Paper type drop-down list, click the More... option.

5. Expand the list of Type is: options.

6. Expand the category of paper types that best describes your paper.

7. Select the option for the type of paper you are using, and then click the OK button.

8. Click the OK button to close the Document Properties dialog box. In the Print dialog box, click the OK
button to print the job.

If the tray needs to be configured, a tray configuration message displays on the printer control panel.

9. Load the tray with the specified type and size of paper, and then close the tray.

10. Touch the OK button to accept the detected type and size, or touch the Modify button to choose a
different paper size or type.

11. Select the correct type and size, and then touch the OK button.

ENWW Print 67
 Additional print tasks
Go to www.hp.com.

Instructions are available for performing specific print tasks, such as the following:

● Create and use printing shortcuts or presets

● Select the paper size, or use a custom paper size

● Select the page orientation

● Create a booklet

● Scale a document to fit a specific paper size

● Print the first or last pages of the document on different paper

● Print watermarks on a document

Print tasks (OS X)

How to print (OS X)
The following procedure describes the basic printing process for OS X.

1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.

2. Select the printer.

3. Click Show Details or Copies & Pages, and then select other menus to adjust the print settings.

NOTE: The name of the item varies for different software programs.

4. Click the Print button.

Automatically print on both sides (OS X)

NOTE: This information applies to printers that include an automatic duplexer.

NOTE: This feature is available if you install the HP print driver. It might not be available if you are using
AirPrint.

1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.

2. Select the printer.

3. Click Show Details or Copies & Pages, and then click the Layout menu.

NOTE: The name of the item varies for different software programs.

4. Select a binding option from the Two-Sided drop-down list.

5. Click the Print button.

68 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

Manually print on both sides (OS X)
NOTE: This feature is available if you install the HP print driver. It might not be available if you are using
AirPrint.

1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.

2. Select the printer.

3. Click Show Details or Copies & Pages, and then click the Manual Duplex menu.

NOTE: The name of the item varies for different software programs.

4. Click the Manual Duplex box, and select a binding option.

5. Click the Print button.

6. Go to the printer, and remove any blank paper that is in Tray 1.

7. Retrieve the printed stack from the output bin and place it with the printed-side facing down in the input
tray.

8. If prompted, touch the appropriate control panel button to continue.

Print multiple pages per sheet (OS X)

1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.

2. Select the printer.

3. Click Show Details or Copies & Pages, and then click the Layout menu.

NOTE: The name of the item varies for different software programs.

4. From the Pages per Sheet drop-down list, select the number of pages that you want to print on each
sheet.

5. In the Layout Direction area, select the order and placement of the pages on the sheet.

6. From the Borders menu, select the type of border to print around each page on the sheet.

7. Click the Print button.

Select the paper type (OS X)

1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.

2. Select the printer.

3. Click Show Details or Copies & Pages, and then click the Media & Quality menu or the Paper/Quality
menu.

NOTE: The name of the item varies for different software programs.

4. Select from the Media & Quality or Paper/Quality options.

NOTE: This list contains the master set of options available. Some options are not available on all
printers.

ENWW Print 69
 ● Media Type: Select the option for the type of paper for the print job.

● Print Quality: Select the resolution level for the print job.

● Edge-To-Edge Printing: Select this option to print close to the paper edges.

5. Click the Print button.

70 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

Additional print tasks
Go to www.hp.com.

Instructions are available for performing specific print tasks, such as the following:

● Create and use printing shortcuts or presets

● Select the paper size, or use a custom paper size

● Select the page orientation

● Create a booklet

● Scale a document to fit a specific paper size

● Print the first or last pages of the document on different paper

● Print watermarks on a document

Mobile printing
Introduction
HP offers multiple mobile and ePrint solutions to enable easy printing to an HP printer from a laptop, tablet,
smartphone, or other mobile device. To see the full list and to determine the best choice, go to
www.hp.com/go/LaserJetMobilePrinting.

Wireless Direct Print and NFC Printing

HP provides Wireless Direct Print and NFC (Near Field Communication) printing for printers with a supported
HP Jetdirect 3000w NFC/Wireless Accessory. This accessory is available as an option for HP Enterprise printers
that include a hardware-integration pocket (HIP2).

Wireless Direct Print and NFC printing enable Wi-Fi capable (mobile) devices to make a wireless network
connection directly to the printer without using a wireless router.

The printer does not need to be connected to the network for this mobile walk-up printing to work.

Use Wireless Direct Print to print wirelessly from the following devices:

● iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch using Apple AirPrint or the HP ePrint app

● PC and Mac devices using the HP ePrint Software

For more information on wireless printing, go to www.hp.com/go/wirelessprinting.

NFC and Wireless Direct Print capabilities can be enabled or disabled from the printer control panel.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and select the Settings menu.

2. Open the following menus:

a. Networking

b. Wireless Menu

c. Wireless Direct

3. Select On to enable wireless printing.

ENWW Print 71
 NOTE: In environments where more than one model of the same printer is installed, it might be helpful to
provide each printer a more unique Wireless Direct Name for easier printer identification for HP Wireless
Direct printing. The Wireless Direct Name is also available on the How to Connect Page by touching the
Network button from the Home screen on the printer control panel.

Follow this procedure to change the printer Wireless Direct Name:

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and select the Settings menu.

2. Open the following menus:

a. Networking

b. Wireless Menu

c. Wireless Direct

d. Wireless Direct Name

3. Select the Wireless Direct Name area.

4. Use the keyboard to change the name.

5. Select OK.

HP ePrint via email

Use HP ePrint to print documents by sending them as an email attachment to the printer's email address from
any email enabled device.

To use HP ePrint, the printer must meet these requirements:

● The printer must be connected to a wired or wireless network and have Internet access.

● HP Web Services must be enabled on the printer, and the printer must be registered with HP Connected.

Follow this procedure to enable HP Web Services and register with HP Connected:

1. Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS):

a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, open the Settings menu, and then touch the
Network option to display the IP address or host name.

b. Open a Web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it
displays on the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS
opens.

NOTE: If the Web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be
safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the
computer.

2. Click the HP Web Services tab.

3. Select the option to enable Web Services.

72 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

 NOTE: Enabling Web Services might take several minutes.

4. Go to www.hpconnected.com to create an HP ePrint account and complete the setup process.

HP ePrint software
The HP ePrint software makes it easy to print from a Windows or Mac desktop or laptop computer to any HP
ePrint-capable printer. This software makes it easy to find HP ePrint-enabled printers that are registered to
your HP Connected account. The target HP printer can be located in the office or at locations across the globe.

● Windows: After installing the software, open the Print option from within your application, and then
select HP ePrint from the installed printers list. Click the Properties button to configure print options.

● OS X: After installing the software, select File, Print, and then select the arrow next to PDF (in the
bottom left of the driver screen). Select HP ePrint.

For Windows, the HP ePrint software supports TCP/IP printing to local printers on the network (LAN or WAN)
and that support UPD PostScript®.

Windows and OS X both support IPP printing to LAN or WAN network-connected printers that support ePCL.

Windows and Mac also both support printing PDF documents to public print locations and printing using HP
ePrint via email through the cloud.

Go to www.hp.com/go/eprintsoftware for drivers and information.

NOTE: The HP ePrint software is a PDF workflow utility for Mac, and is not technically a print driver.

NOTE: HP ePrint Software does not support USB printing.

AirPrint
Direct printing using Apple’s AirPrint is supported for iOS 4.2 or later and from Mac computers running OS X
10.7 Lion and newer. Use AirPrint to print directly to the printer from an iPad, iPhone (3GS or later), or iPod
touch (third generation or later) in the following mobile applications:

● Mail

● Photos

● Safari

● iBooks

● Select third-party applications

NOTE: Before using AirPrint with a USB connection, verify the version number. AirPrint versions 1.3 and
earlier do not support USB connections.

Google Cloud Print

Google Cloud Print is a mobile printing solution available to Gmail account users that allows you to print over
the web from anywhere, including your phone or tablet, to any printer.

For more information, go to www.google.com/cloudprint/learn/printers.html, and then select the HP link.

ENWW Print 73
 Android embedded printing
HP's print solution for Android and Kindle enables mobile devices to automatically find and print to HP
printers that are on a network.

The printer must be connected to the same network (sub-net) as the Android device.

HP print solutions are embedded in some Android and Kindle devices and available for others at:
play.google.com.

For more information on how to use Android embedded printing and which Android devices are supported, go
to www.hp.com/go/LaserJetMobilePrinting.

74 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

Copy, scan, and Digital Send (HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet)
Copy, scan, and Digital Send overview
The HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540, E82550, E82560 and HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87640,
E87650, E87660 includes the following copy, scan, and digital send features:

● Save to SharePoint® (flow or z models only): Scan and save documents directly to a Microsoft
SharePoint site.

● Embedded optical character recognition (OCR) (Flow models or z models only): Scan and convert
printed documents into digital text that can be edited on a computer.

● HP EveryPage Multi-feed detection (Flow models or z models only): Senses when multiple sheets are
picked up and fed into the ADF. Also senses when a sheet has an attached piece of paper such as a sticky
note.

● Single-pass two-sided scanning: A second scan head in the ADF lid scans the back side of the page at
the same time the front side is scanned by the flatbed scanner.

● Increased ADF capacity: The document feeder accepts up to 100 sheets of paper for dn models and up
to 250 sheets for z models (flow).

All HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet Color MFP models include the following copy, scan, and digital send
features typical of other HP LaserJet MFP printers:

● Copy: Make single-sided or double-sided black and white copies of documents.

● Save to USB: Scan and save black and white or color documents to a USB flash drive.

● Save to Network Folder: Scan and save black and white or color documents to a shared network folder
or ftp site.

● Save to Device Memory: Scan black and white documents to the printer memory for printing later. Jobs
can be deleted after printing or stored for re-use.

● E-Mail: Scan and send documents as attachments to an email message.

● Fax: Transmit and receive fax documents using analog or digital phone lines, LAN fax, or Internet fax.

Print administrators can manage the printer using HP Web Jetadmin and HP Digital Sending Software, if
desired.

Copy
Make a copy
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and
adjust the paper guides to fit the size of the document.

2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Copy.

3. Select settings from the Sides, Color/Black (color printers only), and Quick Sets and Defaults menus.

NOTE: Quick Sets are predefined copy settings for various types of output, such as Text, Photograph,
and High Quality. You can select a Quick Set to view the description. To load the selected Quick Set,
select Load under the Load Quick Sets list.

ENWW Copy, scan, and Digital Send (HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet) 75
 4. To adjust settings such as Reduce/Enlarge and Content Orientation, select Options in the lower left
corner, and then select the settings from the Options menus. Select Done for each setting if prompted.

5. Optional Preview: Touch the right pane of the screen to preview the document. You can touch the
document to expand the view. In the preview screen, use the buttons on the right of the screen to adjust
the preview options and to rearrange, rotate, insert, or remove pages.

Use this button to toggle between the two-page view and the thumbnail view. More options are
available in the thumbnail view than in the two-page view.

Use these buttons to zoom in or out on the selected page.

NOTE: Select only one page at a time to use these buttons.

Use this button to rotate the page 180 degrees.

NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.

Use this button to delete the selected pages.

NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.

Use these buttons to rearrange the pages within the document. Select one or more pages and
move them to the left or right.

NOTE: These buttons are available only in the thumbnail view.

Use this button to add a page to the document. The printer prompts you to scan additional
pages.

Use this button to clear the changes made in the preview and start over.

Use this button on the left side of the screen to collapse the full preview and return to the Copy
screen.

76 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

 6. To adjust the number of copies, select the Copy Count field to the left of the Copy button, and then select
the number of copies from the keypad that opens. Select the Close button to close the keypad.

7. When the document is ready, select Copy to begin copying.

Copy on both sides (duplex)

1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and
adjust the paper guides to fit the size of the document.

2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Copy.

3. Select Options in the lower left corner, and then select Sides in the Options pane.

4. In the Original Sides section, select the option that describes the original document:

● Use Automatically detect to detect whether the original is printed on one or both sides of the page.

NOTE: This feature is not available for all firmware versions. You might need to update the
printer firmware to use this feature.

● Use 1-sided for originals that are printed on one side of the page.

● Use 2-sided for originals that are printed on both sides of the page.

● Enable or disable Pages Flip Up to determine on which edge of the page a 2-sided original flips.

5. In the Output Sides section, select one of these options:

● Match original: The output will match the format of the original. For example, if the original is 1-
sided, the output will be 1-sided. However, if the administrator has restricted 1-sided printing and
the original is 1-sided, the output will be 2-sided book-style.

NOTE: This feature is not available for all firmware versions. You might need to update the
printer firmware to use this feature.

● 1-sided: The output will be 1-sided. However, if the administrator has restricted 1-sided printing,
the output will be 2-sided book-style.

● 2-sided: The output will be 2-sided.

● Enable or disable Pages Flip Up to determine on which edge of the page the 2-sided output flips.

6. Select Done.

7. Adjust any other settings as needed. Select Done for each setting if prompted. Set options marked with
a yellow triangle before using the preview feature.

NOTE: After the preview scan, these options are removed from the main Options list and are
summarized in the Pre-scan Options list. To change any of these options, discard the preview and start
over.

8. Optional Preview: Touch the right pane of the screen to preview the document. You can touch the
document to expand the view. In the preview screen, use the buttons on the right of the screen to adjust
the preview options and to rearrange, rotate, insert, or remove pages.

ENWW Copy, scan, and Digital Send (HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet) 77
 Use this button to toggle between the two-page view and the thumbnail view. More options are
available in the thumbnail view than in the two-page view.

Use these buttons to zoom in or out on the selected page.

NOTE: Select only one page at a time to use these buttons.

Use this button to rotate the page 180 degrees.

NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.

Use this button to delete the selected pages.

NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.

Use these buttons to rearrange the pages within the document. Select one or more pages and
move them to the left or right.

NOTE: These buttons are available only in the thumbnail view.

Use this button to add a page to the document. The printer prompts you to scan additional
pages.

Use this button to clear the changes made in the preview and start over.

Use this button on the left side of the screen to collapse the full preview and return to the Copy
screen.

9. To adjust the number of copies, select the Copy Count field to the left of the Copy button, and then select
the number of copies from the keypad that opens.

10. When the document is ready, select Copy to begin copying.

78 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

Copy mixed-size documents

Overview

Use this feature to copy original documents that are printed on different sizes of paper. If the pages have the
same size widths but different lengths, you can scan them as a single job. For example, you could combine the
following sizes: Letter and Legal, A4 and A3, or Letter and Ledger.

● Load the paper in the document feeder

● Copy mixed sized documents

Load the paper in the document feeder

1. Remove staples, paper clips, or sticky notes from the original documents.

2. Align the edges of the pages of the stack by first tapping along the long edge and then rotating 90
degrees and tapping the top edge.

NOTE: Avoid inserting a document with a leading edge that has been folded or frayed.

3. Place the sheets face-up into the document feeder, and adjust the paper guides against the document
edges. Do not push the guides in so tightly that they bend or bind the paper stack.

Copy mixed sized documents

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Copy.

2. Select Options in the lower left corner, select Original Size in the Options pane, and then select a mixed
size option:

● Mixed Letter/Legal

● Mixed Letter/Ledger

● Mixed A4/A3

3. Adjust any other settings as needed. Select Done for each setting if prompted.

NOTE: Some Copy menu options conflict with the mixed-size options.. After selecting a mixed original
size, these features are unavailable in the Copy menu.

ENWW Copy, scan, and Digital Send (HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet) 79
 4. To adjust the number of copies, select the Copy Count field to the left of the Copy button, and then select
the number of copies from the keypad that opens.

5. When the document is ready, select Copy to begin copying.

Copy or scan a document into a booklet format

Introduction

The Booklet Format feature allows you to copy two or more pages onto the front and back of one sheet of
paper. The printer arranges the pages in the correct order. For example, if the original document has four
pages, the printer prints pages 1 and 4 on the same side of the page (see below figures). Doing so allows the
you to fold the printed pages in the center to form a booklet.

NOTE: The printer does not fold or staple the pages when using the Booklet Format feature.

Figure 3-1 Booklet outside

4 1

Figure 3-2 Booklet inside

2 3

Figure 3-3 Folded booklet

Use the Copy option to copy and print immediately, or use the Scan option to scan and save the document to
the printer memory.

Copy document to booklet format

1. Place the document face-up in the document feeder, and adjust the paper guides to fit the size of the
document.

2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Copy, and then select the Options button.

3. In the Options menu, select Booklet, and then select the Booklet Format check box. For margins around
the content, select Borders. Select Done.

80 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

 4. Select settings for the following items in the Options menu. Select Done for each item if prompted.

● Sides

● Content Orientation

● Paper Selection (size of the output paper)

NOTE: The printer will enlarge or reduce the print image to fit the selected paper. Choose a paper
twice the size of the original to print a folded copy that is the same size as the original page when
the sheet is folded in half. For example, if the original document is 279 x 216 mm (8.5 x 11 in),
select paper that is 279 x 432 mm (11 x 17 in) so that when the paper is folded in half it will be the
same size as the original.

5. Select Copy to begin copying.

NOTE: It might take over a minute to process the job before printing begins.

6. Fold the paper into a booklet.

Scan document to the printer memory in booklet format

You can store the scanned booklet to job storage on the printer to be printed at a later time.

1. Place the document face-up in the document feeder, and adjust the paper guides to fit the size of the
document.

2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Scan, and then select Scan to Job Storage.

NOTE: If prompted, enter your user name and password.

3. Select the default storage folder name shown under Folder.

Note: If the printer administrator has configured the option, you can create a new folder. Follow these
steps to create a new folder:

a. Select the New Folder button.

b. Enter the name of the folder in the Folder Name field, and then select OK.

4. Make sure that you have selected the correct folder.

5. Select the Job Name text field to open a touchscreen keyboard, type the name for the file, and then
select the Enter button.

6. Select Options, select Booklet , and then select the Booklet Format check box. For margins around the
content, select Borders. Select Done.

7. Set additional options:

● To set the size of the original document, select Original Size, and then select the paper size.

● To set the sides output, select Sides, select one of the available options, and then select Done.

● To choose the size of the output paper, select Paper Selection, and the select the paper option.

ENWW Copy, scan, and Digital Send (HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet) 81
 The printer will enlarge or reduce the print image to fit the selected paper. Choose a paper twice
the size of the original to print a folded copy that is the same size as the original page when the
sheet is folded in half.

8. Select Save to begin scanning the document. Follow the prompts on the control panel to add more
pages.

Copy or scan pages from books or other bound documents

Introduction

Use the Book Mode feature to copy or scan facing pages from a bound original document, such as a book, and
save the pages as individual scanned images. The feature organizes the scanned images and arranges the
pages in the correct order, as in the original document. Print the pages by using the copy feature, or save the
scanned pages to a file in the printer memory

The feature creates scanned images that are letter or A4 size. If the original document is smaller, the feature
retains the original size and does not scale the image to fit the paper. If the original document is larger, the
feature crops the pages and does not scale the images to fit the paper.

NOTE: The document must be bound on the left edge, and the feature does not work with the front and
back covers.

Book Placement

Place the book on the scanner glass with the top edge of the book along the rear of the scanner glass. Align
the spine with the book symbol along the rear edge.

CAUTION: Some types of bindings, such as certain spiral bindings, can damage the protective covering on
the flatbed cover. Close the scanner lid carefully.

Copy or scan pages

Copy to print now

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Copy, and then select Options in the lower left
corner.

2. Select Scan Mode, select Book Mode, and then select Done.

82 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

 3. Adjust any other setting options that are needed. Select Done for each setting if prompted.

4. Select Copy to begin scanning. A Book Mode prompt screen appears.

5. Follow the prompts on the control panel to scan additional pages. When you are finished scanning,
select Done to begin printing the pages.

Scan to save to printer memory

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Scan, and then select Scan to Job Storage.

NOTE: If prompted, enter your user name and password.

2. Select the default storage folder name shown under Folder.

Note: If the printer administrator has configured the option, you can create a new folder. Follow these
steps to create a new folder:

a.
Select the New Folder icon.

b. Select the New Folder field, type the folder name, and then select OK.

3. Make sure that you have selected the correct folder.

4. Select the Job Name text field to open a touchscreen keyboard, type the name for the file, and then
select the Enter button.

5. Select Options in the lower left corner, select Scan Mode, select Book Mode, and then select Done.

6. Adjust any other settings that are needed. For example, configure the Sides option to print on both sides
of a sheet of paper. If a finishing device is attached to the printer, select the appropriate finishing options
now. Select Done for each setting if prompted.

7. Touch the right pane of the screen to preview. A Book Mode prompt screen appears.

8. Select Scan to scan the current pages on the scanner. To scan more pages, adjust the book and select
Scan again.

9. Select Done when you are finished scanning, and then select Save.

Reduce or enlarge a copy image

1. From the Home screen on the product control panel, select Copy.

2. Select Options in the lower left corner, and then select Reduce/Enlarge in the list of options.

3. Select Automatic, or select Manual and type a percentage between 25 and 400. Select Done.

NOTE: To reduce the image, select a scaling percentage that is less than 100. To enlarge the image,
select a scaling percentage that is greater than 100.

4. To adjust the number of copies, select the box to the left of the Copy button, and then select the number
of copies from the keypad that opens.

5. Select Copy.

ENWW Copy, scan, and Digital Send (HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet) 83
 Copy or scan both sides of an identification card
Use the 2-sided ID Scan feature to copy or scan both sides of identification cards, or other small-size
documents, onto the same side of one sheet of paper. The product scans one side of the document, prompts
to turn the document over, and then scans again. Print the pages by using the copy feature, or save the
scanned pages to a file in the printer memory.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Copy, and then select Options in the lower left
corner.

2. Select Scan Mode, select 2–sided ID Copy, and then select Done.

3. Place the identification card face-down on the left, rear corner of the scanner glass, with the top of the
card along the left edge. The image on the control panel shows the correct orientation.

4. Adjust any other setting options that are needed. Select Done for each setting if prompted.

5. Select Copy to begin scanning. A 2–sided ID Scan prompt screen appears.

6. Turn the ID card over to scan the other side, and then select Scan.

7. Select Done to start printing.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Scan, and then select Scan to Job Storage.

NOTE: If prompted, enter your user name and password.

2. Select the default storage folder name shown under Folder, and then select the folder.

NOTE: If the printer administrator has configured the option, you can create a new folder. Follow these
steps to create a new folder:

a.
Select the New Folder icon.

b. Select the New Folder field, type the folder name, and then select OK.

3. Make sure that you have selected the correct folder.

4. Select the Job Name text field to open a touchscreen keyboard, type the name for the file, and then
select the Enter button.

5. Select Options in the lower left corner, select Scan Mode, select 2–sided ID Copy, and then select Done.

6. Adjust any other settings that are needed. Select Done for each setting if prompted.

7. Touch the right pane of the screen to preview. A 2–sided ID Scan prompt screen appears.

8. Select Scan to scan the ID card on the scanner. When the scan completes, turn the card over and select
Scan again.

9. Select Done when you are finished scanning, and then select Save.

Additional options when copying

The following settings are available in the Options list when copying.

84 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

 NOTE: The following list contains the master set of options available for HP LaserJet Enterprise MFP
printers. Some options are not available on all printers.

Number of Copies Specify the number of copies to make.

Load and Save Settings Load Quick Set: Load copy settings from a saved Quick Set.

NOTE: This feature is not NOTE: Use the HP Embedded Web Server to create and save Quick Sets.
available for all firmware
versions. You might need to Save Defaults: Save the current settings in the Options list as default settings for future copy jobs.
update the printer firmware to
use this feature.

Sides Specify whether the original document is printed on one side or both sides, and whether the copies
are to be printed on one side or both sides.

Staple Specify the placement of staples.

For printers with automatic

finishing accessories only. (This
feature does not apply to
printers with convenience
staplers.)

Hole Punch Specify the number and placement of punched holes.

For printers with hole-punch

accessories only.

Scan Mode Standard Document: Scan a page or stack of pages through the document feeder, or individually on
the flatbed glass.

Book Mode: Scan an open book and output each page of the book onto different pages.

2-sided ID Copy: Scan each side of an identification card on the flatbed glass and output them onto
one page. After scanning the first side, the printer prompts to place the second side in the correct
position on the glass.

Reduce/Enlarge Scale the size of the scanned document up or down.

Original Size Specify the paper size for the original document.

Paper Selection Specify the paper size and type for the copies.

Booklet Format and rearrange original scanned images into pages that print as a booklet.

Content Orientation Specify whether the original document is printed in Portrait or Landscape orientation.

Pages per Sheet Copy multiple sheets of paper onto a single sheet. Select one, two, or four pages per sheet.

Paper Path Select a specific paper path:

For printers that have an option Face-up (straightest path): Pages output to the bin in the opposite order that they were placed in the
to flip pages inside the paper document feeder.
path.
Face-down (correct order): Pages are stacked in the same order as they were placed in the document
feeder.

ENWW Copy, scan, and Digital Send (HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet) 85
 Image Adjustment Sharpness: Clarify or soften the image. For example, increasing the sharpness could make text
appear crisper, but decreasing it could make photos appear smoother.

Darkness: Increase or decrease the amount of white and black used in colors in scanned images.

Contrast: Increase or decrease the difference between the lightest and the darkest color on the
page.

Background Cleanup: Remove faint colors from the background of scanned images. For example, if
the original document is printed on colored paper, use this feature to lighten the background
without affecting the darkness of the image.

Automatic Tone: Available for Flow printers only. For original documents that have at least 100
characters of text on the page, the printer can detect which edge is the top of the page, and it
orients the scanned images appropriately. If some of the pages are upside-down in relation to the
other pages, the resulting scanned image has all pages right-side-up. If some of the pages have a
landscape orientation, the printer rotates the image so that the top of the page is at the top of the
image.

Optimize Text/Picture Optimize the job for the type of image being scanned: text, graphics, or photos.

Edge-to-Edge Scan and print a copy closer to the edge of the page than is normally allowed. Printing close to the
edge can result in some print-quality issues.

Erase Edges Remove blemishes, such as dark borders or staple marks, by cleaning the edges of the scanned
image.

Collate Assemble each set of pages in the same order as the original document when making multiple
copies of a document.

Automatically Straighten Automatically straighten a scanned image.

NOTE: Available on Flow

models only.

This feature is not available for

all firmware versions. You
might need to update the
printer firmware to use this
feature.

Blank Page Suppression Exclude blank pages in the original document from scanned images. This feature is useful for
scanning pages printed on both sides to eliminate blank pages in the resulting scanned document.
NOTE: This feature is not
available for all firmware
versions. You might need to
update the printer firmware to
use this feature.

Multi-feed Detection Enable or disable multi-feed detection. When enabled, scanning stops when the printer detects
more than one page at a time being fed in the document feeder. When disabled, scanning continues
when a multi-feed is detected, to allow scanning pages that are stuck together, originals with self-
adhesive notes on them, or thick paper.

Scan
Set up Scan to E-mail using the HP Embedded Web Server

Introduction

The printer has a feature that enables it to scan a document and send it to one or more email addresses. To
use this scan feature, the printer must be connected to a network; however, the feature is not available until it
has been configured through the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS). There are two methods for configuring

86 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

 Scan to Email, the Scan to E-mail Setup Wizard for basic setup and E-mail Setup for advanced setup. Use the
following information to set up the Scan to Email feature.

Before you begin

To set up the Scan to E-mail feature, the printer must have an active network connection.

Administrators need the following information before beginning the configuration process.

● Administrative access to the printer

● DNS suffix (e.g., companyname.com)

● SMTP server (e.g., smtp.mycompany.com)

NOTE: If you do not know the SMTP server name, SMTP port number, or authentication information,
contact the email/Internet service provider or system administrator for the information. SMTP server
names and port names are typically easy to find by doing an Internet search. For example, use terms like
"gmail smtp server name" or "yahoo smtp server name" to search.

● SMTP server authentication requirements for outgoing email messages, including the user name and
password used for authentication, if applicable.

IMPORTANT: Consult your email service provider's documentation for information on digital sending limits
for your email account. Some providers may temporarily lock your account if you exceed your sending limit.

Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)

1.
From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Network button to display the IP
address or host name.

2. Open a Web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays on
the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.

NOTE: If the Web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be safe,
select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.

Step two: Configure the Network Identification settings

NOTE: Configuring email setup on the Networking tab is an advanced process and might require the
assistance of a system administrator.

1. Using the EWS top navigation tabs, click Networking.

2. In the left navigation pane, click TCP/IP Settings.

3. On the TCP/IP Settings dialog, click the Network Identification tab.

ENWW Copy, scan, and Digital Send (HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet) 87
 4. If DNS is required on the network, in the TCP/IP Domain Suffix area, verify that the DNS suffix for the
email client being used is listed. DNS suffixes have this format: companyname.com, gmail.com, etc.

NOTE: If the Domain Name suffix is not set up, use the IP address.

5. Click Apply.

Step three: Configure the Send to E-mail feature

Overview

The two options for configuring Send to E-mail are the E-mail Setup Wizard for basic configuration and E-
mail Setup for advanced configuration. Use the following options to configure the Send to E-mail feature:

Option one: Basic configuration using the E-mail Setup Wizard

This option opens the E-mail Setup Wizard in the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) for basic configuration.

1. Using the EWS top navigation tabs, click Scan/Digital Send.

2. In the E-mail and Save to Network Folder Quick Setup Wizards area, click the E-mail Setup Wizard
link.

3. On the E-mail Setup Wizard dialog, click Continue to proceed with the configuration.

4. On the Configure E-mail Servers (SMTP) dialog, select one of the following options and complete the
steps:

Option one: Use a server already in use by E-mail

▲ Select Use a server already in use by E-mail, and then click Next.

Option two: Search network for outgoing e-mail server

NOTE: This option finds outgoing SMTP servers inside your firewall only.

a. Select Search network for outgoing e-mail server, and then click Next.

b. Select the appropriate server from the Configure E-mail Server (SMTP) list, and then click Next.

c. Select the option that describes the server’s authentication requirements:

● Server does not require authentication: Select Server does not require authentication, and
then click Next.

-OR-

● Server requires authentication: From the drop-down list, select an authentication option:

● Use credentials of user to connect after Sign In at the control panel: Select Use
credentials of user to connect after Sign In at the control panel, and then click Next.

-OR-

● Always use these credentials: Select Always use these credentials, enter the User
name and Password, and then click Next.

88 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

 Option three: Add SMTP server

a. Select Add SMTP server

b. Enter the Server Name and Port Number, and then click Next.

NOTE: In most cases, the default port number does not need to be changed.

NOTE: If you are using a hosted SMTP service such as Gmail, verify the SMTP address, port
number, and SSL settings from the service provider’s Web site or other sources. Typically, for
Gmail, the SMTP address is smtp.gmail.com, port number 465, and the SSL should be enabled.

Please refer to online sources to confirm these server settings are current and valid at the time of
configuration.

c. Select the appropriate server authentication option:

● Server does not require authentication: Select Server does not require authentication, and
then click Next.

-OR-

● Server requires authentication: Select an option from the Server requires authentication
drop-down list:

● Use credentials of user to connect after Sign In at the control panel: Select Use
credentials of user to connect after Sign In at the control panel, and then click Next.

-OR-

● Always use these credentials: Select Always use these credentials, enter the User
name and Password, and then click Next.

5. On the Configure E-mail Settings dialog, enter the following information about for the sender’s email
address, and then click Next.

NOTE: When setting up the From, Subject, and Message fields, if the User editable check box is
unchecked, users will not be able to edit those fields at the printer control panel when sending an e-
mail.

Option Description

From Select one of the following options from the From drop-down list:

(Required) ● User’s address (sign-in required)

● Default From: Enter a default email address and display name in the Default From E-
mail Address and Default Display Name fields

TIP: Create an email account for the printer, and use this address for the default e-
mail address.

TIP: Configure the email feature so that users must sign in before using it. This
prevents users from sending an email from an address that is not their own.

ENWW Copy, scan, and Digital Send (HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet) 89
 Option Description

Subject Provide a default subject line for the email messages.

(Optional)

Message Create a custom message.

(Optional) To use this message for all emails sent from the printer, clear the User editable check box
for Message.

6. In the Configure File Scan Settings area, set the default scanning preferences, and then click Next.

Option Description

Default File Type Select the default file type that the for the scanned document:

● PDF

● JPEG

● TIFF

● MTIFF

● XPS

● PDF/A

● Text (OCR)

● Unicode Text (OCR)

● RTF (OCR)

● Searchable PDF (OCR)

● Searchable PDF/A (OCR)

● HTML (OCR)

● CSV (OCR)

Default Color Preferences Select the default color setting for the scanned document:

● Color

● Black

● Black/Gray

● Automatically detect

90 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

 Option Description

Default Output Quality Select the default output quality for the scanned document:

● Low (small file)

● Medium

● High (large file)

Default Resolution Select the default scan resolution for the scanned document:

● 75 dpi

● 150 dpi

● 200 dpi

● 300 dpi

● 400 dpi

● 600 dpi

7. Review the Summary area, and then click Finish to complete the setup.

Option two: Advanced configuration using the E-mail Setup

1. Using the EWS top navigation tabs, click Scan/Digital Send, and then click E-mail Setup in the left
navigation pane.

2. On the E-mail Setup dialog, select the Enable Send to E-mail check box. If this check box is not
selected, the feature is unavailable at the printer control panel.

3. In the Outgoing E-mail Servers (SMTP) area, complete the steps for one of the following options:

● Select one of the displayed servers

● Click Add to start the SMTP wizard.

1. In the SMTP wizard, select one of the following options:

● Enter the address of an SMTP server, and then click Next

● Select Search network for outgoing e-mail server, and then click Next. Select the
server, and then click Next.

ENWW Copy, scan, and Digital Send (HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet) 91
 NOTE: If an SMTP server was already created for another printer function, the Use a server
already in use by another function option displays. Select this option, and then configure it
to be used for the email function.

2. On the Set the basic information necessary to connect to the server dialog, set the options
to use, and then click Next.

NOTE: Some servers have problems sending or receiving emails that are larger than 5
megabytes (MB). These problems can be prevented by entering a number in Split e-mails if
larger than (MB).

NOTE: In most cases, the default port number does not need to be changed.

NOTE: If you are using Google™ Gmail for email service, select the Enable SMTP SSL
Protocol check box. Typically, for gmail, the SMTP address is smtp.gmail.com, port number
465, and the SSL should be enabled.

Please refer to online sources to confirm these server settings are current and valid at the
time of configuration.

3. On the Server Authentication Requirements dialog, select the option that describes the
server’s authentication requirements:

● Server does not require authentication, and then click Next.

● Server requires authentication

◦ From the drop-down box, select Use credentials of user to connect after Sign In
at the control panel, and then click Next.

◦ From the drop-down box, select Always use these credentials, enter the
Username and Password, and then click Next.

NOTE: If using a signed-in user's credentials, set email to require sign in by the user on the
printer control panel. Deny device guest access to email by clearing the check box for email in
the Device Guest column in the Sign in and Permission Policies area on the Access Control
dialog of the Security tab. The icon in the check box changes from a check mark to a lock.

4. On the Server Usage dialog, choose the printer functions that will send email through this
SMTP server, and then click the Next button.

NOTE: If the server requires authentication, a user name and password for sending
automatic alerts and reports from the printer will be required.

5. On the Summary and Test dialog, enter a valid email address in the Send a test e-mail to:
field, and then click Test.

6. Verify that all of the settings are correct, and then click Finish to complete the outgoing email
server set up.

4. In the Quick Sets area, select any Quick Sets for the printer.

NOTE: Quick Sets are short-cut jobs that can be accessed on the main Home screen or within the Quick
Sets application at the printer.

92 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

 5. In the Address and Message Field Control area, enter a Default From: setting and any of the other
optional settings.

Address and Message Field Control settings:

Feature Description

Address Field Restrictions Specify whether users must select an email address from an address book or whether users are
allowed to enter in an email address manually.

CAUTION: If Users must select from address book is selected, and any of the address fields
are also set as User editable, changes to those editable fields also change the corresponding
values in the address book.

To prevent users from changing contacts in the Address Book at the printer control panel, go to
the Access Control page on the Security tab, and deny Device Guest access to address book
modifications.

Allow invalid e-mail address Select to allow an invalid email address format.
formats

User editable
To use the Default From address and Default Display Name for all emails sent from this
printer (unless a user is signed in), do not select the User editable check box.

When setting up the address fields, if the User editable check box is unchecked, users will not
be able to edit those fields at the printer control panel when sending an email. For send-to-me
functionality, clear the User editable check boxes for all of the address fields, including the
From: To: CC:, and BCC: fields, and then set that user's send email From: their own email
address and To: their own email address.

Default From: and Default Provide an email address and name to use for the From: address for the email message.
Display Name:
TIP: Create an email account for the printer, and use this address for the default email
address.

TIP: Configure the email feature so that users must sign in before using it. This prevents
users from sending an email from an address that is not their own.

To: Provide a To (recipient) email address for emails.

CC: Provide a CC email address for emails.

BCC: Provide a BCC email address for emails.

Subject: Provide a default subject line for the email messages.

Message: Create a custom message. To use this message for all emails sent from the printer, clear or do
not select the User editable check box for Message:.

6. In the Signing and Encryption area, set the signing and encryption preferences.

Signing and Encryption settings:

Feature Description

Signing Select whether to sign the security certificate.

Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.

Hashing Algorithm Select the algorithm to use for signing the certificate.

Encryption Select whether to encrypt the email.

Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.

ENWW Copy, scan, and Digital Send (HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet) 93
 Feature Description

Encryption Algorithm Select the algorithm to use for encrypting the email.

Attribute for Recipient Enter which attribute to use to retrieve the recipient’s public key certificate from LDAP.
Public Key

Use the recipient public key Select this setting to use the recipients’s public key certificate to verify the recipient.
certificate to verify the
recipient

7. In the Notification Settings area, select when users will receive notifications about sent emails. The
default setting is using the signed in user's email address. If the recipient email address is blank, no
notification is sent.

8. In the Scan Settings area, set the default scanning preferences.

Scan settings:

Feature Description

Original Size Select the page size of the original document.

Original Sides Select whether the original document is single-sided or double-sided.

Optimize Text/Picture Select to optimize for the output of a particular type of content, or select Manually adjust.

Optimize For This setting is only available when Optimize Text/Picture is set to Manually adjust. Select a
manual-adjust value.

Content Orientation Select the way the content of the original document is placed on the page: Portrait or
Landscape, or select Automatically detect.

2–Sided Format This setting is not available when Content Orientation is set to Automatically detect. Select to
describe the binding of the page to specify if the back side of the page is upside down or right
side up.

Background Cleanup Select a value to remove faint images from the background or to remove a light background
color.

Darkness Select a value to adjust the darkness of the file.

Contrast Select a value to adjust the contrast of the file.

Sharpness Select a value to adjust the sharpness of the file.

Image Preview Select whether to require or make optional a displayed preview of the job or to disable a
preview.

Cropping Options Select whether or not to allow a job to be cropped and the type of cropping option.

Job Build Select this setting to combine several sets of original documents into one email attachment.
Also, use this setting to scan an original document that has more pages than the document
feeder can accommodate at one time.

Automatic Tone Select this setting to set to automatic the Darkness, Contrast, and Background cleanup
settings, which then makes these settings unavailable on this page.

Multi-feed Detection Select this setting to enable detection of multi-feed jobs.

Erase Edges Select this setting to specify the width of edge margins to be erased, in either inches or
millimeters, for the front side and back side of a job.

94 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

 9. In the File Settings area, set the default file settings preferences.

File settings:

Feature Description

File Name Prefix Set the default file name prefix used for files saved to a network folder.

Default File Name Default file name for the file to be saved.

Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.

File Name Suffix Set the default file name suffix used for files saved to a network folder.

Duplicate filename suffix default [filename]_YYYYMMDDT

File Number Format Select a file name format for when the job is divided into multiple files.

Default File Type Select the file format for the saved file.

Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.

File Name Preview Enter a file name, and then click the Update Preview button.

Default Color Preference Select whether the file is in black & white or in color.

Default Output Quality Select the quality for the file. Higher-quality images require a larger file size than lower-quality
images, and they take more time to send.

Default Resolution Set the resolution for the file. Higher resolution images have more dots per inch (dpi), so they
show more detail. Lower resolution images have fewer dots per inch and show less detail, but
the file size is smaller.

Compression Specify if the file uses Normal or High compression when saving a scanned document as a PDF
or XPS file. If compression is set to High, the scanned file is smaller, but the scanning process
might take longer than Normal compression.

Black TIFF Compression Select the black TIFF compression algorithm to be used to compress the generated TIFF file.

Color/Grayscale TIFF Select the color/grayscale TIFF compression algorithm to be used to compress the generated
Compression TIFF file.

PDF encryption If the file type is PDF, then this option encrypts the output PDF file. A password must be
specified as part of the encryption. The same password must be used to open the file. The user
will be prompted to enter a password prior to scanning their job if one has not been set prior to
pressing start.

Disable OCR file types Select this setting to prevent OCR file types from being available from the printer control panel.

Enable Blank Page If the Enable Blank Page Suppression option is enabled, blank pages will be ignored.
Suppression

10. Review the selected options to verify that they are accurate, and then click Apply to complete the setup.

Set up Send to E-mail to use Office 365 Outlook (optional)

Introduction

Microsoft Office 365 Outlook is a cloud-based email system provided by Microsoft which uses Microsoft's
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) server to send or receive emails. Complete the following to enable the
printer to send an email with an Office 365 Outlook account from the control panel.

NOTE: You must have an email address account with Office 365 Outlook to configure the settings in the
EWS.

ENWW Copy, scan, and Digital Send (HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet) 95
 Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)

1.
From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Network button to display the IP
address or host name.

2. Open a Web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays on
the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.

NOTE: If the Web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be safe,
select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.

Step two: Configure the outgoing email server (SMTP) to send an email from an Office 365 Outlook account

1. Using the EWS top navigation tabs, click Networking.

2. In the left navigation pane, click TCP/IP Settings.

3. In the TCP/IP Settings area, click the Network Identification tab.

4. If DNS is required on the network, in the TCP/IP Domain Suffix area, verify that the DNS suffix for the
email client being used is listed. DNS suffixes have this format: companyname.com, Gmail.com, etc.

NOTE: If the Domain Name suffix is not set up, use the IP address.

5. Click Apply.

6. Click the Scan/Digital Send tab.

7. On the left navigation pane, click E-mail Setup.

8. On the E-mail Setup page, select the Enable Send to E-mail check box. If this check box is not available,
the feature is unavailable at the printer control panel.

9. In the Outgoing E-mail Servers (SMTP) area, click Add to start the SMTP wizard.

10. In the I know my SMTP server address or host name field, type smtp.onoffice.com, and then click Next.

11. On the Set the basic information necessary to connect to the server dialog, in the Port Number field,
type 587.

NOTE: Some servers have problems sending or receiving emails that are larger than 5 megabytes
(MB). These problems can be prevented by entering a number in Split e-mails if larger than (MB).

12. Select the Enable SMTP SSL Protocol check box, and then click Next.

13. On the Server Authentication Requirements dialog, complete the following information:

a. Select Server requires authentication.

b. From the drop-down list, select Always use these credentials

c. In the Username field, type the Office 365 Outlook email address.

d. In the Password field, type the Office 365 Outlook account password, and then click Next.

96 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

 14. On the Server Usage dialog, choose the printer functions that will send email through this SMTP server,
and then click the Next button.

15. On the Summary and Test dialog, enter a valid email address in the Send a test e-mail to: field, and
then click Test.

16. Verify that all of the settings are correct, and then click Finish to complete the outgoing email server set
up.

Set up Scan to Network Folder using the HP Embedded Web Server

Introduction

The printer has a feature that enables it to scan a document and save it to a network folder. To use this scan
feature, the printer must be connected to a network; however, the feature is not available until it has been
configured through the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS). There are two methods for configuring Save to
Network Folder, the Save to Network Folder Setup Wizard for basic setup and Save to Network Folder
Setup for advanced setup. Use the following information to set up the Save to Network Folder feature.

Before you begin

NOTE: To set up the Save to Network Folder feature, the printer must have an active network connection.

Administrators need the following items before beginning the configuration process.

● Administrative access to the printer

● The fully-qualified domain name (FQDN) (e.g., \\servername.us.companyname.net\scans) of the

destination folder or the IP address of the server (e.g., \\16.88.20.20\scans).

NOTE: The use of the term "server" in this context refers to the computer where the shared folder
resides.

Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server

1.
From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Network button to display the IP
address or host name.

2. Open a Web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays on
the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.

NOTE: If the Web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be safe,
select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.

Step two: Set up Save to Network Folder

Method one: Use the Save to Network Folder Wizard

This option opens the setup wizard that is in the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) for the printer. The setup
wizard includes the options for basic configuration.

1. Click the Scan/Digital Send tab.

2. Click the Save to Network Folder Quick Set Wizard link.

ENWW Copy, scan, and Digital Send (HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet) 97
 3. On the E-mail and Save to Network Folder Quick Setup Wizards dialog, click Continue to proceed with
the configuration.

4. On the Add or Remove a Save to Network Folder Quick Set dialog, click Add.

NOTE: Quick Sets are short-cut jobs that can be accessed on the printer Home screen or within the
Quick Sets application.

NOTE: The Save to Network Folder feature can be minimally configured without creating a quick set.
However, without the quick set, users must enter the destination folder information at the control panel
for each scan job. A quick set is required to include Save to Network Folder metadata.

5. On the Add Folder Quick Set dialog, complete the following information:

a. In the Quick Set Title field, type a title.

TIP: Name the Quick Set something that users can understand quickly (e.g., "Scan and save to a
folder").

b. From the Button Location drop-down, select one of the following options to indicate where the
Quick Set button will display on the printer control panel:

● Quick Sets Application

● Home Screen

c. In the Quick Set Description field, type a description explaining what the Quick Set will save.

d. Click Next.

6. On the Configure Destination Folder dialog, complete the following information:

a. In the UNC Folder Path field, type a folder path where the scan will go.

The folder path can either be the fully-qualified domain name (FQDN) (e.g., \
\servername.us.companyname.net\scans) or the IP address of the server (e.g., \
\16.88.20.20\scans). Be sure that the folder path (e.g., \scans) follows the FQDN or IP address.

NOTE: The FQDN can be more reliable than the IP address. If the server gets its IP address via
DHCP, the IP address can change. However, the connection with an IP address might be faster
because the printer does not need to use DNS to find the destination server.

b. From the Authentication Settings drop-down, select one of the following options:

● Use credentials of user to connect after Sign In at the control panel

● Always use these credentials

NOTE: If Always use these credentials is selected, a user name and password must be
entered in the corresponding fields, and the printer’s access to the folder must be verified by
clicking Verify Access.

c. In the Windows Domain field, type the Windows domain.

98 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

 TIP: To find the Windows domain in Windows 7, click Start, click Control Panel, click System.

To find the Windows domain in Windows 8, click Search, enter System in the search box, and then
click System.

The domain is listed under Computer name, domain, and workgroup settings.

d. Click Next.

7. On the Configure File Scan Settings dialog, set the default scanning preferences for the Quick Set, and
then click Next.

8. Review the Summary dialog, and then click Finish.

9. On the Save to Network Folder Setup dialog, review the selected settings, and then click Finish to
complete the setup.

Method two: Use Save to Network Folder Setup

Overview

This option enables advanced configuration of the Save to Network Folder feature using the HP Embedded
Web Server (EWS) for the printer.

Step one: Begin the configuration

1. Click the Scan/Digital Send tab.

2. On the left navigation menu, click Save to Network Folder Setup.

Step two: Configure the Save to Network Folder settings

Overview

1. On the Save to Network Folder Setup page, select the Enable Save to Network Folder check box. If this
box is not selected, the feature is unavailable at the printer control panel.

2. In the Quick Sets area, click Add. The Quick Set Wizard opens.

NOTE: Quick Sets are short-cut jobs that can be accessed on the printer Home screen or within the
Quick Sets application.

NOTE: The Save to Network Folder feature can be minimally configured without creating a quick set.
However, without the quick set, users must enter the destination folder information at the control panel
for each scan job. A quick set is required to include Save to Network Folder metadata.

Complete all of the dialogs in the Quick Set Wizard to fully configure the Save to Network Folder feature.

Dialog one: Set the button location for the Quick Set and options for user interaction at the control panel

Use the Set the button location for the Quick Set and options for user interaction at the control panel
dialog to configure where the Quick Set button will display on the printer control panel and to configure the
level of user interaction at the printer control panel.

1. In the Quick Set Title field, type a title.

ENWW Copy, scan, and Digital Send (HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet) 99
 TIP: Name the Quick Set something that users can understand quickly (e.g., "Scan and save to a
folder").

2. From the Button Location list, select one of the following to indicate where the Quick Set button will
display on the printer control panel:

● Quick Sets Application

● Home Screen

3. In the Quick Set Description field, type a description explaining what the Quick Set will save.

4. From the Quick Set Start Option list, select one of the following options:

● Option one: Enter application, then user presses Start

● Option two: Start instantly upon selection

▲ Select one of the following options under Original Sides Prompt:

◦ Use application default

◦ Prompt for original sides

NOTE: If Start instantly upon selection is selected, the destination folder must be entered in the
next step.

5. Click Next.

Dialog two: Folder Settings

Overview

Use the Folder Settings dialog to configure the types of folders the printer sends scanned documents to.

There are two types of destination folders to select from:

● Shared folders or FTP folders

● Personal shared folders

There are two types of folder permissions to select from:

● Read and write access

● Write access only

The following information describes how to configure the folder settings.

Configure the destination folder for scanned documents

Option 1: Shared folders or FTP folders

To save scanned documents to a standard shared folder or an FTP folder, complete the following steps:

100 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

 1. If it is not already selected, select Save to shared folders or FTP folders.

2. Click Add.... The Add Network Folder Path dialog opens.

3. On the Add Network Folder Path dialog, select one of the following options:

● Option one: Save to a standard shared network folder

1. If it is not already selected, select Save to a standard shared network folder.

2. In the UNC Folder Path field, type a folder path.

The folder path can either be the fully-qualified domain name (FQDN) (e.g., \
\servername.us.companyname.net\scans) or the IP address of the server (e.g., \
\16.88.20.20\scans). Be sure that the folder path (e.g., \scans) follows the FQDN or IP
address.

NOTE: The FQDN can be more reliable than the IP address. If the server gets its IP address
via DHCP, the IP address can change. However, the connection with an IP address might be
faster because the printer does not need to use DNS to find the destination server.

3. To automatically create a subfolder for scanned documents in the destination folder, select a
format for the subfolder name from the Custom Subfolder list.

To restrict the subfolder access to the user who creates the scan job, select Restrict
subfolder access to user.

4. To view the complete folder path for scanned documents, click Update Preview.

5. From the Authentication Settings list, select either Use credentials of user to connect after
Sign In at the control panel or Always use these credentials.

NOTE: If Always use these credentials is selected, a user name and password must be
entered in the corresponding fields.

6. In the Windows Domain field, type the Windows domain.

TIP: To find the Windows domain in Windows 7, click Start, click Control Panel, click
System.

To find the Windows domain in Windows 8, click Search, enter System in the search box, and
then click System.

The domain is listed under Computer name, domain, and workgroup settings.

NOTE: If a shared folder is set to be accessed by everyone, values for a workgroup name
(default is “Workgroup”), a user name and password must be entered in the corresponding
fields. However, if the folder is within a particular user’s folders and not Public, the user name
and password of that user must be used.

ENWW Copy, scan, and Digital Send (HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet) 101
 NOTE: An IP address might be necessary instead of a computer name. Many home routers
do not handle computer names well, and there is no Domain Name Server (DNS). In this case,
it is best to set up a static IP address on the shared PC to alleviate the problem of DHCP
assigning a new IP address. On a typical home router, this is done by setting a static IP
address that is on the same subnet, but outside the DHCP address range.

7. Click OK.

● Option two: Save to an FTP Server

1. Select Save to an FTP Server.

NOTE: If an FTP site is outside the firewall, a proxy server must be specified under the
network settings These settings are located in the EWS Networking tab, under the Advanced
options.

2. In the FTP Server field, type the FTP server name or IP address.

3. In the Port field, type the port number.

NOTE: In most cases, the default port number does not need to be changed.

4. To automatically create a subfolder for scanned documents in the destination folder, select a
format for the subfolder name from the Custom Subfolder list.

5. To view the complete folder path for scanned documents, click Update Preview.

6. From the FTP Transfer Mode list, select either Passive or Active.

7. In the Username field, type the user name.

8. In the Password field, type the password.

9. Click Verify Access to confirm the destination can be accessed.

10. Click OK.

Option 2: Personal shared folders

To save scanned documents to a personal shared folder, complete the following steps:

NOTE: This option is used in domain environments where the administrator configures a shared folder for
each user. If the Save to a personal shared folder feature is configured, users will be required to sign in at the
printer control panel using Windows credentials or LDAP authentication.

102 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

 1. Select Save to a personal shared folder.

2. In the Retrieve the device user’s home folder using this attribute field, type the user’s home folder in
the Microsoft Active Directory.

NOTE: Verify that the user knows where this home folder is located on the network.

3. To add a user name subfolder at the end of the folder path, select Create subfolder based on user
name.

To restrict the subfolder access to the user who creates the scan job, select Restrict subfolder access to
user.

Select the destination folder permissions

Option 1: Read and write access

To send scanned documents to a folders configured for read and write access, complete the following steps:

NOTE: Send only to folders with read and write access supports folder verification and job notification

1. If it is not already selected, select Send only to folders with read and write access.

2. To require the printer to verify folder access before starting a scan job, select Verify folder access prior
to job start.

NOTE: Scan jobs can complete more quickly if Verify folder access prior to job start is not selected;
however, if the folder is unavailable, the scan job will fail.

3. Click Next.

Option 2: Write access only

To send scanned documents to a folder configured for write access only, complete the following steps:

NOTE: Allow sending to folders with write access only does not support folder verification or job
notification

NOTE: If this option is selected, the printer cannot increment the scan filename. It sends the same filename
for all scans.

Select a time-related filename prefix or suffix for the scan filename, so that each scan is saved as a unique
file, and does not overwrite a previous file. This filename is determined by the information in the File Settings
dialog in the Quick Set Wizard.

1. Select Allow sending to folders with write access only.

2. Click Next.

Dialog three: Notification settings

▲ In the Notification Settings area, complete one of the following tasks:

NOTE: In order to send notification emails, the printer must be set up to use an SMTP server for
sending email jobs.

● Option one: Do not notify

ENWW Copy, scan, and Digital Send (HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet) 103
 1. Select Do not notify.

2. To prompt the user to review their notification settings, select Prompt user prior to job start,
and then click Next.

● Option two: Notify when job completes

1. Select Notify when job completes.

2. Select the method for delivering the notification from the Method Used to Deliver
Notification list.

If the method of notification selected is E-mail, type the email address in the Notification E-
mail Address field.

3. To include a thumbnail of the first scanned page in the notification, select Include Thumbnail.

4. To prompt the user to review their notification settings, select Prompt user prior to job start,
and then click Next.

● Option three: Notify only if job fails

1. Select Notify only if job fails.

2. Select the method for delivering the notification from the Method Used to Deliver
Notification list.

If the method of notification selected is E-mail, type the email address in the Notification E-
mail Address field.

3. To include a thumbnail of the first scanned page in the notification, select Include Thumbnail.

4. To prompt the user to review their notification settings, select Prompt user prior to job start,
and then click Next.

Dialog four: Scan Settings

On the Scan Settings dialog, set the default scanning preferences for the Quick Set, and then click Next.

Scan settings:

Feature Description

Original Size Select the page size of the original document.

Original Sides Select whether the original document is single-sided or double-sided.

Optimize Text/Picture Select to optimize for the output of a particular type of content, or select Manually adjust.

Optimize For This setting is only available when Optimize Text/Picture is set to Manually adjust. Select a
manual-adjust value.

Content Orientation Select the way the content of the original document is placed on the page: Portrait or Landscape, or
select Automatically detect.

2–Sided Format This setting is not available when Content Orientation is set to Automatically detect. Select to
describe the binding of the page to specify if the back side of the page is upside down or right side
up.

Background Cleanup Select a value to remove faint images from the background or to remove a light background color.

Darkness Select a value to adjust the darkness of the file.

104 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

 Feature Description

Contrast Select a value to adjust the contrast of the file.

Sharpness Select a value to adjust the sharpness of the file.

Image Preview Select whether to require or make optional a displayed preview of the job or to disable a preview.

Cropping Options Select whether or not to allow a job to be cropped and the type of cropping option.

Job Build Select this setting to combine several sets of original documents into one email attachment. Also,
use this setting to scan an original document that has more pages than the document feeder can
accommodate at one time.

Automatic Tone Select this setting to set to automatic the Darkness, Contrast, and Background cleanup settings,
which then makes these settings unavailable on this page.

Multi-feed Detection Select this setting to enable detection of multi-feed jobs.

Erase Edges Select this setting to specify the width of edge margins to be erased, in either inches or millimeters,
for the front side and back side of a job.

Dialog five: File Settings

On the File Settings dialog, set the default file settings for the Quick Set, and then click Next.

File settings:

Feature Description

File Name Prefix Set the default file name prefix used for files saved to a network folder.

Default File Name Default file name for the file to be saved.

Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.

File Name Suffix Set the default file name suffix used for files saved to a network folder.

Duplicate filename suffix default [filename]_YYYYMMDDT

File Number Format Select a file name format for when the job is divided into multiple files.

Default File Type Select the file format for the saved file.

Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.

File Name Preview Enter a file name, and then click the Update Preview button.

Default Color Preference Select whether the file is in black & white or in color.

Default Output Quality Select the quality for the file. Higher-quality images require a larger file size than lower-quality
images, and they take more time to send.

Default Resolution Set the resolution for the file. Higher resolution images have more dots per inch (dpi), so they show
more detail. Lower resolution images have fewer dots per inch and show less detail, but the file size
is smaller.

Compression Specify if the file uses Normal or High compression when saving a scanned document as a PDF or
XPS file. If compression is set to High, the scanned file is smaller, but the scanning process might
take longer than Normal compression.

Black TIFF Compression Select the black TIFF compression algorithm to be used to compress the generated TIFF file.

Color/Grayscale TIFF Select the color/grayscale TIFF compression algorithm to be used to compress the generated TIFF
Compression file.

ENWW Copy, scan, and Digital Send (HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet) 105
 Feature Description

PDF encryption If the file type is PDF, then this option encrypts the output PDF file. A password must be specified as
part of the encryption. The same password must be used to open the file. The user will be prompted
to enter a password prior to scanning their job if one has not been set prior to pressing start.

Disable OCR file types Select this setting to prevent OCR file types from being available from the printer control panel.

Enable Blank Page If the Enable Blank Page Suppression option is enabled, blank pages will be ignored.
Suppression

Dialog six: Summary

On the Summary dialog, review the Summary dialog, and then click Finish.

Step three: Complete the configuration

▲ On the Save to Network Folder Setup dialog, review the selected settings, and then click Apply to
complete the setup.

Set up Save to USB using the HP Embedded Web Server

Introduction

The printer has a feature that enables it to scan a document and save it to a USB flash drive. The feature is not
available until it has been configured through the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS).

Before you begin

To enable Save to USB, enable Host USB plug and play must be enabled on the Security tab.

Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and select the Administration menu.

2. Open a Web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays on
the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.

NOTE: If the Web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be safe,
select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.

Step two: Enable Save to USB Setup

1. Select the Scan/Digital Send tab.

2. Click the Save to USB Setup link.

3. Select the Enable Save to USB check box.

4. Click Apply at the bottom of the page.

106 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

Default scan settings for Save to USB setup

Table 3-1 Scan settings for Save to USB Setup:

Option name Description

Original Size Select the page size of the original document.

Original Sides Select whether the original document is single-sided or double-sided.

Optimize Text/Picture
Select to optimize for the output of a particular type of content, or select Manually adjust.

Optimize For This setting is only available when Optimize Text/Picture is set to Manually adjust. Select a
manual-adjust value.

Content Orientation Select the way the content of the original document is placed on the page: Portrait or Landscape, or
select Automatically detect.

2–Sided Format This setting is not available when Content Orientation is set to Automatically detect. Select to
describe the binding of the page to specify if the back side of the page is upside down or right side
up.

Background Cleanup Select a value to remove faint images from the background or to remove a light background color.

Darkness Select a value to adjust the darkness of the file.

Contrast Select a value to adjust the contrast of the file.

Sharpness Select a value to adjust the sharpness of the file.

Image Preview Select whether to require or make optional a displayed preview of the job or to disable a preview.

Cropping Options Select whether or not to allow a job to be cropped and the type of cropping option.

Job Build Select this setting to combine several sets of original documents into one email attachment. Also,
use this setting to scan an original document that has more pages than the document feeder can
accommodate at one time.

Automatic Tone Select this setting to set to automatic the Darkness, Contrast, and Background cleanup settings,
which then makes these settings unavailable on this page.

Multi-feed Detection Select this setting to enable detection of multi-feed jobs.

Erase Edges Select this setting to specify the width of edge margins to be erased, in either inches or millimeters,
for the front side and back side of a job.

Default file settings for Save to USB Setup

Option name Description

File Name Prefix Set the default file name prefix used for files saved to a network folder.

Default File Name Default file name for the file to be saved.

Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.

File Name Suffix Set the default file name suffix used for files saved to a network folder.

Duplicate filename suffix default [filename]_YYYYMMDDT

File Number Format Select a file name format for when the job is divided into multiple files.

Default File Type Select the file format for the saved file.

Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.

ENWW Copy, scan, and Digital Send (HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet) 107
 Option name Description

File Name Preview Enter a file name, and then click the Update Preview button.

Default Color Preference Select whether the file is in black & white or in color.

Default Output Quality Select the quality for the file. Higher-quality images require a larger file size than lower-quality
images, and they take more time to send.

Default Resolution Set the resolution for the file. Higher resolution images have more dots per inch (dpi), so they show
more detail. Lower resolution images have fewer dots per inch and show less detail, but the file size
is smaller.

Compression Specify if the file uses Normal or High compression when saving a scanned document as a PDF or
XPS file. If compression is set to High, the scanned file is smaller, but the scanning process might
take longer than Normal compression.

Black TIFF Compression Select the black TIFF compression algorithm to be used to compress the generated TIFF file.

Color/Grayscale TIFF Select the color/grayscale TIFF compression algorithm to be used to compress the generated TIFF
Compression file.

PDF encryption If the file type is PDF, then this option encrypts the output PDF file. A password must be specified as
part of the encryption. The same password must be used to open the file. The user will be prompted
to enter a password prior to scanning their job if one has not been set prior to pressing start.

Enable Blank Page If the Enable Blank Page Suppression option is enabled, blank pages will be ignored.
Suppression

Scan to SharePoint®
Scan to SharePoint® is a feature on HP Laserjet flow products. The feature allows customers to scan
documents directly to a Microsoft SharePoint site. It eliminates the need for a customer to scan the
documents to a network folder, USB flash drive, or email message, and then manually upload the files to the
SharePoint site.

Save to SharePoint® must be used as part of a Quick Set. Save to SharePoint® supports all scanning options,
including the ability to scan documents as images or use the OCR features to created text files or searchable
PDFs.

The feature is disabled by default. Enable Save to SharePoint®using the EWS.

Scan to Job Storage

Scan to Job Storage was the Save to Device Memory feature in the Scan menu in HP FutureSmart 2 firmware.
In HP FutureSmart 4, Scan to Job Storage is an option in the Scan feature.

Quick Sets
Quick Sets are job shortcuts accessed from the Quick Sets menu.

Job parameters such as file type or resolution can be preconfigured and saved as Quick Sets. Users can select
an appropriate Quick Set from the control panel instead of manually changing multiple job parameters.

Jobs can be set to start immediately upon selection, require an image preview before completion, or use
other options to assist users in completing jobs quickly and easily.

108 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

 The Quick Sets feature is enabled through the EWS for these features:

● Scan to E-mail

● Scan to Network Folder

● Scan to USB Drive

● Scan to Fax

● Copy

Quick Sets are specific to a base function. A Quick Set created for Scan to E-mail cannot be used for the Scan
to Fax feature. A Quick Set can be created without the base function (E-mail, Fax, and so on) enabled.
However, the Quick Set cannot work or be displayed on the control panel until the base feature is enabled.

NOTE: Changes made to parameters for a Quick Set do not affect the base feature. The default resolution
setting for Save to USB might be 150 dpi, but a Quick Set can be configured to scan at 300 dpi.

Scan and send to email

Introduction

The printer has a feature that enables it to scan a document and send it to one or more email addresses.
Before using this feature, use the HP Embedded Web Server to enable it and set it up.

Scan and send a document to email

1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and
adjust the paper guides to fit the size of the document.

2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the E-mail button.

NOTE: If prompted, type your user name and password.

3. Touch the To field to open a keyboard.

NOTE: If you are signed in to the printer, your user name or other default information might appear in
the From field. If so, you might not be able to change it.

4. Specify the recipients by using one of these methods:

Enter addresses manually

▲ Enter the address in the To field. To send to multiple addresses, separate the addresses with a
semicolon, or touch the Enter button on the touchscreen keyboard after typing each
address.

ENWW Copy, scan, and Digital Send (HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet) 109
 Enter addresses from the Contacts list

a.
Touch the Address Book button that is next to the To: field to open the Address Book screen.

b. From the drop-down list, select the address book view that you want to use.

c.
Select a name from the list of contacts, and then touch the right arrow button to add the
name to the recipients list. Repeat this step for each recipient, and then touch the OK button.

5. Complete the Subject, and File Name fields by touching the field and using the touchscreen keyboard to
enter information. Touch the OK button when you have completed the fields.

6. To configure settings for the document, touch the More Options button. For example:

● Select File Type and Resolution to specify the type of file to create, the resolution, and the output
quality.

● If the original document is printed on both sides, select Original Sides, and then select 2 Sided.

7.
Touch the preview button to preview the document. In the preview screen, use the buttons at the
bottom of the screen to adjust the preview options, and to rearrange, rotate, insert, or remove pages.

8.
Touch the Start button to send.

NOTE: The printer might prompt you to add the email address to the address book or the contact list.

Figure 3-4 Example of the scan preview screen

2 3
1 Page-navigation control Touch the arrow buttons to scroll forward or backward through the document one page at a
time.

To display a specific page, touch the text box and then enter the page number.

NOTE: You can also swipe to scroll through the pages.

110 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

 2 View button Touch the View button to toggle between single-page and multi-page view.

3 Zoom button Touch the Zoom button to zoom in or out on the selected page.

To move the image within the document-preview area, touch the image and drag your finger on
the screen. To return the image to the original size, touch the Zoom button again.

Figure 3-5 Example of the scan preview options screen

1
2
3
4

1 Append pages button Touch the Append pages button to add pages to the document.

To add pages, touch the Append pages button, place additional pages in the document feeder

or on the scanner glass, and then touch the Start button.

2 Move pages button Touch the Move pages button to rearrange the pages within the document.

To move a range of pages, touch the first and last pages in the range and then touch the Move
pages button. Page-insert buttons display to indicate where you can move the pages. Touch
one of the page-insert buttons to move the pages.

3 Rotate pages button Touch the Rotate pages button to rotate pages 90 degrees.

To rotate a range of pages, touch the first and last pages in the range, and then touch the
Rotate pages button. The pages rotate clockwise 90 degrees each time you touch the button.

4 Delete pages button Touch the Delete pages button to delete the selected pages.

To delete a range of pages, touch the first and last pages in the range, touch the Delete pages
button. An Are you sure you want to delete the selected pages from this document message
displays. Touch Delete to delete the pages.

Scan and send to network folder

Introduction

The printer can scan a file and save it in a shared folder on the network. Before using this feature, use the HP
Embedded Web server to enable the feature and configure the shared folders. The system administrator can
configure pre-defined Quick Sets folders; otherwise it is necessary to specify the folder path for each job.

ENWW Copy, scan, and Digital Send (HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet) 111
 Scan and save the document to a folder

NOTE: You might be required to sign in to the printer to use this feature.

1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and
adjust the paper guides to fit the size of the document.

2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Save to Network Folder button.

3.
To specify a path for this job only, touch the Add button to open a keyboard, and type the path to
the folder, and then touch the OK button. Use this format for the path:

\\server\folder, where “server” is the name of the server that hosts the shared folder, and
“folder” is the name of the shared folder. If the folder is nested inside other folders, complete all
necessary segments of the path to reach the folder. For example: \\server\folder\folder

Or, select a pre-defined Quick Sets path or a path associated with a Contact.

NOTE: The Folder Paths field might have a pre-defined path, and it might not be editable. In this
situation, the administrator has configured this folder for common access.

4. Touch the File Name text field to open a keyboard, and then type the name for the file, and then touch
the OK button.

5. To configure settings for the document, touch the More Options button. For example:

● Select File Type and Resolution to specify the type of file to create, the resolution, and the output
quality.

● If the original document is printed on both sides, select Original Sides, and then select 2 Sided.

6.
Touch the preview button to preview the document. In the preview screen, use the buttons at the
bottom of the screen to adjust the preview options, and to rearrange, rotate, insert, or remove pages.

7.
When the document is ready, touch the Start button to save the file.

112 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

 Figure 3-6 Example of the scan preview screen

2 3
Page-navigation control Touch the arrow buttons to scroll forward or backward through the document one page at a
time.

To display a specific page, touch the text box and then enter the page number.

NOTE: You can also swipe to scroll through the pages.

View button Touch the View button to toggle between single-page and multi-page view.

Zoom button Touch the Zoom button to zoom in or out on the selected page.

To move the image within the document-preview area, touch the image and drag your finger on
the screen. To return the image to the original size, touch the Zoom button again.

ENWW Copy, scan, and Digital Send (HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet) 113
 Figure 3-7 Example of the scan preview options screen

1
2
3
4

1 Append pages button Touch the Append pages button to add pages to the document.

To add pages, touch the Append pages button, place additional pages in the document feeder

or on the scanner glass, and then touch the Start button.

2 Move pages button Touch the Move pages button to rearrange the pages within the document.

To move a range of pages, touch the first and last pages in the range and then touch the Move
pages button. Page-insert buttons display to indicate where you can move the pages. Touch
one of the page-insert buttons to move the pages.

3 Rotate pages button Touch the Rotate pages button to rotate pages 90 degrees.

To rotate a range of pages, touch the first and last pages in the range, and then touch the
Rotate pages button. The pages rotate clockwise 90 degrees each time you touch the button.

4 Delete pages button Touch the Delete pages button to delete the selected pages.

To delete a range of pages, touch the first and last pages in the range, touch the Delete pages
button. An Are you sure you want to delete the selected pages from this document message
displays. Touch Delete to delete the pages.

Scan to USB Drive

Scan to USB Drive allows users, administrators, and service and support personnel to save files from the
product to a USB flash drive.

USB settings are enabled in the Initial Setup menu. The Scan to USB Drive feature is enabled in the EWS or by
using DSS.

Additional options when scanning

The following settings are available in the More Options list when scanning.

NOTE: The following list contains the master set of options available for HP Enterprise MFP printers. Some
options are not available on all printers.

114 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

 Save As... Specify the folder and file name for the scanned file

Load and Save Settings Load Quick Set: Load scan settings from a saved Quick Set.

NOTE: Use the HP Embedded Web Server to create and save Quick Sets.

Save Defaults: Save the current settings in the Options list as default settings for future scan jobs.

Document File Type Save a scanned document as one of several types of files.

The following standard file types are available:

● PDF: This file type provides the best overall image and text quality. PDF files require Adobe®
Acrobat® Reader software for viewing.

● JPEG: This file type is a good choice for most graphics. Most computers have a browser that can
view .JPEG files. This file type produces one file per page.

● TIFF: This is a standard file type that many graphics programs support. This file type produces
one file per page.

● MTIFF: MTIFF stands for multi-page TIFF. This file type saves multiple scanned pages in a single
file.

● XPS: XPS (XML Paper Specification) creates an XAML file that preserves the original formatting
of the document and supports color graphics and embedded fonts.

● PDF/A: PDF/A is a type of PDF designed for long-term archival of electronic documents. All
format information in the document is self-contained.

Output Quality Specify the output quality of scanned images, which affects the file size of the resulting file.

Original Sides Specify whether the original document is printed on one side or both sides.

Color/Black Specify whether the scanned image will be in color, black and gray, or black only.

For color printers only.

Scan Mode Standard Document: Scan a page or stack of pages through the document feeder, or individually on
the flatbed glass.

Book Mode: Scan an open book and output each page of the book onto different pages.

2-sided ID Copy: Scan each side of an identification card on the flatbed glass and output them onto
one page. After scanning the first side, the printer prompts to place the second side in the correct
position on the glass.

Resolution Specify the resolution of scanned images. Select a higher resolution to increase the clarity of the
image. However, as the resolution increases, the file size also increases.

Original Size Specify the paper size for the original document.

Content Orientation Specify whether the original document is printed in Portrait or Landscape orientation.

Image Adjustment Sharpness: Clarify or soften the image. For example, increasing the sharpness could make text
appear crisper, but decreasing it could make photos appear smoother.

Darkness: Increase or decrease the amount of white and black used in colors in scanned images.

Contrast: Increase or decrease the difference between the lightest and the darkest color on the
page.

Background Cleanup: Remove faint colors from the background of scanned images. For example, if
the original document is printed on colored paper, use this feature to lighten the background
without affecting the darkness of the image.

Optimize Text/Picture Optimize the job for the type of image being scanned: text, graphics, or photos.

ENWW Copy, scan, and Digital Send (HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet) 115
 Erase Edges Remove blemishes, such as dark borders or staple marks, by cleaning the edges of the scanned
image.

Cropping options Crop to original size: Crop the image to match the paper size of the original document.

Crop to content: Crop the image to the size of the detectable content in the original document.

Blank Page Suppression Exclude blank pages in the original document from scanned images. This feature is useful for
scanning pages printed on both sides to eliminate blank pages in the resulting scanned document.

Multi-feed Detection Enable or disable multi-feed detection. When enabled, scanning stops when the printer detects
more than one page at a time being fed in the document feeder. When disabled, scanning continues
when a multi-feed is detected, to allow scanning pages that are stuck together, originals with self-
adhesive notes on them, or thick paper.

Notification Select whether to send notifications of the status of scan jobs. The printer can print the notification,
or it can send the notification in an email.

Save Defaults Save the current scan settings as the new default settings for this scan function.

HP JetAdvantage business solutions

HP JetAdvantage solutions are workflow and printing solutions that are easy-to-use, and both network and
cloud-based. HP JetAdvantage solutions are designed to help businesses of all types, including healthcare,
financial services, manufacturing, and public sector, manage a fleet of printers and scanners.

HP JetAdvantage Solutions include:

● HP JetAdvantage Security solutions

● HP JetAdvantage Management solutions

● HP JetAdvantage Workflow solutions

● HP JetAdvantage Mobile Printing solutions

For more information about HP JetAdvantage business workflow and printing solutions, go to
www.hp.com/go/PrintSolutions.

Additional scan tasks

Go to www.hp.com.

Instructions are available for performing specific scan tasks, such as the following:

● Copy or scan pages from books or other bound documents

● Send a scanned document to a folder in the printer memory

● Copy or scan both sides of an identification card

● Copy or scan a document into a booklet format

Fax
Fax overview
The HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet Color MFP 586f and 586z have built-in fax capabilities. The printers
support analog, LAN, and Internet fax modes. The following settings must be configured in order to use the

116 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

 fax feature. If these settings are not configured, the fax icon is unavailable in the control panel. These
settings include:

● Country/region

● Date/Time

● Company Name

● Fax Number

This information is used in the fax header, which prints on all outgoing faxes.

Configure these settings using the Fax Setup Wizard.

NOTE: When first installed, the fax accessory might read some of these settings from the printer; therefore,
a value might already be set. The settings can be configured using the Fax Setup Wizard, EWS, HP DSS
software, or the Administration menu on the control panel.

NOTE: In the U.S. and many other countries/regions, setting the date, time, country/region, phone number,
and company name is a legal requirement for fax.

See the printer support site or User Guide for more information about this feature.

Set up fax

Introduction

This information applies to fax and Flow models, or to other printers when an optional analog fax accessory
has been installed. Before continuing, connect the printer to a phone line (for analog fax) or to an Internet or
network fax service.

Set up fax by using the printer control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Settings, and then select Fax.

NOTE: If the Fax menu does not appear in the menu listing, LAN or Internet fax might be enabled.
When LAN or Internet fax is enabled, the analog fax accessory is disabled and the Fax menu does not
display. Only one fax feature, either LAN fax, analog fax, or Internet fax, can be enabled at a time. To use
analog fax when LAN fax is enabled, use the HP Embedded Web Server to disable LAN fax.

2. Make sure that the Internal Fax Modem Setup shows that it is configured. If it is not configured, select
Internal Fax Model Setup now and enter the settings.

3. Select each of the following menu items and complete the settings presented on the right side of the
screen. Select Done for each setting if prompted.

● Fax Send Settings

● Fax Receive Settings

● Fax Forwarding

ENWW Copy, scan, and Digital Send (HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet) 117
 Change fax configurations

Introduction

You can configure fax settings on the printer control panel. Settings that are configured on the printer control
panel override any settings made in the HP Embedded Web Server.

Fax dialing settings

Configure any of the following settings:

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Settings.

2. Open the following menus:

● Fax

● Fax Send Settings

● Fax Dialing Settings

Configure any of the following settings. Select Done when you are finished.

Menu item Description

Redial on Error The Redial on Error feature sets the number of times a fax number will be redialed when
an error occurs during a fax transmission.

Redial on No Answer The Redial on No Answer setting selects the number of times the fax accessory redials if
the number dialed does not answer. The number of retries is either 0 to 1 (used in the
U.S.) or 0 to 2, depending on the location setting. The interval between retries is set by
the redial interval setting.

Redial on Busy The Redial on Busy setting selects the number of times (0 through 9) the fax accessory
redials a number when the number is busy. The interval between retries is set by the
Redial Interval setting.

Redial Interval The Redial Interval setting selects the number of minutes between retries if the number
dialed is busy or not answering, or if an error occurs.

NOTE: You might observe a redial message on the control panel when both the Redial
on Busy and Redial on No Answer settings are set to off. This occurs when the fax
accessory dials a number, establishes a connection, and then loses the connection. As a
result of this error condition, the fax accessory performs three automatic redial attempts
regardless of the redial settings. During this redial operation, a message displays on the
control panel to indicate that a redial is in progress.

Fax Send Speed The Fax Send Speed setting sets the modem bit rate (measured in bits per second) of the
Analog Fax modem while sending a fax.

● Fast (v.34 – 33.6k)

● Medium (v.17 – 14.4k)

● Slow (v.29 – 9.6k)

Line Monitor Volume Use the Line Monitor Volume setting to control the printer's dialing volume level when
sending faxes.

Dialing Mode The Dialing Mode setting sets the type of dialing that is used: either tone (touch-tone
phones) or pulse (rotary-dial phones).

118 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

 Menu item Description

Dialing Prefix The Dialing Prefix setting allows you to enter a prefix number (such as a "9" to access an
outside line) when dialing. This prefix number is automatically added to all phone
numbers when dialed.

Detect dial tone The Detect dial tone setting determines whether the fax checks for a dial tone before
sending a fax.

General fax send settings

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Settings.

2. Open the following menus:

● Fax

● Fax Send Settings

● General Fax Send Settings

Configure any of the following settings. Select Done when you are finished.

Menu item Description

Fax Number Confirmation When the Fax Number Confirmation feature is enabled, the fax number must be entered
twice to ensure that it was entered correctly. The feature is disabled by default.

PC Fax Send Use the PC Fax Send feature to send faxes from a PC. This feature is enabled by default.

Error Correction Mode Normally, the fax accessory monitors the signals on the telephone line while it is sending
or receiving a fax. If the fax accessory detects an error during the transmission and the
Error Correction Mode setting is on, the fax accessory can request that the error portion
of the fax be sent again.

The Error Correction Mode feature is enabled by default. You should turn it off only if you
are having trouble sending or receiving a fax and if you are willing to accept the errors in
the transmission and a probable quality reduction in the image. Turning off the setting
might be useful when you are trying to send a fax overseas or receive one from overseas,
or if you are using a satellite telephone connection.

NOTE: Some VoIP providers might suggest turning off the Error Correction Mode
setting. However, this is not usually necessary.

Fax Header Use the Fax Header feature to control whether the header is appended to the top, and
content is shifted down, or if the header is overlaid on top of the previous header.

Fax receive settings

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Settings.

2. Open the following menus:

● Fax

● Fax Receive Settings

● Fax Receive Setup

Configure any of the following settings. Select Done when you are finished.

ENWW Copy, scan, and Digital Send (HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet) 119
 Menu item Description

Rings to Answer The Rings to Answer setting determines the number of times the phone rings before the
call is answered by the fax accessory.

NOTE: The default range for the available options for the Rings to Answer setting is
location-specific. The range of possible Rings to Answer options is limited by location.

If the fax accessory is not answering, and the Rings to Answer setting is 1, try increasing
it to 2.

Ring Volume Select the Ring Volume drop-down menu and adjust the ringer volume settings.

Fax Receive Speed Select the Fax Receive Speed drop down menu and select one of the following options:

● Fast (v.34 – 33.6k)

● Medium (v.17 – 14.4k)

● Slow (v.29 – 9.6k)

Send a fax
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and
adjust the paper guides to fit the size of the document.

2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Scan, and then select Scan to Fax. You might
be prompted to type a user name and password.

3. Specify the recipients by using one of these methods:

Enter recipients manually

▲ Select the Fax Recipients text field, and then use the keypad to enter the fax number. To send to
multiple addresses, select the Enter button on the touchscreen keypad after typing each
address.

Enter recipients from the Contacts list

a.
Select the Contacts button that is next to the Fax Recipients field to open the Contacts
screen.

b. From the drop-down list, select the appropriate contact list.

c. Select a name from the list of contacts to add the name to the recipients list. Repeat this step for
each recipient, and then select Done.

4. To load a Quick Set, select Load, select the Quick Set, and then select Load under the Load Quick Sets
list.

NOTE: Quick Sets are predefined settings for various types of output, such as Text, Photograph, and
High Quality. You can select a Quick Set to view the description.

5. To configure settings, such as Resolution, Original Sides, and Content Orientation, select Options in the
lower left corner, and then select the settings from the Options menus. Select Done for each setting if
prompted.

120 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

 6. Optional preview: Touch the right pane of the screen to preview the document. You can touch the
document to expand the view. In the preview screen, use the buttons on the right of the screen to adjust
the preview options and to rearrange, rotate, insert, or remove pages.

Use these buttons to toggle between single-page view and thumbnail view. More options are
available in thumbnail view than in single-page view.

Use these buttons to zoom in or out on the selected page.

NOTE: Select only one page at a time to use these buttons.

Use this button to rotate the page 180 degrees.

NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.

Use this button to delete the selected pages.

NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.

Use these buttons to rearrange the pages within the document. Select one or more pages and
move them to the left or right.

NOTE: These buttons are available only in the thumbnail view.

Use this button to add a page to the document. The printer prompts to scan additional pages.

Use this button to clear the changes made in the preview and start over.

Use this button on the left side of the screen to collapse the full preview and return to the Scan
to Fax screen.

7. When the document is ready, select Send to send the fax.

Additional fax tasks

Go to www.hp.com.

ENWW Copy, scan, and Digital Send (HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet) 121
 Instructions are available for performing specific fax tasks, such as the following:

● Create and manage fax speed dial lists

● Configure fax billing codes

● Use a fax printing schedule

● Block incoming faxes

● Fax archiving and forwarding

Block incoming faxes

Introduction

Use the fax block list setting to create a list of blocked phone numbers. When a fax is received from a blocked
phone number, the fax is not printed and is immediately deleted from memory.

Create a list of blocked fax numbers

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Settings.

2. Open the following menus:

● Fax

● Fax Receive Settings

● Blocked Fax Numbers

3. Use one of the following options to add a number to the list:

● Select Add Last Sender.

● Select the New Fax Number field, type the number on the keypad that appears, and then select the
Enter button. To add additional numbers, type the number and select the Enter
button.

4. Select Done.

Delete numbers from the list of blocked fax numbers

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Settings.

2. Open the following menus:

● Fax

● Fax Receive Settings

● Blocked Fax Numbers

3. Select one or more existing fax numbers in the list, or select Select All if you want to remove all the
numbers.

4. Select the Trash icon, and then select Delete on the confirmation prompt.

122 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

Create and manage fax speed dial lists

Introduction

Use the control panel on the printer to create and manage a fax speed dial list.

Create a speed dial list

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Contacts.

2. Select the arrow next to the contacts list name in the upper left corner, and then select Fax Speed Dials.

3. Select the Add Contact icon.

4. Type a name for the speed dial list or speed dial contact in the Display Name field, and then select the
Enter button.

5. Type a Fax Speed Dial number, or select Next Available.

6. Type a Fax Number for the contact, or, if creating a list, type numbers for all contacts in the list.

7.
Select the Close button to close the keypad, and then select Save or Done.

Add a number to an existing speed dial list

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Contacts.

2. Select the arrow next to the contact list name in the upper left corner, and then select Fax Speed Dials.

3. Select a speed dial list.

4. Select the Edit icon.

5. Select the Fax Numbers field and then type the number for the contact you want to add.

6. Close the keypad and select Done.

Search a speed dial list by name

NOTE: If you do not know the unique name of the speed dial, type a letter to select any portion of the list.
For example, to view speed-dial names that begin with the letter N, type the letter N. If no matching entries
exist, a message appears before the search shows the entry that is closest to the letter N.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Contacts.

2. Select the arrow next to the contact list name in the upper left corner, and then select Fax Speed Dials.

3. Select the Search icon.

4. Type the first letters of the speed dial name to search for. As matches are found, the list at the top of the
search screen is populated. If necessary, scroll to see all the entries, or type more letters to narrow the
search.

ENWW Copy, scan, and Digital Send (HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet) 123
 Delete a single number from a speed dial list

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Contacts.

2. Select the arrow next to the contact list name in the upper left corner, and then select Fax Speed Dials.

3. Select a speed dial list.

4. Select the Edit icon.

5. Select the number to delete and then select the “x” that appears at the end of the number.

6. Close the keypad and select Done.

Delete a speed dial list

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Contacts.

2. Select the arrow next to the contact list name in the upper left corner, and then select Fax Speed Dials.

3. Select a speed dial list.

4.
Select the Delete icon.

5. Select Delete on the confirmation prompt.

Create a fax printing schedule

Faxes print automatically upon receipt, but they can also be stored and printed on a schedule that you
determine. After you create the schedule, you can enable or disable the schedule as needed.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Settings.

2. Open the following menus:

● Fax

● Fax Receive Settings

● Fax Printing Schedule.

3. Under Incoming Fax Options, select Use Schedule.

4. Select New Event.

5. Select an option under Event Type.

● Begin Printing

● Begin Storing

6. Choose a time and the day. You can select multiple days.

7. Select Save. To add another event, repeat steps 4 – 6.

8. Select Done to enable the fax printing schedule.

124 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

Configure default options for fax receive jobs
NOTE: Default job option settings are shared across all fax methods; analog, LAN, and internet fax.

Configure any of the following settings:

Menu item Description

Notification The Notification setting controls when the fax call report is printed for incoming faxes.

Stamp Received Faxes The Stamp Received Faxes setting enables or disables stamping incoming faxes. The
stamp prints the date, time, phone number, and page number on each incoming page.

Fit to Page When selecting a page size to print a fax, the product determines the closest page size
that matches the intended size from sizes available in the product. If the fit-to-page
setting is enabled and the received image is larger than that page size, the product
attempts to scale the image to fit the page. If this setting is disabled, an incoming image
larger than the page splits across pages.

Paper Selection Use the Paper Selection feature to specify which tray to use for printing faxes.

Sides Use the Sides feature to specify 1–sided or 2–sided output for faxes.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Settings.

2. Open the following menus:

● Fax

● Fax Receive Settings

● Default Job Options

Configure any of the following settings:

Menu item Description

Notification The Notification setting controls when the fax call report is printed for incoming faxes.

Stamp Received Faxes The Stamp Received Faxes setting enables or disables stamping incoming faxes. The
stamp prints the date, time, phone number, and page number on each incoming page.

Fit to Page When selecting a page size to print a fax, the product determines the closest page size
that matches the intended size from sizes available in the product. If the fit-to-page
setting is enabled and the received image is larger than that page size, the product
attempts to scale the image to fit the page. If this setting is disabled, an incoming image
larger than the page splits across pages.

Paper Tray Use the Paper Tray feature to specify which tray to use for printing faxes.

Output Sides Use the Output Sides feature to specify 1–sided or 2–sided output for faxes.

Configure fax billing codes

The billing-code setting, when enabled, prompts the user to enter a number when sending a fax. This number
is placed in the billing-code report. To view the billing-code report, either print the report or query it by using
an application.

Billing codes are disabled by default. Follow these steps to enable billing codes:

ENWW Copy, scan, and Digital Send (HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet) 125
 1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Settings.

2. Open the following menus:

● Fax

● Fax Send Settings

● Billing Code Settings

3. Select the Enable Billing Codes option to enable billing codes.

NOTE: To disable billing codes, deselect the Enable Billing Codes option, select Done, and then skip the
remaining steps.

To allow users to edit billing codes, select the Edit Billing Codes box.

4. Select the Minimum Length field to open the keypad.

5. Type the minimum number of digits that you want in the billing code.

6. Select the Default Billing Code field to open the keypad.

7. Enter the billing code and then select the Enter button.

8. Select Done.

Fax error messages on the printer control panel

Overview

If the fax process is interrupted or an error occurs during a fax transmission or reception, a two-part status/
error description is generated by the fax subsystem on the printer. Normal or successful faxes also generate
messages indicating success. The message information consists of a text description and a numeric code (a
few messages do not include numeric codes). Only the text part of the message is displayed on the printer
control panel; however, both the text message and numeric code are listed in the Fax Activity Report, Fax Call
Report, and the Fax T.30 Trace. The numeric code is shown in parentheses after the text part of the message
in the reports.

The fax modem generates the numeric code. Usually a numeric code of (0) indicates a normal modem
response. Some messages always display a numeric code of (0), other messages can have a range of numeric
codes, and a few messages have no numeric code. Usually a numeric code of (0) indicates an error was not
associated with the fax modem, but occurred in another part of the fax system or other printer system such
as the printing system. Non-zero error codes give further detail into the particular action or process that the
modem is executing, and they do not necessarily indicate that there is a problem with the modem.

Persistent error messages with numeric codes different than those listed here require assistance of customer
support. Print a Fax T.30 Trace report before contacting customer support to help identify the problem. This
report contains details of the last fax call.

Follow these steps to print a report that contains the numeric fax error code, description, and action to take.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Support Tools.

2. Open the following menus:

126 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

 ● Troubleshooting

● Fax Tools

3. Select Fax T.30 Trace Report, and then select Print Now.

ENWW Copy, scan, and Digital Send (HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet) 127
 Fax send messages

Message Error No. Description Action

Cancelled 0 Someone cancelled the fax at the None.

printer control panel.

Success n/a The fax was sent successfully. None.

Fail Busy 0 The receiving fax machine is busy. The fax will be retired
automatically (if configured),
otherwise try resending fax later.

No Answer 0 or 17 The receiving fax machine is not The receiving fax machine might
answering the call, or a person be disconnected or turned off;
answered the call. contact the receiver to check the
machine. Try resending.

No Dial 0 No dial tone is detected when Verify the phone line is active; set
sending the fax. the sending fax to "not" to detect a
dial tone.

Failed Any The fax might be corrupted or not Try resending fax.
sent.

Failed 0 Incompatible page width, or page Try resending fax; if the error
had too many bad lines. persists, contact service.

Failed 17 or 36 Lost telephone connection Try resending the fax.

between sender and receiver. The
issue might be due to voice calls
interrupting the fax, or a person
answering the call.

Failed or Communication Error Any besides 17 or 36 General communications issue Try resending fax; if the error
where the fax transmission was persists, contact support.
interrupted or did not proceed as
expected.

Space Fail 0 Unable to read or write the fax Try resending fax; if the error
image file to disk; could be corrupt persists, contact support.
printer disk or no space available
on the printer's disk.

Memory Error 0 Out of memory on the printer. If the error persists, delete items
from the printer memory, such as
stored jobs or saved faxes.

Power Failure 0 A power failure occurred on the Try resending the fax.
sending fax printer during the fax
transmission.

128 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

Fax receive messages

Message Error No. Description Action

Success n/a The fax transmission was None.

successful.

Blocked n/a The receiving fax machine is using None.

the blocked-number feature and is
blocking this fax.

Failed Any The fax might be corrupted or not Ask the sender to resend the fax; if
sent. the error persists, contact support.

Failed 0 Incompatible page width or page Ask the sender to resend the fax; if
had too many bad lines. the error persists, contact support.

Failed 17, 36 Lost telephone connection or Ask the sender to resend the fax (if
interruption between sender/ the sending machine does not
receiver. automatically retry).

Failed Any besides 17 or 36 General communications issue Ask the sender to resend the fax; if
where the fax transmission was the error persists, contact support.
interrupted or did not proceed as
expected.

Space Fail 0 Unable to read or write image file Ask the sender to resend the fax; if
to disk; could be corrupt printer the error persists, contact support.
disk or no space on disk.

Memory Error 0 Out of memory on the printer. If the error persists, delete items
from the printer memory, such as
stored jobs or saved faxes.

Print Fail 0 The received image file cannot be Ask the sender to resend the fax;
decoded. enable Error Correction Mode if it is
not already enabled.

Power Failure 0 A power failure occurred during the Ask the sender to resend the fax.
fax reception.

No Fax Detected 17, 36 A voice call was made to the fax. None

General fax problems

Overview

The following are some common fax problems.

The fax failed to send

JBIG is enabled, and the receiving fax machine does not have JBIG capability.

Turn off the JBIG setting.

An Out of Memory status message displays on the printer control panel

The printer storage disk is full. Delete some stored jobs from the disk.

ENWW Copy, scan, and Digital Send (HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet) 129
 1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Print, and then select Print from Job Storage.

2. From the Job Folders list, select the folder in which the document is saved, and then select the
document.

3.
Select the Delete icon .

Print quality of a photo is poor or prints as a gray box

You are using the wrong page-content setting or the wrong resolution setting.

Try setting the Optimize Text/Picture option to Photograph setting.

You selected the Stop button to cancel a fax, but the fax was still sent

If the job is too far along in the sending process, you cannot cancel the job.

This is normal operation.

No fax address book button displays

The fax address book feature has not been enabled.

Use the HP MFP Digital Sending Software Configuration utility to enable the fax address book feature.

Not able to locate the Fax settings in HP Web Jetadmin

Fax settings in HP Web Jetadmin are located under the device's status page drop-down menu.

Select Digital Sending and Fax from the drop-down menu.

The header is appended to the top of the page when the overlay option is enabled

For all forwarded faxes, the printer appends the overlay header to the top of a page.

This is normal operation.

A mix of names and numbers is in the recipients box

Names and numbers can both display, depending on where they are from. The fax address book lists names,
and all other databases list numbers.

This is normal operation.

A one-page fax prints as two pages

The fax header is being appended to the top of the fax, pushing text to a second page.

To print a one page fax on one page, set the overlay header to overlay mode, or adjust the fit-to-page setting.

A document stops in the document feeder in the middle of faxing

A jam is in the document feeder.

Clear the jam, and send the fax again.

130 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

The volume for sounds coming from the fax accessory is too high or too low

The volume setting needs to be adjusted.

Adjust the volume in the Fax Send Settings menu and the Fax Receive Settings menu.

ENWW Copy, scan, and Digital Send (HP LaserJet and Color LaserJet) 131
 Home Screen Customization
Administrators can arrange items on the Home screen to their desired specifications. Drag and drop app icons
to a new location on a page, or to a different page. Create folders to store similar items. To remove items from
the Home screen, drag them to the “Hidden Items” screen.

NOTE: An administrator password is required, or the access control restrictions must be removed to allow
users to change the homescreen wallpaper.

132 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

Security features
Security features overview
The printer supports security standards and recommended protocols that help keep the printer secure,
protect critical information on the network, and monitor and maintain the printer.

Certain features can be enabled, disabled, or restricted by the printer administrator. As an example,
permissions might be set so that all users can make copies, but only users who enter a pre-assigned access
code can send a fax.

Access to the administration functions can also be restricted. Data and job information can be encrypted,
stored and securely erased. The formatter cage can also be secured.

For in-depth information about HP's secure imaging and printing solutions, visit http://
h20195.www2.hp.com/V2/GetPDF.aspx/4AA4-2459ENW.pdf.

Manage security settings

Manage security settings overview
While some security features can be enabled or disabled through the control panel, making the changes using
the EWS is the preferred method because the EWS has a more complete set of controls. Access to the EWS can
be restricted so only administrators have access to the security features and other printer-configuration
tools.

The EWS works when the printer is connected to an IP-based network. The EWS does not support IPX-based
printer connections. Internet access is not required to open and use the EWS.

When the printer is connected to the network, the HP Embedded Web Server is automatically available.

Type the printer IP address or Bonjour name (if Bonjour is enabled) in the address/URL field of a Web browser
to open the EWS.

The security settings are included on the Security and Network tabs.

NOTE: If an administrator account has been set up, the Security and Network tabs are only available to an
administrator.

Security statements
The printer supports security standards and recommended protocols that help keep the printer secure,
protect critical network information, and simplify printer monitoring and maintenance.

For in-depth information about HP's secure imaging and printing solutions, visit www.hp.com/go/
secureprinting. The site provides links to white papers and FAQ documents about security features.

IP Security
IP Security (IPsec) is a set of protocols that control IP-based network traffic to and from the printer. IPsec
provides host-to-host authentication, data integrity, and encryption of network communications.

For printers that are connected to the network and have an HP Jetdirect print server, configure IPsec by using
the Networking tab in the HP Embedded Web Server.

ENWW Security features 133

 Assign a system password
Assign an administrator password for access to the printer and the HP Embedded Web Server so that
unauthorized users cannot change the printer settings.

1. Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS):

a.
From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Network button to display the
IP address or host name.

b. Open a Web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it
displays on the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS
opens.

2. Click the Security tab.

3. Open the General Security menu.

4. In the Username field, enter the name to associate with the password.

5. Enter the password in the New Password field, and then enter it again in the Verify Password field.

NOTE: When changing a password, users must first enter the current password in the Old Password
field.

6. Click the Apply button. Make note of the new password and store it in a safe place.

Encryption support: HP High Performance Secure Hard Disks

The hard disk provides hardware-based encryption for securely storing sensitive data without impacting
printer performance. This hard disk uses the latest Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) and has versatile
time-saving features and robust functionality.

Use the Security menu in the HP Embedded Web Server to configure the disk.

Enhanced security features

Data and network security

Data and network security are important to HP and to customers. Security enhancements are included in
service packs and major releases. Some enhanced security features include:

● HP Jetdirect networking provides a firewall that prevents network attacks from reaching the Windows
CE OS.

● USB storage accessories cannot execute any programs. This provides:

◦ Code- and data-integrity checking to identify any modified code or changes to security
configuration data.

◦ Security event logging and auditing, which can be used to audit security related activities or to
detect attacks.

134 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

 Host USB ports can be disabled, or restricted to only authorized users (USB ports are disabled by
default).

● Potentially vulnerable Windows services such as Remote Desktop Services (RDP) and Explorer are
disabled or removed from the Windows CE OS.

● Virus vectors are blocked. No incoming email or arbitrary Web browsing is allowed.

● Encrypted hard disk drives are available for select products. .

● Secure disk erase features are enhanced.

Feature operation

The HP SureStart, Whitelisting and Runtime Intrusion Detection features are firmware based and do not
require any external dependencies. There are no configuration options and the features are always on by
default. This is by design to prevent disabling of the features by an attacker as part of an advanced multi-
stage attack or exploit.

HP SureStart

The printer’s BIOS is a set of boot instructions to initiate hardware components and load the HP FutureSmart
firmware. HP SureStart validates the integrity of the BIOS image using a SHA-256 hash signed with HP’s
digital signature. If validation of the primary BIOS image fails, a protected "Golden Copy" is used to boot the
device providing a self-healing capability.

HP SureStart is dependent on a hardware component and is only available on devices introducing Spring 2015
and later.

Whitelisting

Whitelisting validates the integrity of firmware system files during the load process using a SHA-256 hash
signed with HP’s digital signature. If validation fails the device reboots and holds at the preboot menu to
prevent a potential malware exploit from executing.

Digital signatures for HP and 3rd party developed solutions residing on the printing device are validated using
a SHA-256 hashing algorithm for HP firmware and a SHA1/256 hash for 3rd party firmware. If validation fails
during the load of HP firmware, the device will reboot. If validation fails during the load of 3rd Party solution
firmware, the firmware will not be loaded to prevent a malware exploit.

Runtime Intrusion Detection

Intrusion Detection detects potential malware intrusions in system memory. Firmware runs in the background
to validate the memory space and reboots the device if a possible intrusion is detected. If the Auto-recover
feature is disabled, or a possible intrusion occurs twice within 30 minutes, the device reboots and holds at the
preboot menu to prevent a potential malware exploit from executing. The device will attempt to wait until in
process print jobs have been cancelled to reboot.

Feature availability

These features are available with the FutureSmart Bundle Version 3.7 and later. If present, the features are
listed in the device configuration page in the Security Section.

Security tab
1. General Security— Set passwords, restrict access to the EWS, and manage USB settings.

2. Access Control — Manage users, groups, and control access to certain printer features.

ENWW Security features 135

 3. Protect Stored Data — Manage HDD encryption settings, job storage, and job deletion settings.

4. Certificate Management — Install, delete, and validate security certificates.

5. Self Test — Run tests to verify security settings, check data security, and check code integrity.

Networking tab
1. Settings — Review the status of network security settings and configure security settings using the
HP Jetdirect Security Configuration Wizard.

2. Authorization — Manage the administrator password, network security certificates, and set up the
network Access Control List (ACL).

3. Management Protocols — Set up encrypted communications, configure SNMP settings, and manage
other network protocols and services.

4. 802.1X Authentication — Enable and configure 802.1X authentication protocols.

5. IPsec/Firewall — Enable secure IP network communications.

6. Announcement Agent— Enable remote configuration using a Configuration Server such as an

HP Imaging & Printing Security Center.

136 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

Access control
Enable and configure sign-in methods
Enabled sign-in methods can be used to sign in at the product. If relating product permissions to network
users or groups, make sure to use a sign-in method that matches what people usually use to sign in at a
computer.

Sign-in method Description

Local device Local accounts have access codes between 4 and 8 digits long.
Accounts are stored on the product hard disk.

LDAP Authenticate using an LDAP directory server. A user name and

password will be requested.

Windows Windows domain, user name, and password will be requested.

Device User Accounts

Administrators can set up Device User Accounts if the system is not using network users and groups. When
using Device User Accounts, people will sign in at the product using an Access Code. A Permission Set is
assigned to each account.

Data and file security

Data and file security overview
There are several methods for protecting data stored on the hard disk and sent to or from the printer. Data on
the HP High-Performance Hard Disk (Encrypted HDD or HDD) can be encrypted so that information on the
hard disk cannot be accessed if the drive is removed from the printer. The printer also supports two levels of
securely erasing saved jobs and temporary files created as a result of processing jobs. Data sent to and from
the printer can also be encrypted.

Control access to the printer and protect stored jobs by requiring that an access code be entered prior to
saving or retrieving the job from the printer.

NOTE: Additional information can be found in the access control and print tasks sections of this course.

Encryption support: HP High-Performance Secure Hard Disks

The hard disk provides hardware-based encryption to securely store sensitive data without impacting printer
performance. This hard disk uses the latest Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) and has versatile time-
saving features and robust functionality.

Bundles primarily targeted to the government of the United States of America come equipped with HDDs that
comply with the Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) 140 cryptographic standards.

NOTE: The consumer version and FIPS 140 version of the HDDs are not interchangeable.

Use the Security menu in the HP Embedded Web Server to configure the disk.

With an encrypted drive, the data on the drive is not accessible if removed from the device.

For more information about the encrypted hard disk, see the HP High-Performance Secure Hard Disk Setup
Guide.

ENWW Security features 137

 1. Go to www.hp.com/support.

2. Enter Secure Hard Disk into the search field and press Enter.

3. Click the HP High-Performance Secure Hard Disk Drive link.

4. Click the Manuals link.

Protect stored data

There are several methods to protect data stored on the device hard drives. One of the best solutions is to
purchase a device with an encrypted drive or upgrade if the option is available. With an encrypted drive, the
data on the drive is not accessible if removed from the device. Erase Job Data should be performed prior to
donating, recycling, or transferring ownership of this device. To ensure print or scan job images are not
retained on the hard drive until overwritten by another job, select a secure file erase mode in the Managing
Temporary Files section.

Lock the formatter cage

The formatter cage has a slot to attach a locking security cable. Locking the formatter cage prevents
someone from removing valuable components from the formatter.

NOTE: A locking cable such as the HP Keyed Cable Lock or any lock compatible with a security slot is
required.

138 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

Customer self-repair (CSR) parts and supplies
CSR parts and supplies overview
The CSR level indicates the expected difficulty the customer will experience when removing and replacing an
assembly. The CSR A assemblies in this section are easy for the customer to remove and replace. The CSR B
assemblies in this section might be difficult for the customer to remove and replace.

Installation guides are included with all CSR kits.

The list of CSR parts, installation guides, and the videos shown in this section are available to customers on
the printer support page, the SML, and on www.HP.com/support.

ENWW Customer self-repair (CSR) parts and supplies 139

 Tray 2 HCI
1. Pull the tray out until it stops.

Figure 3-8 Pull the tray out

2. Lift the front of the tray, and then pull it out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 3-9 Remove the tray

3. Unpack the replacement assembly from the packaging.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective assembly.

140 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

 4. With the front of the tray slightly lifted, align the sides of the tray with the rails in the printer, and then
carefully slide the tray into the printer.

TIP: As the tray slides into the printer, lower the front of it.

Figure 3-10 Install the tray

5. Close the tray.

Figure 3-11 Close the tray

ENWW Customer self-repair (CSR) parts and supplies 141

 Toner cartridges
1. Open the front door.

Figure 3-12 Open the front door

2. On color models, grasp the handle of the used toner cartridge and pull out to remove it. On black and
white models, push down on the blue handle to release the cartridge and then remove it.

Figure 3-13 Remove the toner cartridge

142 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

 3. Remove the new toner cartridge from its protective shell by tearing off the plastic strip and opening the
package. Save all packaging for recycling the used toner cartridge.

www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

CAUTION: If toner gets on clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water.
Hot water sets toner into fabric.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective assembly.

Figure 3-14 Recycle and unpack

4. Hold both ends of the toner cartridge and rock it 5-6 times.

Figure 3-15 Rock the toner cartridge

ENWW Customer self-repair (CSR) parts and supplies 143

 5. Remove the protective shield from the toner cartridge.

Figure 3-16 Remove the protective shield

6. Support the toner cartridge underneath with one hand while holding the cartridge handle with the other.
Align the toner cartridge with its slot on the shelf, and then insert the toner cartridge into the printer.

Figure 3-17 Install a toner cartridge

144 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

 7. Close the front door.

Figure 3-18 Close the front door

ENWW Customer self-repair (CSR) parts and supplies 145

 Toner collection unit (mono)

146 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

Toner collection unit (color)

Staples
Replace the staple cartridge in the stapler stacker area

Replace the staple cartridge in the stapler stacker area

1. Open the booklet maker door.

2. Rotate the knob counterclockwise to move the staple cartridge assembly all the way to the front.

3. Hold the knob to immobilize the staple cartridge assembly, and then pull the tab down to remove the
staple cartridge.

4. Lift two tabs on the staple cartridge, and then lift up to remove the empty staple cartridge from the
staple cartridge carriage assembly.

IMPORTANT: Do not discard the empty staple cartridge carriage. It must be reused with the new staple
cartridge assembly.

5. Insert the new staple cartridge in to the staple cartridge carriage.

6. Immobilize the green gear, and then install the staple cartridge carriage assembly.

7. Rotate the gear clockwise to move the staple cartridge carriage assembly into position.

8. Close the booklet maker door.

Replace the staple cartridges in the booklet maker area

Replace the staple cartridges in the booklet maker area

1. Open the booklet maker door.

ENWW Customer self-repair (CSR) parts and supplies 147

 2. Pull out the booklet maker assembly until it stops.

3. Pull the tab down, and then remove the staple cartridge.

4. Pinch the blue tabs, and then rotate the top of the staple cartridge carriage assembly away from the
staple cartridge.

IMPORTANT: Do not discard the empty staple cartridge carriage. It must be reused with the new staple
cartridge assembly.

5. Lift two tabs on the staple cartridge, and then lift up to remove the empty staple cartridge from the
staple cartridge carriage assembly.

6. Insert the new staple cartridge in to the staple cartridge carriage assembly.

7. Rotate the top of the staple cartridge carriage assembly until it clicks into place.

8. Reinstall the staple cartridge carriage assembly into the booklet maker.

9. Slide the booklet maker assembly into the finisher assembly.

10. Close the booklet maker door.

Replace the inner finisher staple cartridge

Replace the inner finisher staple cartridge

1. Open the staple cartridge access door.

2. Rotate the staple cartridge handle down, and then remove the staple cartridge.

3. Lift two tabs on the staple cartridge, and then lift up to remove the empty staple cartridge from the
staple cartridge carriage assembly.

IMPORTANT: Do not discard the empty staple cartridge carriage. It must be reused with the new staple
cartridge assembly.

Reinstallation tip:

● Add recycle and unpack step for video purposes here

● Insert the new staple cartridge in to the staple cartridge carriage.

● Install the staple cartridge carriage assembly.

148 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

 4.

5. Close the staple cartridge access door.

Replace the high-volume finisher staple cartridge

Replace the staple cartridge

1. Open the booklet maker door.

2. Rotate the knob counterclockwise to move the staple cartridge assembly all the way to the front.

3. Hold the knob to immobilize the staple cartridge assembly, and then pull the tab down to remove the
staple cartridge.

4. Lift two tabs on the staple cartridge, and then lift up to remove the empty staple cartridge from the
staple cartridge carriage assembly.

IMPORTANT: Do not discard the empty staple cartridge carriage. It must be reused with the new staple
cartridge assembly.

5. Insert the new staple cartridge in to the staple cartridge carriage.

6. Immobilize the green gear, and then install the staple cartridge carriage assembly.

7. Rotate the gear clockwise to move the staple cartridge carriage assembly into position.

8. Close the booklet maker door.

ENWW Customer self-repair (CSR) parts and supplies 149

 Clear paper jams
Paper jam locations

1 Tray 1

2 Tray 2

3 Tray 3

13.A1 tray 1 paper jam

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the Tray 1. When a jam
occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

● 13.A1.XX Jam in tray 1

150 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

1. Gently remove the jammed paper.

2. Open and then close the front door to resume

printing.

13.A2, 13.A3 tray 2, tray 3 paper jam

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to Tray 2 or Tray 3. When a
jam occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

● 13.A2.XX Jam in tray 2

● 13.A3.XX Jam in tray 3

CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it.

NOTE: The procedure to clear a paper jam in Tray 3 is the same as for Tray 2. Only Tray 2 is shown here.

ENWW Clear paper jams 151

 1. Open the right door.

2. Gently remove any jammed paper.

152 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

3. Close the right door.

4. Open the tray.

ENWW Clear paper jams 153

 5. Gently remove any jammed paper.

6. Close the tray. Printing automatically resumes.

154 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

Solve wired network problems
Overview
Check the following items to verify that the product is communicating with the network. Before beginning,
print a configuration page from the product control panel and locate the product IP address that is listed on
this page.

● Poor physical connection

● The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the product

● The computer is unable to communicate with the product

● The product is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network

● New software programs might be causing compatibility problems

● The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly

● The product is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect

NOTE: HP does not support peer-to-peer networking, as the feature is a function of Microsoft operating
systems and not of the HP print drivers. For more information, go to Microsoft at www.microsoft.com.

Poor physical connection

1. Verify that the product is attached to the correct network port using a cable of the correct length.

2. Verify that cable connections are secure.

3. Look at the network port connection on the back of the product, and verify that the amber activity light
and the green link-status light are lit.

4. If the problem continues, try a different cable or port on the hub.

The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the product

1. Open the printer properties and click the Ports tab. Verify that the current IP address for the product is
selected. The product IP address is listed on the product configuration page.

2. If you installed the product using the HP standard TCP/IP port, select the box labeled Always print to
this printer, even if its IP address changes.

3. If you installed the product using a Microsoft standard TCP/IP port, use the hostname instead of the IP
address.

4. If the IP address is correct, delete the product and then add it again.

The computer is unable to communicate with the product

1. Test network communication by pinging the network.

ENWW Solve wired network problems 155

 a. Open a command-line prompt on your computer. For Windows, click Start, click Run, type cmd, and
then press Enter.

b. Type ping followed by the IP address for your product.

For Mac OS X, open the Network Utility, and then supply the IP address in the correct field in the
Ping pane.

c. If the window displays round-trip times, the network is working.

2. If the ping command failed, verify that the network hubs are on, and then verify that the network
settings, the product, and the computer are all configured for the same network.

The product is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network
HP recommends leaving these settings in automatic mode (the default setting). If you change these settings,
you must also change them for your network.

New software programs might be causing compatibility problems

Verify that any new software programs are correctly installed and that they use the correct print driver.

The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly

1. Check the network drivers, print drivers, and the network redirection settings.

2. Verify that the operating system is configured correctly.

The product is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect

1. Review the configuration page to check the status of the network protocol. Enable it if necessary.

2. Reconfigure the network settings if necessary.

156 Chapter 3 Use and maintain ENWW

4 Support

ENWW 157
 Student performance objectives
Support

This module provides information to help Support and Service personnel diagnose and resolve issues when
assisting customers or troubleshooting problems. The module also includes an overview of the operation of
major hardware components.

Some information common with other HP LaserJet printers is included. Additional printer-specific information
is available in the printer Troubleshooting manual and Repair manual. Information about how HP LaserJet
printers function can be found in the HP LaserJet fundamentals courses available on Grow@HP and The
Learning Center (TLC).

See the Troubleshooting manual for additional information and complete troubleshooting procedures.

Additional resources include:

● Services Access Workbench (SAW) — Available to agents with HP NT logins

● Channel Services Network (CSN) — Available to HP channel partners

● Product Service Manuals

● The printer-specific support site

● www.hp.com/support

Select the appropriate country/region, select Troubleshooting, and then enter the printer number for
guided troubleshooting, videos, and additional information. The content on www.hp.com/support is
available to customers.

● Grow@HP

Search Grow@HP for:

◦ Additional resources for both printers.

◦ NFC training material.

◦ HP ePrint training material.

◦ Information about additional related printers and features.

The module is organized in three sections:

Firmware

By the completion of the Firmware section, learners should be able to:

● Generate Debug Data using the printer EWS

● Reset printer firmware using the EWS

● Access and use the Pre-boot menu

158 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 Hardware

By the completion of the Hardware chapter, learners should be able to understand the basic theory of
operation and identify the major components of the following:

● Control-panel assembly

● Toner cartridges

● Print engine

● Input accessories

Troubleshooting

By the completion of the Troubleshooting section, learners should be able to:

● List the troubleshooting resources available to customers

● List the troubleshooting resources available to Support and Service agents

● Describe the capabilities available in the Troubleshooting menu

● Understand the available diagnostic tests

NOTE: Many part names remain in English only to match the names used in the Service Manuals and when
ordering replacement parts.

NOTE: SAW and CSN provide the most up-to-date service and troubleshooting documents, and should be
checked first when assessing an issue. Customers do not have access to SAW or CSN.

ENWW Student performance objectives 159

 Software
Software troubleshooting overview
There are three primary Windows print drivers available for these printers:

● Discrete print driver

● HP Universal Print Driver

● Windows in-OS print driver

The discrete driver is included on the in-box CD and is available on the printer support site.

The printers require HP UPD version 5.8 or greater. Earlier versions of the UPD do not support the output
accessories and other advanced features. Download the latest version at www.hp.com/go/upd.

The HP PCL 6 driver is installed for Windows operating systems along with other optional software. Mac
computers and Apple mobile devices are supported with this printer. The Mac print driver and print utility are
available for download from hp.com and may also be available via Apple Software Update. The HP Mac
software is not included in the in-box CD. The CD provides steps to download the Mac installer software from
hp.com.

NOTE: Windows tablets, phones and other devices that use ARM processors use in-OS drivers.

The discrete print driver and UPD are compatible with the HP Driver Deployment Utility (DDU) and the
HP Driver Preconfiguration Utility. Download both utilities and additional resources at www.hp.com/go/dcu.
Select the appropriate operating system from the list, and then download the HP Printer Administrator
Resource Kit (PARK).

Macintosh print drivers and utilities are on the printer support page. Customers using Macintosh computers
that do not have a CD/DVD drive can download the software from the printer support site.

See the Tour the printer module of this course for more information about supported print drivers and
operating systems, including mobile printing options.

Troubleshooting
The printers require either the printer-specific print driver (Windows and Mac OS X) or version UPD 5.8 or
greater of the HP Universal Print Driver. Earlier versions of the UPD do not recognize installed output
accessories. Check to make sure the proper print driver is installed if the printer cannot use an output
accessory.

Standard troubleshooting procedures apply if the proper print driver is installed.

See the printer support site for additional troubleshooting procedures.

To check the installed print driver:

1. Open the Devices and Printers control panel.

2. Right-click the printer icon.

3. Select Printer properties from the pop-up menu. The properties window displays.

4. Click the Advanced tab.

5. Verify that the proper print driver is displayed in the Driver area.

160 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 6. If the installed print driver is not correct, select the proper print driver from the drop-down menu or click
New Driver... to install the new print driver.

7. If necessary, install the print driver from the in-box CD, or download the print driver from the printer
support site or www.hp.com.go.upd.

Check the installed print driver

ENWW Software 161

 Firmware
Generate Debug Data from the EWS
HP FutureSmart 4-enabled products can generate debug data from the EWS. This new feature saves the ring
buffer data file in a .jdp log.

The debug data can be exported as a device data file or a zipped debug information file.

NOTE: This feature is only available to administrators. An administrator password must be set in the
Security tab of the EWS.

To use the Generate Debug Data feature:

1. Open the EWS by typing the product IP address or other network name in the address field of a Web
browser.

2. Click the Sign In link in the upper-right of the EWS window and sign in with the administrator password.

3. Click the Troubleshooting tab.

4. Select the Diagnostic Data option from the left-hand column.

5. Click the Start button in the Generate Debug Data area. A confirmation message displays when the data
is complete.

6. Select Create device data file or Create zipped debug information file in the Retrieve Diagnostic Data
area.

7. Click the Export button. A window displays, presenting the option to open or save the file. Select the
desired choice.

Reset firmware from within the EWS

Administrators can remotely perform a Partial Clean firmware reset from within the EWS.

This feature is critical for solution providers managing a remote product. The remote Partial Clean allows a
service provider to remove a solution for a product without requiring a technician to be at the product to enter
the Pre-boot menu.

NOTE: This feature is only available to administrators. An administrator password must be set in the
Security tab of the EWS.

To reset HP FutureSmart from the EWS:

1. Open a Web-browser window and enter the product IP address or network name in the address field to
open the EWS.

2. Click the Sign In link in the upper-right of the EWS window and sign in with the administrator password.

3. Click the General tab

4. Select Reset Factory Settings from the left-hand column.

5. Click the Reset button in the Reset Firmware area.

6. The product will reboot and perform the Partial Clean process during startup.

162 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

Pre-boot menu
Overview
The Pre-boot menu is designed for product administrators and HP service personnel.

The Pre-boot menu offers three primary functions that service personnel might need to access:

● Downloading firmware

● Resets

● Diagnostics

Other functionality in the Pre-boot menu is for administrator use or for use in the manufacturing process at
the factory.

The following three pages describe how the Pre-boot menu works on the following types of control panels:

● SVGA touchscreen control panel

● Half-VGA touchscreen control panel

● Four-line graphical display control panel

SVGA touchscreen control panel

SVGA touchscreen control panel

Pre-boot menu on a SVGA touchscreen control panel. Use the navigation buttons on the right-hand side of the
touchscreen to navigate through the menu and to select menu items.

Half-VGA control panel

Half-VGA control panel

Pre-boot menu on a half-VGA control panel. Use the physical buttons on the control-panel assembly to
navigate through the menu and to select menu items.

Four-line graphical display control panel

Four-line graphical display control panel

Pre-boot menu on a single-function product control panel. Use the physical buttons on the control-panel
assembly to navigate through the menu and to select menu items. The navigation method is that same for
products that include a keypad on the control-panel assembly.

Pre-boot menu options

Overview

Click the links below to for information about the following Pre-boot menus:

Continue

Sign in

Administrator

ENWW Firmware 163

 Service Tools

Continue

This selection exits the Pre-boot menu and continues with the boot process. Use it to boot the product after
selecting options or changing configurations.

Sign In

There are two roles available in the Pre-boot menu:

● Administrator

An administrator password is not required to access Pre-boot menu options.

● Service Tools

The PIN to access the Service Tools menus is the same as the Service Access Code in the standard
control-panel Service menu.

Administrator

The Administrator menu contains the following features available to service personnel.

● Download – Use option #3, USB Thumbdrive to install firmware. Options 1 and 2 are for factory use only.

● Format Disk – Completely erases the hard drive. Requires that firmware be reloaded.

● Partial Clean – Removes all data and customer settings from the disk and restores the OS and firmware
during the boot process.

● Change Password – Resets the administrator password.

● Clear Password – Clears the administrator password. Not to be confused with the Clear Disk Pass
feature in the Manage Disk menu.

● Manage Disk – Clear the disk password, lock, unlock, or erase the disk, and perform other disk-related
functions. Options that are unavailable for the current configuration are grayed-out.

● Configure LAN – Configure the product to use DHCP or assign a static IP address during the Pre-boot
process. Changes made here do not effect the network settings options made in the Administration
menu

● Startup Options – Enable or disable options during the boot process. Cold Reset and Lock Service Menu
are in this menu.

● Diagnostics – Run tests on product components such as memory and the ICB.

● Remote Admin – Start or stop a Telnet session for remote access and administration.

● System Triage – Access to the Copy Logs function. Only use this function if the product will not boot to
Ready and an escalation engineer requests the diagnostic logs.

CAUTION: Discourage administrators from locking the service menu. If an administrator password is lost,
the service menu cannot be accessed, and the administrator password cannot be reset. This prevents all
access to the Pre-boot menu.

164 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

Service Tools

Service personnel should only access Service Tools to reset the administrative password when necessary.
Examples of when this might be required include:

● If the administrator has forgotten the password.

● If the administrator has left the company.

Remember, this can only be done if the administrator has not locked service.

CAUTION: Do not use the Subsystems menu.

These settings are specific to the manufacturing process at the factory and can cause problems if a service
person tries to use the settings.

There is nothing in the Subsystems menu that a service person would ever need to use.

Access and navigate the Pre-boot menu

Overview

The following four pages show how to access the Pre-boot menu and perform a Partial Clean on the following
control panels:

● SVGA touchscreen control panel

● Half-VGA touchscreen control panel

● Four-line graphical display control panel with two LEDs

● Four-line graphical display control panel with three LEDs

SVGA touchscreen control panel

Access the SVGA control panel pre-boot menu.

1. Turn on the printer.

2. The HP logo appears at the top of the screen while the touchscreen boots.

3. The first HP logo is replaced by another HP logo that appears in the middle of the screen.

4. Touch the HP logo in the middle of the screen when you see 1/8 under the logo.

NOTE: The 1/8 counter will only be displayed for one second. Touch the logo as soon as it appears, or
the product will continue with the boot process.

5. The Pre-boot menu appears on the screen.

6. Touch the up and down arrows to navigate to the desired menu item, and then touch the OK button to
select the item.

7. Change the desired setting or select the desired option, and then navigate to the Pre-boot menu Home
menu by touching the Back arrow or the Home button.

NOTE: The Partial Clean option is shown as an example only.

8. Highlight Continue, and then touch the OK button to exit the Pre-boot menu and boot the product.

ENWW Firmware 165

 Half-VGA touchscreen control panel

Access the Half-SVGA control panel pre-boot menu.

1. Turn on the printer.

2. Press the Stop button when the Ready, Data, and Attention LEDs are illuminated at the same time. The
Pre-boot menu and instructions for using the hardware buttons to navigate the menu appear on the
screen.

3. Press the 9 key to move the cursor down, the 3 key to move the cursor up, and the 6 key to select the
highlighted option. The 5 key returns back one level, and the # key is the Home button.

NOTE: Use the physical keys to navigate. The screen is not a touchscreen.

4. Change the desired setting or select the desired option, and then navigate to the Pre-boot menu Home
menu by touching the Back arrow or the Home button.

NOTE: The Partial Clean option is shown as an example only.

5. Highlight Continue, and then touch the OK button to exit the Pre-boot menu and boot the product.

Four-line graphical display control panel with two LEDs

Access the four-line graphical display control panel with two LEDs pre-boot menu.

1. Turn on the printer.

The control-panel display will remain dark, but the Ready and Attention LEDs will illuminate and stay on
for up to one minute, and then extinguish.

2. Press the Stop button when the Ready and Attention LEDs illuminate a second time, and the HP logo
displays above a counter that reads 1/8. The Pre-boot menu displays on the screen.

NOTE: The 1/8 counter will only be displayed for one second. Touch the logo as soon as it appears, or
the product will continue with the boot process.

3. Touch the up and down arrows to navigate to the desired menu item, and then touch the OK button to
select the item.

4. Change the desired setting or select the desired option, and then navigate to the Pre-boot menu Home
menu by touching the Back arrow or the Home button.

NOTE: The Partial Clean option is shown as an example only.

5. Highlight Continue, and then touch the OK button to exit the Pre-boot menu and boot the product.

Four-line graphical display control panel with three LEDs

Access the four-line graphical display control panel with three LEDs pre-boot menu.

1. Turn on the printer.

2. Press the Stop button when the Ready, Data, and Attention LEDs are illuminated at the same time. The
Pre-boot menu and instructions for using the hardware buttons to navigate the menu appear on the
screen.

3. Touch the up and down arrows to navigate to the desired menu item, and then touch the OK button to
select the item.

166 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 4. Change the desired setting or select the desired option, and then navigate to the Pre-boot menu Home
menu by touching the Back arrow or the Home button.

NOTE: The Partial Clean option is shown as an example only.

5. Highlight Continue, and then touch the OK button to exit the Pre-boot menu and boot the product.

Sign in to the Pre-boot menu

To sign in to the Pre-boot menu as service personnel:

1. Select Sign In, and then press OK.

2. Enter the Service Access Code, and then press OK.

NOTE: The Service Access Code can be found in the product-specific Service Manual.

Administrator password

If the administrator password has not been set, all menu items but Service Tools are accessible. To sign in as
an administrator, the password first needs to be set. The administrator password in the Pre-boot menu does
not need to be the same as the administrator password used in the standard control-panel menus.

NOTE: Pre-boot menu passwords are numeric-only.

Standard control-panel application passwords can be combinations of numbers and letters.

Service Tools password

The Pre-boot Service Access Code is the same as Service in the standard control-panel menus. To sign out of
the Pre-boot menu, turn the product off and then back on again, or select Continue to boot up to Ready.

What happens if an administrator has locked the product service menus?

If the Pre-boot Service Tools menu has been locked, service personnel receive a message on the control panel
that reads: Wrong password.

If service personnel receive this message after entering the correct service access code multiple times, check
with the product administrator to make sure the menu has not been locked.

CAUTION: Discourage administrators from locking the service menu. If an administrator password is lost,
the service menu cannot be accessed, and the administrator password cannot be reset. This prevents all
access to the Pre-boot menu.

ENWW Firmware 167

 Hardware
Service-level walkaround
Printer front view

1 2
3
17 4
16 5
6
7
15 8
9 10

12

13
14 11

1 Automatic document feeder cover (access for clearing jams)

2 Automatic document feeder width guides

3 Automatic document feeder input tray

4 Automatic document feeder output tray

5 Control panel with color touchscreen display (tilts up for easier viewing)

6 Physical keyboard (Flow models only). Pull the keyboard straight out to use it.

CAUTION: Close the keyboard when it is not in use.

7 Right door (access for clearing jams)

8 On/off button

9 Tray 1

10 Power switch

11 Power connection

12 Front door (access to the toner cartridges)

168 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 13 Tray 2

14 Tray 3

15 Output bin

16 Easy-access USB port

Insert a USB flash drive for printing or scanning without a computer or to update the printer firmware.

NOTE: An administrator must enable this port before use.

17 Hardware integration pocket (for connecting accessory and third-party devices)

Printer back view

1 Formatter cover

2 Interface ports

3 Serial number and product number label

ENWW Hardware 169

 Interface ports

1 USB port for connecting external USB devices

NOTE: For easy-access USB printing, use the USB port near the control panel.

2 Local area network (LAN) Ethernet network port

3 Hi-Speed USB 2.0 printing port

170 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

Control-panel view
NOTE: Tilt the control panel for easier viewing.

The Home screen provides access to the printer features and indicates the current status of the printer.

Return to the Home screen at any time by touching the Home button. Touch the Home button on
the left side of the printer control panel, or touch the Home button in the upper-left corner of most screens.

NOTE: The features that appear on the Home screen can vary, depending on the printer configuration.

2 3 4 5

6
1

1 Touch the Home button to return to the Home screen.

Home button

2 Reset button The Reset button returns the printer to default settings and is always present if users are not logged
in. The Reset button is not present when the Sign Out button is present. Touch the Reset button to
resume and release jobs from the previous pause state and interrupt mode, reset the quick copy
count in the copy count field, exit special modes, reset the display language and the keyboard
layout.

3 Sign In or Sign Out Touch the Sign In button to access secured features.
button
Touch the Sign Out button to sign out of the printer. The printer restores all options to the default
settings.

NOTE: This button displays only if the administrator has configured the printer to require
permission for access to features.

ENWW Hardware 171

 4 Touch the information button to access a screen that provides access to several types of printer
Information information. Touch the buttons at the bottom of the screen for the following information:
button ● Display Language: Change the language setting for the current user session.

● Sleep Mode: Place the printer into sleep mode.

● Wi-Fi Direct: View information for how to connect directly to the printer using a phone, tablet,
or other device with Wi-Fi.

● Wireless: View or change wireless connection settings (only when an optional wireless
accessory is installed).

● Ethernet: View or change Ethernet connection settings.

● HP Web Services: View information to connect and print to the printer using HP Web Services
(ePrint).

5 Touch the Help button to open the embedded help system.

Help button
The status line provides information about the overall printer status.

6 Applications area Touch any of the icons to open the application. Swipe the screen sideways to access more
applications.

NOTE: The available applications vary by printer. The administrator can configure which
applications appear and the order in which they appear.

7 Start Copy button Touch the Start Copy button to start a copy job.

8 Home-screen page Indicates the number of pages on the Home screen or in an application. The current page is
indicator highlighted. Swipe the screen sideways to scroll between pages.

Theory of operation
Product overview (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)

● Printing speed

◦ E87640

● Up to 40 ppm in A4/Letter

● Up to 21 ppm in A3

◦ E87650

● Up to 50 ppm in A4/Letter

● Up to 26 ppm in A3

◦ E87660

● Up to 60 ppm in A4/Letter

● Up to 31 ppm in A3

● Processor

◦ Quad Core 1.5 GHz

● Memory

172 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 ◦ 7 GB (3 GB Formatter + 4 GB)

● ADF

◦ Flow ADF

● H Model: E87640, E87650, E87660

● Control panel

◦ 8 inch touch screen

Product overview (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560)

● Printing speed

◦ E82540

● Up to 40 ppm in A4/Letter

● Up to 21 ppm in A3

◦ E82550

● Up to 50 ppm in A4/Letter

● Up to 26 ppm in A3

◦ E82560

● Up to 60 ppm in A4/Letter

● Up to 31 ppm in A3

● Processor

◦ Quad Core 1.5 GHz

● Memory

◦ 7 GB (3 GB Formatter + 4 GB)

● ADF

◦ Flow ADF

● H Model: E82540, E82550, E82560

● Control panel

◦ 8 inch touch screen

Feeding system

Feeding system overview

The feeding system picks up paper from the cassette or Tray 1 and moves it to the printing mechanism inside
the printer. The feeding system consists of the pickup unit, registration unit, transfer roller assembly, and exit
unit.

ENWW Hardware 173

174 Chapter 4 Support ENWW
Main components and functions

Rollers

Figure 4-1 Rollers (E87640, E87650, E87660 series)

1 Tray 2 13 Tray 4 transfer roller (optional)

2 Tray 3 14 Tray 4 transfer roller (optional)

3 Tray 4 (optional) 15 Tray 5 transfer roller (optional)

4 Tray 5 (optional) 16 Registration sensor

5 Tray 2 pickup/separation/transfer rollers 17 Registration roller

6 Tray 3 pickup/separation/transfer rollers 18 Transfer roller

7 Tray 4 pickup/separation/transfer rollers (optional) 19 Output roller (1st)

8 Tray 5 pickup/separation/transfer rollers (optional) 20 Output roller (2nd)

ENWW Hardware 175

 9 Tray 1 Tray pickup/separation/transfer rollers 21 Output roller (trans)

10 Tray 2 transfer roller 22 Duplex 1 roller

11 Tray 3 transfer roller 23 Duplex 2 roller

12 Tray 3 transfer roller 23 Duplex 3 roller

Figure 4-2 Rollers (E82540, E82550, E82560)

1 Tray 2 13 Tray 4 transfer roller (optional)

2 Tray 3 14 Tray 4 transfer roller (optional)

3 Tray 4 (optional) 15 Tray 5 transfer roller (optional)

176 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 4 Tray 5 (optional) 16 Registration sensor

5 Tray 2 pickup/separation/ 17 Registration roller

transfer rollers

6 Tray 3 pickup/separation/ 18 PTB unit

transfer rollers

7 Tray 4 pickup/separation/ 19 Output roller (1st)

transfer rollers (optional)

8 Tray 5 pickup/separation/ 20 Output roller (2nd)

transfer rollers (optional)

9 Tray 1 pickup/separation/ 21 Output roller (trans)

transfer rollers

10 Tray 2 transfer roller 22 Duplex 1 roller

11 Tray 3 transfer roller 23 Duplex 2 roller

12 Tray 3 transfer roller 23 Duplex 3 roller

● Pickup roller (Tray 2, 3, 4, 5, and Tray 1)

◦ This roller picks up the paper from the tray.

● Transport roller (Tray 2, 3, 4, 5, and Tray 1)

◦ This roller is placed against the separation roller. It transfers the paper from the pickup roller to the
paper path.

● Separation roller (Tray 2, 3, 4, 5, and Tray 1)

◦ This roller is placed against the transfer roller and transfers only one sheet of paper to the transfer
roller. When two or more sheets of paper are being transferred from the pickup roller, the load of
the torque limiter of the separation roller is heavier than the frictional force between the sheets of
paper. As a result, the separation roller is stopped and the lower sheet of paper is not transferred.

● Separation roller

◦ This roller transfers the paper sent from the feed/separation roller to the registration roller.

● Registration roller

◦ This roller aligns the leading edge of the paper and transfers the paper to the transfer roller
assembly.

Sensor, motor, solenoid

ENWW Hardware 177

 Figure 4-3 Sensor, motor, solenoid (E87640, E87650, E87660 series)

178 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 Figure 4-4 Sensor, motor, solenoid (E82540, E82550, E82560)

Table 4-1 Sensor, motor, solenoid

Item Function

Tray 2 paper size detection sensor Detects Tray 2 paper size

Tray 2 paper empty detection sensor Detects Tray 2 paper empty

Tray 2 upper limit detection sensor Detects Tray 2 upper limit

Tray 2 paper Lead Edge detection Detects Tray 2 paper Lead Edge
sensor

Tray 3 paper size detection sensor Detects Tray 3 paper size

Tray 3 paper empty detection sensor Detects Tray 3 paper empty

ENWW Hardware 179

 Table 4-1 Sensor, motor, solenoid (continued)

Item Function

Tray 3 upper limit detection sensor Detects Tray 3 upper limit

Tray 3 paper Lead Edge detection Detects Tray 3 paper Lead Edge
sensor

Tray 3 paper feed jam detection sensor Detects Tray 3 paper feed jam

Tray 4 paper size detection (option) Detects Tray 4 paper size

sensor

Tray 4 paper empty detection (option) Detects Tray 4 paper empty

sensor

Tray 4 upper limit detection (option) Detects Tray 4 upper limit

sensor

Tray 4 paper Lead Edge detection Detects Tray 4 paper Lead Edge
(option) sensor

Tray 4/4 paper feed jam detection Detects Tray 4/4 paper feed jam
(option) sensor

Tray 5 paper size detection (option) Detects Tray 5 paper size detection
sensor

Tray 5 paper empty detection (option) Detects Tray 5 paper empty

sensor

Tray 5 upper limit detection (option) Detects Tray 5 upper limit

sensor

Tray 5 paper Lead Edge detection Detects Tray 5 paper Lead Edge
(option) sensor

Paper registration jam detection Detects Paper registration jam

sensor

Paper fuser-out jam detection sensor Detects Paper fuser-out jam

Output Tray 2 paper full detection Detects output Tray 2 paper full
sensor

Output 2 tray path and Return path Changes paper path

solenoid

Return motor Controls 2nd output tray and duplex printing

Output Tray 3 paper full detection Detects output Tray 3 paper full
sensor

Output 2 paper return detection sensor Detects Duplex Return position

1st Duplex motor Controls duplex printing

2nd Duplex motor Controls duplex printing

Duplex 1 jam detection sensor Detects Duplex 1 jam

Duplex 2 jam detection sensor Detects Duplex 2 jam

Tray 1 feed assembly paper empty Detects Tray 1 feed assembly: paper empty
detection sensor
NOTE: If paper is loaded in the Tray 1 Tray, that tray takes priority over trays 2,3,4, or 5.

Tray 1 feed assembly Controls Tray 1 feed assembly pickup roller

180 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 Table 4-1 Sensor, motor, solenoid (continued)

Item Function

Tray 1 feed assembly paper width Detects Tray 1 feed assembly paper width
detection sensor

Tray 2 Pickup and Lift motor Drives the pickup roller and the knock up plate

Tray 3 Pickup and Lift motor Drives the pickup roller and the knock up plate

Tray 4 Pickup and Lift motor Drives the pickup roller and the knock up plate

Tray 5 Pickup and Lift motor Drives the pickup roller and the knock up plate

Paper Loop Detection sensor Detects paper loop between transfer Nip and fusing Nip

At warm-up, Detects the fuser jam

Tray 1, 2, 4, 5

The trays store paper. The paper size is set using the guides in each tray.

Figure 4-5 Basic tray

Item Description

1 Structure: Drawer Type

2 Capacity: 520 sheets (80 g/m² paper standard)

3 Paper type

● Plain paper: A5, A4, A3, B5, B4, Letter, Statement, Legal

● Special Paper: Envelope (Tray 2 Only), Label, Transparency

4 Paper weight

● Plain paper: 60–300 g/m²

5 Plate knock up lift type: Lift Motor + Up Limit Sensor

ENWW Hardware 181

 Pickup Unit, HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540, E82550, E82560 and HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87640,
E87640, E87650

When paper pickup occurs, the pickup roller moves down in order to come in contact with the surface of the
paper. If the cassette is installed, the LEVER-INPUT CST is pushed and the pickup roller moves down. The feed
and separation rollers make sure that a single sheet of paper is moved into the paper path, and that the feed
roller moves the paper as far as the registration (REGI) roller.

NOTE: The pickup unit 1 and pickup unit 2 are not interchangeable.

Figure 4-6 Pickup unit 1

Figure 4-7 Pickup unit 2

Registration (REGI) unit, HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540, E82550, E82560 and HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP
E87640, E87650, E87660

The registration roller is driven by the registration/multipurpose motor. The registration roller clutch is
located between the registration/Tray 1 motor and registration roller, or on the transfer belt (for color), and it
controls power to the registration roller in order to match paper and an image on the drum at the
predetermined registration point.

182 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 Figure 4-8 Registration (Regi) roller

Tray 1 feeder assembly

The Tray 1 feed assembly allows feeding of special media cardstock and custom size paper.

Figure 4-9 Tray 1 feeder assembly

Specification
● Capacity: 100 sheets (80g/m² paper standard)

● Media size: 98 mm x 148 mm – 320 mm x 1200 mm (3.87 in x 5.8 in – 12.6 in x 47.2 in)

● Media weight: Plain paper 60 – 320 g/m²

● Feeding speed: 32 ppm (7400, E87640), 40 ppm (7500, E87650), 48 ppm (7600, E87660) Letter/A4 LEF
(Long Edge Feeding)

ENWW Hardware 183

 Paper separation

Figure 4-10 Paper separation

When the Tray 1 paper detection [A] sensor detects paper and the machine gets a Tray 1 printing job, the Tray
1 solenoid [B] drops the pickup roller [C] onto the top of the paper stack in the Tray 1.

This machine uses a feed and separation roller system for feeding paper. The friction between the separation
roller [D] and transport roller [E] separates the top sheet of paper from the stack.

Drive system

Pickup and cassette lift drive

Figure 4-11 Pickup and cassette lift drive

184 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 Power Train Pickup: normal rotation (Pickup input) counter rotation (Cassette lift input)

● 1 PM STEP → normal rotation → 2 Gear (Pickup drive)

● 1 PM STEP → counter rotation → 3 Gear → 4 5 Gear → 6 Gear & Coupler (Cassette lift drive)

Feed drive

Figure 4-12 Feed drive

Power Train HB STEP → Feed & Tray 1 drive

● 1 HB STEP → 2 Pulley & Coupler → 3 Gear → 4 Gear & Coupler (Feed Roller drive) → 5 E-Clutch & Gear (Tray 1 drive)

● 1 HB STEP → 2 Pulley & Coupler → 6 Gear & Coupler (Feed Roller drive) → 7 Pulley & Coupler (Feed Roller drive)

ENWW Hardware 185

 Registration drive

Figure 4-13 Registration drive

Power Train HB STEP → Registration drive

● 1 HB STEP → 2 Gear → 3 Gear (Registration Roller drive)

186 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

Fuser release/output drive

Figure 4-14 Fuser release/output drive

Power Train BLDC → Fuser and output drive

PM Step → Fuser release drive

● 1 BLDC → 2 Gear (Fuser P/R drive)

● 1 BLDC → 3 Gear & Pulley → 4 Gear (output drive)

● 5 PM Step → 6 Gear → 7 Gear → 8 Gear (Fuser Release drive)

Fuser unit

Fuser unit overview

This section describes the image fusing process used by the printer.

This unit fuses the toner that was transferred by the transfer roller onto the paper, by applying a combination
of heat and pressure to complete the fusing process. This printer uses a fusing belt.

NOTE: The following fuser unit is common for both HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560 and HP Color
LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660.

ENWW Hardware 187

 Figure 4-15 Fuser unit

● Lamp halogen

The fuser unit has two halogen lamps. One heats the center of the fusing belt, the other heats the end of
axial direction. These halogen lamps are lit alternately to heat the fusing belt. Each lamp has its coil in a
different location. The coil of the center heater lamp is in the center, the coils on the side heater lamp
are on both sides. The lamps are fixed inside of the fusing belt. When the fusing belt rotates, the lamps
do not rotate.

● Fuser belt

The belt fuser gets heat from the halogen lamp and transfers it to the toner and paper. The belt fuser
consists of three thin-layers. The thin fusing belt reduces warm up and mode changing time. To prevent
the fusing belt from adhering to the toner, the surface of the fuser belt is lubricated. Tension springs are
used to keep a constant nip area where the fusing belt contacts the pressure roller.

● Fuser pressure roller

The pressure roller makes sure there is a proper nip width between the pressure roller and fusing belt. It
is made up of the soft silicone sponge rubber. The pressure roller is driven by the drive system and
drives the fusing belt.

● Thermistor (NC sensor)

The temperature of the fusing belt is maintained by NC sensors (non-contact type thermistors) located
near the center and the end of the fusing belt.

● Thermostats

The thermostat cuts off the power supply to the halogen lamp by opening the circuit when the fusing
belt becomes abnormally hot as a result of a problem, such as a NC sensor malfunction. The thermostat
is used to prevent abnormal operation. When a thermostat is tripped, it must be replaced as well as the
other damaged parts in the fuser unit.

188 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

Fuser unit drive

Figure 4-16 Fuser drive

The fuser motor (A) drives the pressure roller (B) through the gear train. The fuser belt is driven by the
pressure roller.

Fuser unit temperature control

When the main switch turns on, the CPU turns on the fusing lamp. The lamp stays on until the NC sensors
detect the standby temperature. The CPU then raises the temperature up to the printing temperature.

Figure 4-17 Fuser unit temperature control

Overheat protection
● The CPU cuts power to the fusing lamp in the following cases:

ENWW Hardware 189

 ◦ The belt temperature detected by the NC sensors stays higher than 220°C for 20 seconds.

◦ The belt temperature detected by the NC sensors keeps higher than 230°C for 3 seconds.

◦ The relay off works when the belt temperature detected by the NC sensors is higher than 230°C.

● The following components are used when thermistor overheat protection fails:

◦ Two thermostats get into line with the common ground wire of the fusing lamp.

◦ If one of the thermostat temperatures becomes higher than 195°C, it opens and cuts power to the
fusing lamp. If the other thermostat temperature becomes higher than 195°C, it also opens and
cuts power to the fusing lamp.

Loop control

The tension of the paper between the OPC nip and the fuser nip is known as the paper loop level.

Figure 4-18 Loop control

The paper loop level is controlled by monitoring photo sensors 1 and 2. The fuser unit controls the motor
speed for the paper loop level.

Image creation (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)

Printing process overview

This printer uses four drum units, four development units, and four laser beams for color printing. Each drum
unit consists of a drum, charge roller, and cleaning blade. Each development unit consists of a magnetic roller
and mixing auger.

190 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 Figure 4-19 Printing process overview (E87640, E87650, E87660)

The OPC drum (A) is charged with a negative voltage and is exposed by the light from the laser scanner
assembly (B).

The light produced by the laser creates a latent image by discharging on the surface of the OPC drum. The
negatively charged toner is attracted to the latent drum image due to an electric field. The toner (real image)
on each OPC drum is moved to the ITB (C) by the positive bias applied to the first transfer roller. All four toners
(color image) are transferred to the paper by a positive charge applied to the second transfer roller (D).

1. OPC drum charge: The charge roller gives the drum a negative charge.

2. Laser exposure: Light produced by a laser diode hits the charged OPC through the lens and mirrors.

3. Development: The developing roller carries negatively charged toner to the latent image on the drum
surface. This printer uses four independent drum and development units (one for each color).

4. Transfer:

● Image transfer: The first transfer roller opposite the OPC drums transfer toner from the drums to
the ITB. Four toner images are super-imposed onto the belt.

● Paper transfer: The second transfer roller transfers the toner from the ITB to the media.

5. Cleaning the OPC drum: The cleaning roller and blade remove remaining toner on the drum surface after
image transfer to the paper.

6. Erasing for OPC drum: Erasing is done by illuminating the whole area of the drum with the laser at the
end of every job.

Imaging unit

Imaging unit overview

This printer uses a two-part imaging unit. It uses four color developing during one paper path to increase
color printing productivity.

The development units are not interchangeable, but the drum units for Y, M, and C color are interchangeable.
The black drum unit is independent. The diameter of the drum is 30 mm with a circumference of about 94.2
mm.

The drum unit has the charge roller to charge the drum surface and cleaning roller to clean the charge roller.

ENWW Hardware 191

 The CRUM is a sub part of the drum unit. It stores the count information and other data. If the drum unit is
replaced, the count information stored by the old drum unit will not be kept.

Figure 4-20 Imaging unit (E87640, E87650, E87660)

Drum drive

The color OPCs and magnetic roller are driven by each color motor. The OPC drum and magnetic roller are
powered by the coupling.

The Brushless Direct Current (BLDC) motor maintains constant speed. The speed sync for each color depends
on the BLDC motor.

Phase sync for each OPC job prints the pattern on the Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB) and is adjusted
automatically.

192 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 Figure 4-21 Drum drive

Developer unit

This printer uses a dual-component development system that has four development units. Each new unit
contains 245 g of magnetic toner carrier (developer powder). The developer powder is supplied to the
magnetic (development) roller (A) by the two mixing augers (B). The diameter of the magnetic roller is 18 mm.

Each development unit has a toner carrier (TC) sensor (C). The TC sensor is used for controlling the operating
range of toner density.

ENWW Hardware 193

 Figure 4-22 Developer unit (E87640, E87650, E87660)

Developer agitation

Two mixing augers (B) circulate the developer forward and backward to agitate the developer in order to
sufficiently mix the toner and carrier.

Figure 4-23 Developer auger (E87640, E87650, E87660)

Agitation occurs at the following times:

194 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 ● During the process control self-checking (warm up)

● During toner supply job

● During development job

If the developer unit is stored above 45°C (113°F), the toner might harden and will not work properly. If the
toner in the development unit has hardened, an installation error occurs.

Toner cartridge

When the toner and carrier in the toner cartridge is mixing:

● The YMC cartridge contains 570 g of toner and the K cartridge contains 840 g of toner. Additionally, the
YMC cartridge contains 55 g of carrier and K cartridge contains 80 g of carrier.

● The toner in the YMC cartridge is transferred to the Reservoir by the Spring-ETC.

● The toner in the K cartridge is transferred to the Spring-ETC by the Wheel-Paddle Toner and transferred
to the Reservoir by Spring-ETC.

Figure 4-24 Toner cartridge (E87640, E87650, E87660)

ENWW Hardware 195

 Intermediate transfer belt unit

Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) unit overview

The toner on the four drums is transferred to the Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) by the first transfer roller.

The image overlapped by four colors is transferred to the paper by the second transfer roller. The remaining
toners are removed by the cleaning blade and transferred to the toner collection unit.

This process is completed with one rotation of the ITB. The arrow above the C and M drums on the following
diagram shows the direction of the ITB rotation. The ITB is rotated by friction between the drive roller and the
ITB. The tension roller provides tension to prevent slipping.

There are three color plane registration (CPR) sensors and one photo sensor. Two CPR sensors are for line
position adjustment and one is for process control. The photo sensor monitors the position of the first
transfer rollers.

Figure 4-25 ITB unit

1 Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)

2 First Transfer Roller

3 ITB Drive Roller

4 Tension Roller

5 Photo Sensor

6 Cleaning Blade

7 Color Plane Registration (CPR) Sensor

8 Second Transfer Roller

9 Toner Collection Auger

10 Drum Unit

Transfer belt drive

The drive motor (A) drives the ITB (B) by using gears and the ITB drive roller (C).

The ITB (B) and black OPC (C) is synchronized by the drive motor (A).

196 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 Figure 4-26 Transfer belt drive (E87640, E87650, E87660)

Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) cleaning

The intermediate transfer belt (ITB) cleaner removes toner during printing. Belt cleaning is completed while
the ITB makes one rotation. The ITB drive motor drives the ITB cleaning motor.

The cleaning blade (A) in the ITB cleaner always contacts the ITB (B). The cleaning blade removes the used
toner from the ITB. The toner collection auger (C) transfers the waste toner to the toner collection unit.

The seal (D) on the ITB cleaner protects against toner contamination. The driving power by the driver roller is
transferred to the tension roller (E). The toner collection auger gear (F) drives the gear (G) and collects the
toner.

ENWW Hardware 197

 Figure 4-27 ITB cleaning

Toner reservoir unit

Main function
● Toner Buffer Space (about 0.6 K page volume) which allows users to continue printing until a new toner
cartridge is installed.

● The toner level sensor in the reservoir that is more accurate from the toner full sensing algorithm.

◦ Minimizes the remaining toner in toner cartridge.

◦ Provides a uniform toner supply volume per second and prevents an abnormal case of toner-
density control error in the development unit.

Working mechanism
● Toner level sensing method in the Reservoir unit:

◦ The toner level is checked by time with a floating actuator shuttering light sensor (toner full
sensor).

198 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

Troubleshooting

Figure 4-28 Toner reservoir unit (E87640, E87650, E87660)

Laser scanner assembly (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)

Laser scanner assembly overview

The laser scanner assembly consists of one polygon motor and four laser diodes (LD) units. The Laser scanner
assembly forms a latent image on the surface of four OPC drums. For this process, the laser scanner
assembly has a collimator lens, cylindrical lens, two F-Theta lenses, and two reflective mirrors on an optical
path for each color.

This Laser scanner assembly uses the cross scan type scanning. K Color and C Color scan the laser from the
rear to the front. M Color and Y Color scan the laser from the front to the rear.

The laser scanner assembly has a skew adjustment function which adjusts the scanning line by step motor.

ENWW Hardware 199

 Figure 4-29 Laser scanner assembly (E87640, E87650, E87660)

Laser scanning optical path

The laser from the laser scanner assembly is placed at intervals of 78 mm for each color. All colors use the
same polygon motor for oblique incidence.

The F2 lens (A) determines the slope of the primary scanning line and the image position of the secondary
scanning direction. This setting is adjusted by the manufacturer. The primary scanning line slope difference is
adjusted by the skew adjustment in the laser scanner assembly.

Reflective mirrors (B) on each color path adjust the curvature of primary scanning. This setting is adjusted by
the manufacturer.

200 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 Figure 4-30 Laser scanning optical path (E87640, E87650, E87660)

Laser synchronizing detectors

The laser scanner assembly has two beam detector sensor boards (PD PBA includes four sensors). The PD
PBAs are located at each corner of the laser optics housing unit.

The two PD PBAs detect the following:

● (A, B): Scanning start position for K, C

● (C, D): Scanning start position for M, Y

ENWW Hardware 201

 Figure 4-31 Laser synchronizing detectors (E87640, E87650, E87660)

Main scan start detection

The PD PBAs detect four beams at the scanning start point and create the horizontal sync (Hsync) signal.
Data is scanned by Hsync.

The arrow in the previous diagram shows the data scanning direction for each color. Black/Cyan and
Yellow/Magenta use the same polygon motor scanning in opposite directions.

Automatic CPR adjustment

During automatic CPR adjustment, the line patterns below are created eight times on the intermediate
transfer belt (ITB). The spaces between the lines (KK, CC, MM, YY, KC, KM, KY) are measured by the front,
center, and rear CPR sensors. The controller takes the average of the spaces and then adjusts the following
positions and magnification:

● Sub scan line position for CMY

● Main scan line position for CMY

● Magnification ratio for CMY

● Skew for CMY

The ITB cleaning unit cleans the ITB after the patterns are measured.

202 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 Figure 4-32 Automatic CPR adjustment

● KK, CC, MM, YY: Spaces between two lines of the same color.

● KC, KM, KY: Spaces between a black line and each color line.

Adjustment

● Sub Scan line position for CMY

The adjustment of the sub scan line position for CMY is based on the line position for K (black). The
printer measures the gaps between the lines of each color in the pattern on the ITB. When the gaps for a
color are incorrect, the printer moves the image of the color up or down the sub scan axis. To do this, it
changes the laser write timing for that color.

● Main Scan line position for CMY

When the printer detects that the image is out of position in the main scan direction, it changes the laser
write start timing for each scan line.

● Magnification Adjustment for CMY

ENWW Hardware 203

 When the printer detects that magnification adjustment is necessary, it changes the LD clock frequency
for the required color.

● Skew for CMY

The adjustment of the skew for CMY is based on the line position for K (black).

Adjustment Conditions

Line position adjustment can be turned on or off. However, it is normally recommended to turn on this
function.

Line position adjustment timing depends on several settings. These settings include the following:

● ΔT = Temperature change of the laser scanner assembly between the temperature of the previous line
position adjustment and the current temperature.

● Pages = Total printed pages after previous line position adjustment.

Interval During Print Job

Line position adjustment interrupts printing and then starts automatically when one of these conditions
occurs when the printer checks at the sheet interval:

● ΔT > Temperature threshold (laser scanner assembly temperature: [default 3°C])

● Pages > Output threshold for all outputs (default: 500 pages)

Toner Collection Unit Not-Installed/Installed

● Line position adjustment starts automatically when toner collection unit is removed and reinstalled.

Drum Unit or Developer Unit Replaced

● When the printer detects a new drum unit or developer unit, line position adjustment is automatically
performed.

ITB Replaced

● When the printer detects a new ITB or other ITB, SVC engineers have to execute the adjustment
manually.

Main Scan Skew Adjustment

204 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 Figure 4-33 Main scan skew adjustment

The skew adjustment assembly (A) consists of the worm gear (1) for adjustment and worm gear (2). When
Color Plane Registration (CPR) executes, it detects and adjusts the scanning line slope manually.

The skew adjustment assembly (A) for magenta, cyan, and yellow adjusts the skew angle of the F2 lens (B).
This mechanism corrects main scan skew.

Drive system (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)

Drive motors

The following diagram shows the location of the printer drive motors.

ENWW Hardware 205

 Figure 4-34 Drive motor (E87640, E87650, E87660)

Number Motor Motor type Qty Function

1 Fuser Release PM-STEP 1 Fuser Release drive

2 Fuser and Exit BLDC 1 Fuser and Exit drive

3 Main OPC, Development, BLDC 4 OPC and PTB Belt drive

and ITB

4 Registration assy HP-STEP 1 Registration drive

5 Feed/Tray 1 HP-STEP 1 Separation roller 1, 2, 3 drive

E-CLT 1 Feed/Tray 1 drive control

6 Pickup PM-STEP 2 Pickup roller/cassette lift drive

(Reverse drive at cassette lift

drive)

7 Toner Supply and PM-STEP 4 Toner transfer (Reservoir →

Reservoir Development unit)

8 Cassette lock DC 4 Cassette lock function on/off

206 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 Number Motor Motor type Qty Function

9 Engage transfer assy PM-STEP 1 T1 Engage/Disengage drive

10 TCU PM-STEP 1 TCU drive

Main drive unit motors

Figure 4-35 Main drive unit motors (E87640, E87650, E87660)

Power Train BLDC → OPC & Development & ITB drive

● 1 BLDC → 2 Gear → 3 Gear & Coupler (ITB drive)

● 1 BLDC → 4 Gear & Coupler (K OPC drive)

● 1 BLDC → 5 Gear & Pulley → 5 Gear & Coupler (K Development drive)

● 7 BLDC → 8 Gear & Coupler (Y, M, C OPC drive)

● 7 BLDC → 9 Gear & Coupler (Y, M, C Development drive)

ENWW Hardware 207

 Toner supply/reservoir drive

Figure 4-36 Toner supply/reservoir drive (E87640, E87650, E87660)

Power Train PM Step → Toner Supply, Reservoir drive

● 1 PM Step → 2 Gear → 3 Gear → 4 Gear & Latch → 5 Gear (Y, C Toner Supply drive)

● 1 PM Step → 2 Gear → 6 Gear (Photo Interrupt) → 7 Gear & Latch → 8 Gear (M, K Toner Supply drive)

● 9 PM Step → 10 Gear (Y, C Toner Reservoir drive)

● 9 PM Step → 11 Gear → 12 Gear (M, K Toner Reservoir drive)

Engage transfer roller drive

Figure 4-37 Engage transfer roller drive (E87640, E87650, E87660)

208 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 Power Train PM Step → Engage transfer roller drive

● 1 PM Step → 2 Gear (Engage transfer roller drive)

TCU drive

Figure 4-38 TCU drive (E87640, E87650, E87660)

Power Train PM Step → TCU drive

● 1 PM Step → 2 Gear (TCU drive)

Image creation (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560)

Printing process overview

This machine uses one drum unit, one development unit, and a laser beam for mono printing. The drum unit
consists of an OPC drum, charge roller, and a cleaning blade. The development unit consists of a magnetic
roller and mixing auger.

Figure 4-39 Printing process overview (E82540, E82550, E82560)

The OPC drum (A) is charged with a negative voltage and is exposed to light from the laser scanner assembly
(B). The light produced by a laser creates a latent image by discharging on the surface of the OPC drum. The

ENWW Hardware 209

 negatively charged toners are attracted to the latent drum image by an electric field. The toners (mono
image) on the OPC drum are transferred to the paper by the positive bias.

1. OPC drum charge: The charge roller gives the drum a negative charge.

2. Laser exposure: Light produced by a laser diode hits the charged OPC through the lens and mirrors.

3. Development: The magnetic roller carries negatively charged toner to the latent image on the drum
surface.

4. Transfer: The Paper Transfer Belt (PTB) transfers the toner from the OPC drum to the paper.

5. Cleaning the OPC drum: The cleaning blade removes remaining toner on the drum surface after image
transfer to the paper.

6. Erasing for OPC drum: Erasing is done by illuminating the whole area of the drum with the laser at the
end of every job.

Imaging unit

Drum unit overview

This printer has one drum unit and one development unit.

The diameter of the drum is 60 mm with a circumference of approximately 188.5 mm.

The drum unit has a charge roller to charge the drum surface and a cleaning roller to clean the charge roller.

The CRUM is a sub part of the Drum unit and stores the count information and other data. If the Drum unit is
replaced, the count information stored by the old Drum unit will not be kept.

Figure 4-40 Drum unit (E82540, E82550, E82560)

Drum drive

The OPC drum and magnetic roller are driven by one BLDC motor and supplied with power from the coupling.

210 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 The drive shaft is directly inserted into the OPC drum to fix the drum unit. This structure provides stable
printing quality.

Figure 4-41 Drum drive

Developer unit

This printer uses a dual-component development system. The development unit contains 340 g of magnetic
toner carrier (development powder).

The developer powder is supplied to the magnetic (development) roller [A] by the two mixing augers [B]. The
diameter of the magnetic roller is 18 mm.

The development unit has a Toner Carrier (TC) sensor [C]. It is used for controlling the operating range of the
toner density.

ENWW Hardware 211

 Figure 4-42 Developer unit (E82540, E82550, E82560)

Developer agitation

Two mixing augers (A) circulate the carrier forward and backward to agitate the developer in order to
sufficiently mix the toner and carrier.

Figure 4-43 Mixing auger (E82540, E82550, E82560)

Agitation occurs at the following times:

212 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 ● During the process control self-checking (warm up)

● During toner supply job

● During development job

If the developer unit is stored above 45°C (113°F), the toner might harden and will not work properly. If the
toner in the development unit has hardened, an installation error occurs.

Toner cartridge

When the toner and carrier in the toner cartridge is mixing:

● The toner cartridge contains 940 g of toner and 90 g of carrier.

● The toner in the cartridge is transferred from Wheel-Paddle Toner [A] to Wheel-Auger Toner [B] and
transferred from Wheel-Auger Toner [B] to the Reservoir.

● The toner cartridge has an CRUM that stores the count information.

● The toner in toner cartridge when stored at temperatures above 45°C (113°F) might harden.

Figure 4-44 Toner cartridge (E82540, E82550, E82560)

Paper transfer belt unit

Paper transfer belt unit overview

The Paper Transfer Belt (PTB) moves the paper.

The charged toner on the drum is moved to the paper by the transfer roller in PTB unit (1). The rubber belt in
PTB unit removes the charge on the paper then separates the paper from the drum so the paper can move
into the paper path.

This process is done with rotation of the PTB. The rotation is made by the friction between the drive roller (3)
and PTB (1). For this process, the drive roller (3) and guide roller (4) provides proper tension to block slip.

ENWW Hardware 213

 There is one actuator (8) and two photo sensors (5). The actuator recognizes the paper path and controls the
paper speed for stable image quality.

Figure 4-45 Paper transfer belt unit (E82540, E82550, E82560)

1 Paper Transfer Belt (PTB) 5 Photo Interrupter (sensor)

2 Transfer Roller 6 Cleaning Blade

3 Drive Roller 7 Guide Waste Toner

4 Guide Roller 8 Loop control

Transfer belt drive

The drive motor [A] drives the transfer belt [B] by using gears and the PTB drive roller [C].

214 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 Figure 4-46 Transfer belt drive

Laser scanner assembly (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560)

Laser scanner assembly overview

The laser scanner assembly consists of one polygon motor and one laser diodes (LD) unit. The laser scanner
assembly forms a latent image on the surface of the OPC drum. For this process, the laser scanner assembly
has a collimator lens, cylindrical lens, and an F-Theta lens on an optical path for each color.

The laser scanner assembly has cover glass to protect the glass on the optical path from contamination. The
LD PCA interfaces with the printer.

ENWW Hardware 215

 Figure 4-47 Laser scanner assembly overview

Item Description

1 LD PCA

2 P/Mirror Motor

3 F1 Lens

4 F2 Lens

5 Cover Glass

Laser scanning optical path

The laser moves from the polygon motor (A) to the OPC drum (D). The F1 lens (B) and F2 lens (C) determine
the scanning line and the image position. This setting is adjusted by the manufacturer.

216 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 Figure 4-48 Laser scanning optical path (E82540, E82550, E82560)

THe laser scanner assembly operates at three different speeds, depending on the model.

Laser synchronizing detectors

The laser scanner assembly has a beam detector sensor board (PD PCA). The PD PCA (A) detects the scanning
start point.

Main Scan Start Detection

The beam is detected by the PD PCA at the scanning start point and creates the horizontal sync signal (Hsync).

The following diagram shows the data scanning direction.

ENWW Hardware 217

 Figure 4-49 Laser synchronizing detectors

Drive system (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560)

Drive motors

The following diagram shows the location of the printer drive motors.

218 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 Figure 4-50 Drive motor (E82540, E82550, E82560)

Number Motor Motor type Qty Function

1 Fuser Release PM-STEP 1 Fuser Release drive

2 Fuser and output BLDC 1 Fuser and output drive

3 Main OPC, Development, BLDC 4 OPC and PTB Belt drive

and PTB

4 Registration assembly HB-STEP 1 Registration assembly drive

5 Feed/Tray 1 HB-STEP 1 Separation roller 1, 2, 3 drive

E-CLT 1 Feed/Tray 1 drive control

6 Pickup PM-STEP 2 Pickup roller/Cassette lift drive

(Reverse drive at cassette lift

drive)

ENWW Hardware 219

 Number Motor Motor type Qty Function

7 Toner Supply PM-STEP 1 Toner transfer (Toner cartridge →

Reservoir)

8 Toner Reservoir PM-STEP 1 Toner transfer (Reservoir →

Development unit)

Main drive unit motors

Figure 4-51 Main drive unit motors (E82540, E82550, E82560)

Power Train BLDC → OPC, Development and PTB drive

● 1 BLDC → 2 Gear & Coupler (OPC drive)

● 1 BLDC → 3 Gear & Pulley → 4 Coupler (Development drive)

● 1 BLDC → 5 Gear (PTB drive)

220 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

Toner supply drive

Figure 4-52 Toner supply drive (E82540, E82550, E82560)

Power Train PM Step → Toner Supply drive

● 1 PM Step → 2 Gear → 3 Gear (Toner Supply drive)

Toner reservoir drive

Figure 4-53 Toner supply drive (E82540, E82550, E82560)

Power Train PM STEP Motor → Toner Reservoir Auger & Paddle drive

● 1 PM STEP Motor → 2 Gear → 4 Gear & Latch → 5 Pulley & Gear (Paddle drive)

● 1 PM STEP Motor → 2 Gear → 3 Gear & Latch (Auger drive)

Flatbed Scanner System

Flatbed scanner system overview

The scanner converts a hardcopy original into data. To scan an original, the scanner uses the lens and Charge
Coupled Device (CCD). The scanner stores and transfers the converted image to the storage space or transfers
the scanned data to the printer engine for copy.

For scan operation, the scanner uses a full rate (FR) carriage and a half rate (HR) carriage that is moved by a
wire. It scans the original document on the scanner glass or from the ADF.

The scanner system consists of the three following modules:

ENWW Hardware 221

 ● Full Rate (FR) carriage: Illuminates the original and reflects the light at a 90 degree angle.

● Half Rate (HR) carriage: Transfers the reflected light from the FR carriage to the lens.

● Imaging module: Makes an image on the CCD.

The HR carriage moves half the distance at half the speed of the FR carriage. This keeps a regular gap
between the original and the imaging lens.

Figure 4-54 Scanner system overview

The following describes the scan process:

1. The FR carriage lamp illuminates the original. The reflected light is moved to Mirror #1.

2. The reflected light from Mirror #1 is sent to the imaging lens through Mirror #2 and #3.

3. The light becomes smaller and makes an optical image.

4. The optical image is generated to the electrical signal by the CCD sensor.

To make a stable image, a gap must be maintained between the original and the lens. To maintain this gap,
the HR carriage moves half the distance and half the speed of the FR carriage.

222 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 Figure 4-55 Scan process

The optical image made by the CCD sensor is changed to an electrical-analog signal.

Each color element signal in the optical image is separated by the CCD sensor into red, green, and blue.

The red CCD sensor extracts the red color from the optical image, the green CCD sensor extracts the green
color from the optical image, and the blue CCD sensor extracts the blue color from the optical image.

The analog image signal is changed to a digital image signal by the A/D converter and is transferred to the
processor.

The image scan of the main scanning direction is performed by the CCD sensor. The CCD sensor consists of
approximately 7500 pixels. The image scan of the sub scanning direction is performed by the FR carriage and
HR carriage. The carriage is moved by a wire driven by the scan motor.

Scan resolution is 600 dpi.

ENWW Hardware 223

 Figure 4-56 Image processing

Scanning system components

The following shows the construction and purpose of the scanning system.

To scan the original on the scanner glass, two carriages driven by the motor move at a regular speed. The
motor drives the timing belt, pulley, and wire. The wire pulley rolls and releases the wire to move the carriage.

The scanner consists of the scanner glass, FR carriage, HR carriage, imaging unit, and driving unit.

224 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 Figure 4-57 Scanning system components

● FR Carriage

ENWW Hardware 225

 Figure 4-58 FR carriage

◦ LED lamp module

This module illuminates the original. Two white LEDs are assembled on the side of the module. The
original is illuminated by the light-guide. The heat sink is attached to the LED PCB. When the heat
sink is broken or expired, an engineer needs to replace it.

● Light-guide

The light-guide changes the light from point type to line type. The light-guide is made by
transparent resin and controls the amount of light in the scan area uniformly.

● White LED

The white LED emits white light. The heat sink attached to the PCA prevents heat
deterioration.

● Reflection holder

The reflection holder reflects the light that has passed through the light-guide.

◦ Mirror #1

Mirror #1 reflects light at a 90 degree angle.

HR Carriage (mirror unit)

226 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 Figure 4-59 HR carriage

● Mirror #2 and #3

Mirrors #2 and #3 are positioned at a 45 degree angle in order to change the direction of the light. The
reflected light from mirror #1 is sent to the imaging lens through mirrors #2 and #3.

● Pulley

The pulley is a ball bearing type. The pulley rolls and releases the wire which makes the HR carriage
move. The HR carriage moves half the distance at half the speed of the FR carriage.

Imaging unit

The imaging unit changes the optical image to an electrical signal.

Figure 4-60 Imaging unit

● Imaging lens

The reflected light from the imaging lens is focused on the CCD. The image is reduced to the fixed CCD
sensor and pixel size.

● CCD PCA

The image made by the imaging lens is changed to an electrical signal by the CCD. The CCD consists of
three channel line sensors for image creation. The brightness and darkness of the image depends on the
voltage level from the CCD. The output voltage is changed to a digital signal. The digital signal makes
the scanned image.

Wire driving

ENWW Hardware 227

 To move the carriages, the wire is assembled in the front and rear of the scanner. The pulley rolls and releases
the wire which moves the FR carriage and the HR carriage.

Figure 4-61 Wire driving

Scanner glass (flatbed glass)

The original is placed on the scanner glass for scan or copy jobs. The scanner glass is made of tempered glass
and is held in place by the frame to prevent distortion.

Drive motor

228 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 The scanner drive system uses the step motor to move the carriage. The step motor controls the position and
maintains constant speed. The motor power is transferred to the wire through the timing belt and pulley.

Timing belt

The timing belt has a regular sawtooth gear and transfers the motor power to the pulley.

Figure 4-62 Timing belt

Paper size sensor

The paper size sensor automatically detects the size of the original on the scanner glass. The paper size
sensor uses two sensors. An infrared LED is used to detect the dark original.

Home sensor

The home sensor detects the FR carriage position. The home sensor is a transmission photosensor.

Cover open sensor #1

When the ADF unit opens and closes, a function is triggered which detects whether the paper size sensor is on
or off.

Cover open sensor #2

The cover open sensor #2 detects when the ADF unit is closed using magnetic force.

ADF glass

ADF glass scans the original through the ADF unit. The FR carriage reads the original as it passes. If the
original is contaminated, a horizontal black or white line might appear.

Shading sheet

ENWW Hardware 229

 The shading sheet detects white color in the base. Before every scan job, the scan module reads the shading
sheet to scan the image with the same color and brightness. If the original is contaminated, a vertical image
might occur.

Figure 4-63 Shading sheet

Caution for moving the scanner

Lock the FR and HR carriages to prevent damage when shipping or moving the printer.

When installing

After unpacking, before turning on the printer, the scan locking screw must be removed. If the locking screw is
not removed scanner failure will occur.

1. When installing the printer, remove the scan locking screw.

2. After removing the screw, assemble the screw cap from the accessory package.

Figure 4-64 Remove scan locking screw

230 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 When moving

When moving the printer, tighten the scan locking screw to prevent damage to the carriages.

1. Make sure the FR carriage is located in the home position.

2. Remove the screw cap.

3. Tighten the M3x8 screw to secure the FR carriage.

Figure 4-65 Tighten scan locking screw

Flow Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) dn/z bundles (GX) (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640,
E87650, E87660, HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560)

Flow ADF overview

Figure 4-66 Flow ADF overview

R7 R6 R5 R4 R3 R2 R1

R8 R9 R1 R11 R1 R1 R1
0 2 3 4

Table 4-2 Flow ADF overview

Part Function

R1 STACKER ASSY Original paper input tray

R2 GUIDE-DOCU F&R Original paper guide (front/rear)

R3 PICKUP ROLLER Pick up original paper from the input tray

R4 ADF ROLLERr Original paper feed roller

R5 SEPARATION ROLLER Original paper separation roller

R6 FEED ROLLER Original paper transfer roller (A6 size)

ENWW Hardware 231

 Table 4-2 Flow ADF overview (continued)

Part Function

R7 PRE REGI ROLLER Original paper alignment roller (1 round)

R8 REGI ROLLER Original paper alignment roller (2 round)

R9 SCAN IN ROLLER Feeds an original paper before scanning

R10 SIMPLEX WHITE-ROLLER Support of simplex scanning unit

R11 SIMPLEX SCAN OUT ROLLER Transfer a scanned original paper to the duplex white-roller

R12 D-CIS MODULE Back side image scan unit

R13 DUPLEX SCAN OUT ROLLER Transfer a scanned original paper to the exit roller

R14 EXIT ROLLER Sends an original paper to the exit tray

Sensors

Figure 4-67 Flow ADF sensors

10. MSO 8.Cover Open 7. Pickup Position 5. Detect Sensor 2. Paper Width

9.Pickup 1. Paper Length

Pickup Roller
11. Pre Registration
12. Registration

3.LIFT

PRE REGI PICK UP FEED separation 4.CAM RELEASE

6. POSITION
REGI
DUPLEX-SCAN OUT EXIT

Scan CIS
13. SIM Scan Idle
SIMPLEX
Scan In WHITE-R
OLLER

16. Exit

14. SIM Scan

Scan CCD
MSO Sensors 15. DUP Scan

11. Pre Registration

10. MSO

Table 4-3 Flow ADF sensors

Callout Item Function

1 Paper Length Sensor Detects paperlength

2 Paper Width Sensor Detects paperwidth

3 Stacker Lift Sensor Detects Stacker Position

4 Cam Release Sensor Sensing ‘Separation Roller’ rotation

5 Detect Sensor Detects if tray is empty

6 Position Sensor Detects Stacker Position

232 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 Table 4-3 Flow ADF sensors (continued)

Callout Item Function

7 Pickup Position Sensor Sensing ‘Pickup Roller’ rotation

8 Cover Open Sensor Detects if cover is open or closed

9 Pickup Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the feed path

10 MSO Sensor Detects mix size

11 Pre-Regi Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the pre-regi path

12 Regi Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the Regi path

13 SIM Scan Idle Sensor Sensing ‘Scan In Roller’ rotation

14 SIM Scan Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the Scan In path

15 DUP Scan Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the Scan Out path

16 Exit Sensor Paper Exit Sensing

Ultra Sonic Multi-feed (USM)

Figure 4-68 Flow ADF Ultra Sonic Multifeed

Tx Sensor

Rx Sensor

● This sensor detects multi-feeds.

● Component: Ultrasonic Sensor Tx Board, Rx Board , HIC Board (Amp and Filter)

● The Rx Sensor has a different level on each paper status: no paper, one paper, multiple papers.

● Detect the multi-feeding through the level change of Rx Sensor.

● Transmit and receive operation of 300 khz frequency.

Flow ADF drive system

The flow ADF drive system consists of eight motors.

ENWW Hardware 233

 Figure 4-69 Flow ADF drive system
Pre-Registration Drive section

Registration Drive section

Pickup Drive section Pickup Release Drive section

Scan Drive section

Lift Drive section

Scan in Roller Release Drive section

Exit Drive section

The Flow ADF drive system has eight sections: Pickup Release Drive, Pickup Drive, Pre-Regi Drive, Regi Drive,
Scan-in Roller Release Drive, Scan Drive, Exit Drive, and Lift Drive sections.

Flow ADF document lifting drive system

Figure 4-70 Flow ADF document lifting drive system

● Component: LIFT MOTOR, LIFT SHAFT, LIFT BAR, PAPER SENSOR

● LIFT MOTOR Starts > LIFT SHAFT and LIFT BAR lift Tray

● PAPER SENSOR detects paper in the Tray

234 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 ● Paper contacts PICKUP ROLLER and stops movement

● Document is passed through SCAN OUT SENSOR. Duplex scanning starts.

Flow ADF Scan-In Roller Release Drive System

Figure 4-71 Flow ADF Scan-In Roller Release Drive System

● Holds the rear of the paper using cam motion for improved scan quality

● Component: RELEASE MOTOR, RELEASE CAM, SCAN-IN IDLE ROLLER

● Motor and cam operation repeats for every piece of paper

Flow ADF specification

Capacity 250 pages (stacker lifting)

Scan Speed 120/240 ipm

Pickup Semi-Retard

Registration 2 times registration

Motor 8 each

Stacker Lifting

Scanning White Roller/White Bar

MSO Support

ENWW Hardware 235

 Flow ADF Registration

Figure 4-72 Flow ADF Registration

Registration Sensor
Registration Roller

Pre Registration Roller

Registration Sensor Pre Registration Sensor

Registration
Roller

The Flow ADF has two times registration.

236 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

Flow ADF Scanning Position

Figure 4-73 Flow ADF Scanning Position

6LPSOH[
'XSOH[

Type Simplex Duplex

Scanning Z-GX White Roller White Bar

Mixed Size Original (MSO)

The MSO detects the size of mixed size papers and sets the alignment of the papers to the rear.

Figure 4-74 MSO 1

ENWW Hardware 237

 Figure 4-75 MSO 2
3UH5HJLVWUDWLRQ6HQVRU
062 6HQVRU

Figure 4-76 MSO 3

Dual sensor cleaning method

● Component: LEVER GUIDE EXIT F, GUIDE-EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY.

● Open LEVER GUIDE EXIT F.

● Cleans with a D-CIS GLASS in the direction indicated.

● Cleans the GUIDE EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY in the direction indicated.

238 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 Figure 4-77 Dual sensor cleaning method

3XOOWKHOHYHU

Figure 4-78 Dual sensor cleaning method

Flow ADF z bundles (GX)

Model Engine Scanner

Platen DN-sGX Z-GX

Color 40 ppm Same at Scan Speed USM Capacity Scan Speed USM Capacity
whole
50 ppm model 90/180 ipm X 250 sheet 120/240 O 250 sheet
ipm
60 ppm

Mono 40 ppm

50 ppm

60 ppm

Hardware configuration

Introduction

The main controller handles the video controller, engine controller, and scan controller.

ENWW Hardware 239

 The main controller receives print data from the host through the network or USB port and receives copy data
from the scan controller. The main controller uses this information to generate printable video bitmap data. It
controls all modules required to print, including the laser scanner assembly, HVPS, FAN, fuser, and so on.

The main controller communicates with the drive system and other devices through Universal Asynchronous
Receiver Transmitter (UART). The main controller communicates with and checks the life of the toner
cartridge, drum, and developer units through I2C.

The main controller uses Quad Core CPU 1.5 GHz, DDR3 4 GB memory, Micro SD 4 GB, and a 320 GB SATA HDD
to control the engine driving, video signal processing, and user interface.

A MICOM controls power to the fuser lamp and power to the system according to an optimized energy saving
algorithm. The MICOM communicates with the OPE controller through the USB 3.0 protocol to display the
system information on the control panel.

The ADF controller controls some mechanisms required to scan continuously from the ADF. The ADF controller
communicates with the main controller to synchronize scan timing.

The HVPS board generates and controls high-voltage channels. The fuser drive assembly controls power to
the fuser lamp. The LVPS board generates 5 V and 24 V power for the system.

Circuit board locations

The following diagrams show the locations of the printer circuit boards:

240 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 Figure 4-79 E87640, E87650, E87660

ENWW Hardware 241

 Figure 4-80 E82540, E82550, E82560

Main controller

Main controller for previous model

The main controller consists of the main processor (A3000), memory (DDR3 4 GB), Micro SD (4 GB), 1 G
Ethernet PHY, USB 3.0 HUB, and Micom (Power/Fuser control). It can control Video/UI/FAX signal interface
connection, motor drive IC, engine signal interface connection, and power interface.

The main processor (Quad Core 1.5 GHz CPU) controls video, engine, UI display, and communicates with the
various devices. The HDD is connected to the main controller by a SATA cable and connected to the other
device (such as ADF, dual cassette feeder (DCF), Finisher, Modem) by UART.

242 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

Main controller block diagram

Figure 4-81 Block diagram

Main controller clock diagram

Figure 4-82 Clock diagram

M 41T81
RTC with IRQ
32.768Khz
CrystalInput

RTS5401
U SB3.0 H U B
12M hz
Crystal
Input

A TSA M D A3000 CH 0_CLK_P(800M hz)

20E15 D D R3 8G b
D D R3 C H 0 CH 0_CLK_N
12M hz K4B8G 1646B
Crystal
Input
RTC D D R3 8G b
K4B8G 1646B
CH 1_CLK_P(800M hz)
N .C
D D R3 8G b
ASM 3P2863 Clk0 D D R3 C H 1 CH 1_CLK_N K4B8G 1646B
12M hz CLK_M A IN (Spread 12M hz)
Crystal Clk1
Input CLK_PU RE(Reference 12M hz)
Sel Clk2 D D R3 8G b
K4B8G 1646B

M AC0
SA TA _REFCLK_P(100M hz) M A C0_G TX_CLK(125M hz)
25M hz PL602-21 Clk0 NETWORK PH Y 12M hz
Crystal SA TA _REFCLK_N M A C0_RX_CLK(125M hz) Crystal
Input Clk1 RTL8211 Input

M AC1 NETWORK OPTION PBA

PCI_REFCLK_P(100M hz) M A C1_G TX_CLK(125M hz)
25M hz PL602-21 Clk0 NETWORK PH Y 12M hz
Crystal M A C1_RX_CLK(125M hz) Crystal
Input Clk1
PCI_REFCLK_N RTL8211 Input

CLK_M A IN _CCD M _P(35M hz)

U SB3D _REFCLK_P(100M hz) CCD M
25M hz PL602-21 Clk0 CLK_M A IN _CCD M _N
Crystal U SB3D _REFCLK_N
Input Clk1 SC AN0 RX_CLK_CCD M _P(35M hz)

RX_CLK_CCD M _N

U SB3H _REFCLK_P(100M hz) CLK_M A IN _D CIS_P(35M hz)

D CIS
U SB3H _REFCLK_N SC AN1 CLK_M A IN _D CIS_N
RX_CLK_D CIS_P(35M hz)

RX_CLK_D CIS_N

ENWW Hardware 243

 Main controller connection information (color)

Figure 4-83 Connection information (E87640, E87650, E87660)

Connections

1 OUTPUT 12 FINISHER 23 Laser scanner 34 CCDM

assembly 1 COLOR

2 FUSER DRIVE 13 OPC CRUM/T1 24 Laser scanner 35 Flow ADF

assembly 2 COLOR

3 FUSER DRAWER 14 OPC HOME SENS 25 HVPS COLOR 36 HDD POWER

4 TB/CRUM 15 OPC BLDC COLOR 26 USB HOST 1/2 37 HDD SIGNAL

5 TONER SUP/RES 16 TC SENS/RES FULL 27 USB DEVICE 38 SIDE FAN

6 CPR/CTD COLOR 17 LVPS TYPE5 28 NETWORK 39 MSOK

7 Registration 18 HVPS POWER/ 29 EFI POWER 40 SD CARD

assembly/T1 POS Laser scanner
SENS assembly SKEW

8 PICKUP 1/2 19 LVPS TYPE4 30 FIH JOINT 41 FAX JOINT

244 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 9 FEED/Registration 20 FRONT IF COLOR 31 UI IF 42 2ND NETWORK
assembly MOT

10 SIDE 21 Fuser drive board 32 USB HOST/HUB 43 EFI SIGNAL

IF

11 dual cassette 22 Laser scanner 33 DCIS 44 CPU FAN

feeder (DCF) IF assembly PD

Main controller connection information (E82540, E82550, E82560)

Figure 4-84 Connection information (E82540, E82550, E82560)

Connections

1 OUTPUT 12 OPC BLDC MONO 23 FIH JOINT 34 FAX JOINT

2 FUSER DRIVE 13 LVPS TYPE5 24 UI IF 35 2ND NETWORK

3 FUSER DRAWER 14 LVPS TYPE3R 25 USB HOST/HUB 36 EFI SIGNAL

4 TB/DEVE/CRUM 15 FRONT IF MONO 26 DCIS 37 CPU FAN

5 TONER SUP/RES 16 Fuser drive board 27 CCDM

IF

ENWW Hardware 245

 6 CTD/Registration 17 Laser scanner 28 Flow ADF
assembly SENS assembly MONO

7 PICKUP 1/2 18 HVPS MONO 29 HDD POWER

8 FEED/Registration 19 USB HOST 1/2 30 HDD SIGNAL

assembly MOT

9 SIDE 20 USB DEVICE 31 SIDE FAN

10 dual cassette 21 NETWORK 32 MSOK

feeder (DCF) IF

11 FINISHER 22 EFI POWER 33 SD CARD

Information
● Part Number:

● Part Name: PBA-MAIN

NOTE: This main board is for all models of the E87640, E87650, E87660 Series.

Main controller

The main controller consists of the main processor (A3000), memory (DDR3 6 GB), eMMC (4 GB)1 G Ethernet
PHY, USB 3.0 HUB, and Micom (Power/Fuser control). It can control Video/UI/FAX signal interface connection,
motor drive IC, engine signal interface connection, and power interface.

The main processor (Quad Core 1.5 GHz CPU) controls video, engine, UI display, and communicates with the
various devices. The HDD is connected to the main controller by a SATA cable and connected to the other
device (such as ADF, dual cassette feeder (DCF), Finisher, and Modem) by UART.

246 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

Main controller block diagram

Figure 4-85 Block diagram

O P E IR
IR P B A
C h3
FU S E R
10.1" C h2 PTB SC A N N ER
T FT LC D
TO N ER C R U M
C h1 O PC C R U M D SD F
U S B 3.0 H U B P B A
R TC
W IFI/N FC M O D U LE C h0
D E B U G _M C B
FR O N T 2 nd N W
R T S 5411 C h0 P LA T E N
C A R D R EA D ER U SB D IM M C h1
D E B U G _S C B
4Port H U B H O ST
M S O K /T P M C h2
D E B U G _U I
C h3
E N G IN E P A N E L
LC D C h4
A T S A M D 2E 15
C on. I2C SPI S C A N IF S C A N IF
C h5
CH0 CH1 D SD F
R EA R U SB
U SB H O ST
R T S 5401 3.0
C h6
DCF
1/2 4Port H U B H O ST C h7
FIN IS H E R
C h9
R EA R U SB UART E FI
U SB 3.0 C h10
M O D EM 0
D EVIC E D E V IC E C h11
M O D EM 1
D D R 3 6G B DDRC
FU S E R FU S E R U N IT
O n-board 4G B 800M hz
D IM M 2G B 32bit
N C TH 1 C /D N C TH 2 C /D
M A G IC 12B it AD C A T S A M D 2E 15
IO ExternalAD C 12b A N A LO G M U X
A N A LO G M U X READ M H V YM C K, TH V YM C K
M P SIZE / PAPER SIZE1,2 / ADC TC YM C K / C TD ,AC R / FU SER / W TB
IN N ER, O U TTER, EXIT, LSU TEM P 1.8V
H U M ID ITY, M O D EL SEL, AC Level E FI V ID E O
P C Iex C O N T R O LLE R
Step M otor FB / 24V FB
* C olor m odel

EN G IN E

STEP M O T
PIC KU P1/2, FEED , REG I, T1 EN G AG E,
D R V 8825
X15
A 3000 M AC0 R T L8211E
G igabit phy
R J45
B ASE

D U PLEX_RET/1/2, SKEW Y/M /C , S I-7321M CTRL.

W TB , FU SER RELEASE, TO N ER SU PPLY X2 R T L8211E R J45
YM /C K, TO N ER RESERVO IR YM /C K, M AC1
A N 44061A G igabit phy EXTEN D
C ST LO C K, X1 O PTIO N KIT

FA N SA TA
SEN SO R EXIT1/2/3/4,SM PS(LX/G X), SA TA
2.5", 320G B
EM PTY 1/2, LIFT1/2, PRE FEED 1/2, FEED C PU , LSU , D EVE,SID E,
REG I, M P_EM PTY/SIZEL/W , C U RL2, FU SER O U T CTRL. G P IO
FU SER IN /O U T, B IN _FU LL_EXIT1/2, PW M
D U PLEX_JAM 1/2, D U PLEX_RETU RN , B LD C 4B E A M LS U
PAPER_SIZE1/2, W ASTE_IN STALL, O PC Y,M ,C ,K/ITB , YM CK
O PC _PH ASE Y/M /C /K, RESERVO IR Y/M /C /K, FU SER LS U C CTRL. LD 1,2,3,4
TO N ER SU P YM /C K, ITB H O M E, FU SER PO S, LSU _M O T1
C O VER O PEN FRO N T/SID E, H V PS VD O 1B _YM C K
SC AN H O M E / APS 1,2 SH U TTER AC R, M H V YM C K
VD O 2B _YM C K
PLATEN C O VER O PEN 1,2 D EV D C YM C K H PV C VD O D ATA VD O 3B _YM C K
D EV AC VPP YM C K
VD O 4B _YM C K
S O LE N O ID / C LT D EV AC
C LT : M P D EV AC EN YM C K
SO L : M P / EXIT TH V1 YM C K
TH V2(C V/C C ) / TH V eM M C
DC M OT C LEAN MMC CTRL. 4G B
AC R SH U TTER, C ST LO C K 1/2 SAW / FU SER B IAS B oot D evice

Main controller clock diagram

Figure 4-86 Clock diagram

32.768Khz
M 41T81
Crystal Input RTC w ith IRQ

12M hz
RTS5401 A3000 CH 0_CLK_P(800M hz)
Crystal
U SB3.0 H U B D D R3 2G B
Input D D R3 C H 0 CH 0_CLK_N
(4G b*8*4ea)

RTC D D R3 2G B
(4G b*8*4ea)
CH 1_CLK_P(800M hz) D D R3 2G B
N .C
12M hz
ASM 3P2863 Clk0 D D R3 C H 1 CH 1_CLK_N (4G b*8*4ea)
CLK_M A IN (Spread 12M hz)
Crystal Clk1
Input CLK_PU RE(Reference 12M hz)
Sel Clk2 D D R3 2G b_tem p
(4G b*8*4ea)

M AC 0
SA TA _REFCLK_P(100M hz) M A C0_G TX_CLK(125M hz)
25M hz ID T6U 41362 D IF_CLK_P N ETW O RK PH Y 12M hz
Crystal SA TA _REFCLK_N
Input D IF_CLK_N M A C0_RX_CLK(125M hz) RTL8211 Crystal
Input

PCI_REFCLK_P(100M hz)
M AC 1 N ETW O RK O PTIO N PBA
D IF_CLK_P M A C1_G TX_CLK(125M hz)
PCI_REFCLK_N N ETW O RK PH Y 12M hz
D IF_CLK_N M A C1_RX_CLK(125M hz) RTL8211 Crystal
Input

CLK_M A IN _CCD M _P(35M hz)

U SB3D _REFCLK_P(100M hz) CCD M
25M hz ID T6U 41362 D IF_CLK_P CLK_M A IN _CCD M _N
Crystal U SB3D _REFCLK_N
Input D IF_CLK_N SC AN 0 RX_CLK_CCD M _P(35M hz)
RX_CLK_CCD M _N

U SB3H _REFCLK_P(100M hz) CLK_M A IN _D CIS_P(35M hz)

D IF_CLK_P
U SB3H _REFCLK_N D CIS
D IF_CLK_N SC AN 1 CLK_M A IN _D CIS_N
RX_CLK_D CIS_P(35M hz)
RX_CLK_D CIS_N

ENWW Hardware 247

 Connections

1 OUTPUT 12 FINISHER 23 Laser scanner 34 DCIS

assembly 1 COLOR

2 FUSER DRIVE 13 OPC CRUM/T1 24 Laser scanner 35 CCDM

assembly 2 COLOR

3 FUSER DRAWER 14 OPC HOME SENS 25 HVPS COLOR 36 Flow ADF

4 TB/CRUM 15 OPC BLDC COLOR 26 USB HOST 1/2 37 HDD POWER

5 TONER SUP/RES 16 TC SENS/RES FULL 27 USB DEVICE 38 HDD SIGNAL

6 CPR_CTD COLOR 17 LVPS TYPE5 28 NETWORK 39 CPU FAN

7 Registration 18 HVPS POWER/ 29 EFI POWER 40 SIDE FAN

assembly/T1 POS Laser scanner
SENS assembly SKEW

8 PICKUP 1/2 19 LVPS TYPE4 30 FIH JOINT 41 MSOK

9 FEED/Registration 20 FRONT IF COLOR 31 HUB IF 42 FAX JOINT

assembly MOT

10 SIDE 21 Fuser drive board 32 USB HOST/HUB 43 EFI SIGNAL

IF

11 dual cassette 22 Laser scanner 33 UI IF 44 2ND NETWORK

feeder (DCF) IF assembly PD

45 DDR3 DIMM

248 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

Main controller connection information (E82540, E82550, E82560)

Figure 4-87 Connection information (E82540, E82550, E82560)

Connections

1 OUTPUT 12 OPC BLDC MONO 23 FIH JOINT 34 FAX JOINT

2 FUSER DRIVE 13 LVPS TYPE5 24 HUB IF 35 2ND NETWORK

3 FUSER DRAWER 14 LVPS TYPE3R 25 USB HOST/HUB 36 EFI SIGNAL

4 TB/DEVE/CRUM 15 FRONT IF MONO 26 UI IF 37 DRR3 DIMM

5 TONER SUP_/RES 16 Fuser drive board 27 DCIS 38 CPU FAN

IF

6 CTD/Registration 17 Laser scanner 28 CCDM

assembly SENS assembly MONO

7 PICKUP 1/2 18 HVPS MONO 29 Flow ADF

8 FEED/Registration 19 USB HOST 1/2 30 HDD POWER

assembly MOT

9 SIDE 20 USB DEVICE 31 HDD SIGNAL

ENWW Hardware 249

 10 dual cassette 21 NETWORK 32 SIDE FAN
feeder (DCF) IF

11 FINISHER 22 EFI POWER 33 MSOK

Master system operation key (MSOK)

MSOK PCA is used to store all system information and consists of serial flash memory, an EEPROM, and a X-
CRUM. The flash memory (4 MB), EEPROM (256 KB) and X-CRUM are used for all system operations such as
system parameter, device status, tech information, and service information.

NOTE: When a main board needs to be exchanged, reinstall the MSOK PCA to the new main board to retain
the system information.

IMPORTANT: Do not lose or damage the MSOK chip. It must be installed on the replacement main board in
the same orientation as when it was removed in order for the printer to function.

Figure 4-88 MSOK

Connection

1 Main PCA I/F connector

USB HUB PCA

The USB Hub PCA is used to interface with the main board, UI, USB memory stick, NFC, and the wireless
module. The USB Hub PCA interfaces through USB communication.

Figure 4-89 USB HUB PCA

250 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

Connections

1 MAIN Board I/F connector

2 Control panel I/F connector

3 Power input connector

4 Control panel power

5 Speaker

6 External USB host slot

7 External USB host slot

8 WLAN/NFC

ENWW Hardware 251

 Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 5)

NOTE: Some models have three LVPS boards. (Type5 x 1 each, Type4 x 2 each)

The low voltage power supply (LVPS) board supplies electric power to the main board and other boards. The
voltage provided includes +5 V, and +24 V from a 110 V/220 V power input. It has safety protection modes for
over current and overload.

Figure 4-90 LVPS PCA (Type 5)

Specification
● General input/output voltage

◦ AC 110 V (110 V — 127 V)

◦ AC 220 V (220 V — 240 V)

◦ Input current: 8.0 A (110 V)/5.0 A (220 V)

◦ Output power: 275 W

● DC 5 V: 35 W

● DC 24 V: 240 W

Information

110 V 220 V

Part number SAM-JC44-00249A SAM-JC44-00250A

Part name PSPN2-TYPE5-V1 PSPN2-TYPE5-V2

Connections

1 INPUT_AC

2 OUTPUT_DC +24 V 1/2/3/4 (to Main PCA)

252 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 3 24 V on/off

4 OUTPUT_DC +5 V 1/2 (to Main PCA)

Input/output connector
● AC input connector (CN1)

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 AC_L AC input

2 AC_N

● DC output connector (CN2)

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 +5V1 Power

2 GND 5 V ground

3 +5V2 Power

4 GND 5 V ground

● DC output connector (CN3)

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 +24V1 Power

2 GND 24 V ground

3 +24V2 Power

4 GND 24 V ground

5 +24V3 Power

6 GND 24 V ground

7 +24V4 Power

8 GND 24 V ground

● Signal Connector (CN4)

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 GND Active Low

2 24 V On/Off

3 GND

Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 3) (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560)

NOTE: Some models have three LVPS boards. (Type5 x 1 each, Type4 x 1 each, Type3 x 1 each)

ENWW Hardware 253

 The low voltage power supply (LVPS) board supplies electric power to the main board and other boards. The
voltage provided includes +5 V, and +24 V from a 110 V/220 V power input. It has safety protection modes for
over current and overload.

Figure 4-91 LVPS PCA (Type 3) (E82540, E82550, E82560)

Specification
● General input/output voltage

◦ AC 110 V (110 V — 127 V)

◦ AC 220 V (220 V — 240 V)

◦ Input current: 10.0 A (110 V)/8.0 A (220 V)

◦ Output power: 164 W

● DC 5 V: 20 W

● DC 24 V: 144 W

Connections

1 INPUT_AC Power (CON1)

2 Fuser AC Power (CON2) / Not available for Diamond/Ruby

3 OUTPUT_DC +24 V 1/2/3 and +5V1 (CON3)

4 Signal_24 V on/off, Relay on, Fuser on (CON4)

Input/output connector
● AC input connector (CN1)

254 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 PIN assign PIN name Description

1 AC_L AC input

2 AC_N

● Fuser AC Power Connector (CN2) — N/A for Diamond/Ruby

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 AC_L AC input for fuser

2 AC_N

● DC output connector (CN3)

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 +5V1 DC 5 V

2 GND Ground

3 +24V1 DC 24 V

4 GND Ground

5 +24V2 DC 24 V

6 GND Ground

7 +24V3 DC 24 V

● Signal Connector (CN4)

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 GND Ground

2 24 V On/Off Active Low

3 Relay on Active High

4 24 V Bias for photo triac, relay

5 Fuser on Active High

Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 4)

NOTE: Some models have three LVPS boards. (Type5 x 1 each, Type4 x 2 each)

The low voltage power supply (LVPS) board supplies electric power to the main board and other boards. The
voltage provided includes +5 V, and +24 V from a 110 V/220 V power input. It has safety protection modes for
over current and overload.

ENWW Hardware 255

 Figure 4-92 LVPS PCA (Type 4)

Specification
● General input/output voltage

◦ AC 110 V (110 V — 127 V)

◦ AC 220 V (220 V — 240 V)

◦ Input current: 6.3 A (110 V)/5 A (220 V)

◦ Output power: 205 W

● DC 5 V: 25 W

● DC 24 V: 180 W

Connections

1 INPUT_AC

2 OUTPUT_DC +24 V1/2/3 and DC +5 V 1/2 (to Main PCA)

3 24 V on/off

Input/output connector
● AC input connector (CN1)

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 AC_L AC input

2 AC_N

● DC output connector (CN4)

256 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 PIN assign PIN name Description

1 +5V1 Power

2 GND 5 V ground

3 +5V2 Power

4 GND 5 V ground

5 +24V1 Power

6 GND 24 V ground

7 +24V2 Power

8 GND 24 V ground

9 +24V3 Power

● Signal Connector (CN3)

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 GND Active Low

2 24 V On/Off

3 GND

Fuser drive board

This board supplies voltage to the fuser AC, heater, and main board.

Figure 4-93 Fuser drive board

ENWW Hardware 257

 Connections

1 Option Heater

2 Fuser Lamp

3 Fuser drive board I/F

4 LVPS (Type 5)

5 Main Switch

6 AC Inlet

7 Option Heater Switch

8 LVPS (Type 4)

9/10 Reactor

High voltage power supply (HVPS) PCA (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)

The HVPS board generates 15 high-voltage channels, including ITHV (4), MHV (4), DEV (4), FUSER, SAW, and
2THV(+/-).

Figure 4-94 HVPS PCA (E87640, E87650, E87660)

Specification
● Input voltage: DC 24 V, 3.3 V

● Output voltage:

258 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 ◦ MHV Y/M/C/K: -1395 V

◦ DEVE DC Y/M/C/K: -606 V

◦ DEV AC Y/M/C/K: Vpp 920 V

◦ THV1 Y/M/C/K: 45.5 uA

◦ THV2+(CV): 2020 V

◦ THV2+(CC): 25.5 uA

◦ THV2–: –1310 V

◦ FUSER: 998 V

◦ SAW: -998 V

Connections

Table 4-4 CN1

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 DETECT

2 PWM_ITHV_C PWM signal

3 PWM_ITHV_K PWM signal

4 PWM_ITHV_M PWM signal

5 READ_ITHV_C Output voltage

6 PWM_ITHV_Y PWM signal

7 READ_ITHV_K Output voltage

8 READ_ITHV_M Output voltage

9 PWM_FUSEBIAS PWM signal

10 READ_ITHV_Y Output voltage

11 PWM_SAW PWM signal

12 READ_MHV_Y Output voltage

13 PWM_THV2_MINUS PWM signal

14 READ_MHV_M Output voltage

15 PWM_THV2_P_CV PWM signal

16 READ_MHV_C Output voltage

17 READ_THV2 Output voltage

18 PWM_MHV_Y PWM signal

19 PWM_DEVE_DC_K PWM signal

20 PWM_MHV_M PWM signal

21 PWM_DEVE_AC_VPP_K PWM signal

22 PWM_MHV_C PWM signal

ENWW Hardware 259

 Table 4-4 CN1 (continued)

PIN assign PIN name Description

23 PWM_DEVE_DC_C PWM signal

24 PWM_MHV_K PWM signal

25 PWM_DEVE_AC_VPP_C PWM signal

26 PWM_THV2_P_CC PWM signal

27 PWM_DEVE_DC_M PWM signal

28 THV2_CV_SELECT Input signal

29 PWM_DEVE_AC_VPP_M PWM signal

30 N.C

31 PWM_DEVE_DC_Y PWM signal

32 READ_MHV_K Output voltage

33 PWM_DEVE_AC_VPP_Y PWM signal

34 PWM_DEVE_AC_VFREQ PWM signal

35 DETECT

Table 4-5 CN2

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 24 V Input voltage

2 24 V Input voltage

3 24 V Input voltage

4 3.3 V Input voltage

5 GND GND

6 GND GND

7 GND GND

8 READ_HVPS_24 Output voltage

9 nEN_DEVE_AC_Y nEN signal

10 nEN_DEVE_AC_M nEN signal

11 nEN_DEVE_AC_C nEN signal

12 nEN_DEVE_AC_K nEN signal

Assign PIN name Description

CN3 ITHV Y/M/C/K Output voltage

CN5 2THV +/- Output voltage

CN6 MHV Y Output voltage

CN7 MHV M Output voltage

260 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 Assign PIN name Description

CN8 MHV C Output voltage

CN9 MHV K Output voltage

CN10 DEVE Y Output voltage

CN11 DEVE M Output voltage

CN12 DEVE C Output voltage

CN13 DEVE K Output voltage

Table 4-6 CN4

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 FUSER_BIAS Output voltage

2 SAW_PLATE Output voltage

Eraser PCA (color models)

The eraser PCA has one LED. The LED is used for erasing the negative charges on the surface of the drum after
printing.

Figure 4-95 Eraser PCA (color models)

High voltage power supply (HVPS) board (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560)

The HVPS generates five high-voltage channels including FUSER, SAW, DEV, AC/DC, THV+/-, and MHV.

ENWW Hardware 261

 Figure 4-96 HVPS PCA (E82540, E82550, E82560)

Specification
● Input voltage: DC 24 V, 3.3 V

● Output voltage:

◦ MHV: –1387 V

◦ DEV DC: –603 V, AC: Vpp 960 V

◦ THV+(CC/CV): 25.6 uA/2045 V, THV-: –1295 V

◦ SAW: –990 V

◦ FUSER: 400 V

Connections

Table 4-7 CN1

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 DETECT

2 24 V Input voltage

3 24 V Input voltage

4 ADC_HVPS_24 Signal

5 24 V Input voltage

6 GND GND

7 GND GND

8 3.3 V Input voltage

262 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 Table 4-7 CN1 (continued)

PIN assign PIN name Description

9 GND GND

10 OPEN

11 READ_THV+_CV Output voltage

12 PWM_THV+_CV PWM signal

13 PWM_MHV PWM signal

14 THV+_CV_SELECT Input voltage

15 PWM_SAW PWM signal

16 READ_THV Output voltage

17 PWM_THV- PWM signal

18 nEN_DEVE nEN signal

19 PWM_FUSER_BIAS PWM signal

20 PWM_DEV_DC PWM signal

21 PWM_THV+_CC PWM signal

22 PWM_DEV_Vpp PWM signal

23 PWM_DEV_AC PWM signal

24 DETECT

PIN assign PIN name Description

CN2 MHV/SAW Output voltage

CN3 THV +/- Output voltage

CN4 DEV AC/DC Output voltage

CN5 FUSER Output voltage

Eraser PCA (mono models)

The eraser PCA has one LED. The LED is used for erasing the negative charges on the surface of the drum after
printing.

Figure 4-97 Eraser PCA (mono models)

ENWW Hardware 263

 Information
● Part number:

● Part name: PCA-ERASER

Waste Sensor PCA

The waste sensor PCA detects the waste toner level inside the toner collection unit.

Figure 4-98 Waste sensor PCA

Information
● Part number:

● Part name: WASTE SENSOR RX

Paper Size sensor PCA

The paper size sensor PCA is used for detecting the size of the paper in the tray.

Figure 4-99 Paper size sensor PCA

Flow ADF PCA

The flow ADF-PCA uses the R5F562TAEDFP (100 MHz Main Clock) for controlling the flow ADF unit and
interfaces with the main board through UART.

264 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 Figure 4-100 Flow ADF PCA

Scan joint PCA

The scan joint PCA has a Bipolar Step Motor drive IC and interfaces with the WLED, APS sensor (1, 2), cover
open sensor (1, 2), home position sensor, and main board.

The scan joint PCA also functions as the relay board to interface with the ADF I/F and power board.

Figure 4-101 Scan joint PCA

Connections

1 WLED IF PCA

2 MAIN PCA

3 Cover Open 2, Home Sensor

4 ADF/flow ADF PCA

5 Image Scanner Motor

ENWW Hardware 265

 CCDM PCA

The CCDM PCA is used in the scanner unit and converts the reflected light from an original document to
electrical signals. The reflected light from an original document is converted to three-color analog signals:
red, green, and blue. The ADC converts each analog signal to digital. For a high speed data transmission, the
digital data signal is converted to a LVDS format with serialization. The CCDM PCA includes the CCD, ADC, Logic
IC, and so on.

Figure 4-102 CCDM PCA

Connection

1 MAIN PCA

WLED IF PCA

The WLED IF PCA interfaces with the WLED and sensors inside the Image Scanner unit.

Figure 4-103 WLED IF PCA

Connections

1 APS1, APS2 Sensor

2 Cover Open1 Sensor

3 SCAN JOINT PCA

4 WLED PCA

WLED PCA

The WLED PCA consists of two WLEDs used as scanner light.

266 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 Figure 4-104 WLED PCA

Connections

1 WLED PCA

Dual cassette feeder (DCF)

Paper feeding system (rollers and functions)

Figure 4-105 Paper feeding system

Tray number Roller number Roller name Function

4 R1 Pickup roller Transports paper from the paper stack.

4 R2 Separation roller Transports one sheet of paper to the prefeed

roller.

4 R3 Reverse (separation) Makes sure paper is moved one at a time.

roller

4 R4 Prefeed roller Transports paper to the transport roller.

4 R5 Idle roller Makes paper transportation smooth.

4/5 R6 Separation roller Transports one sheet of paper to the basic

machine.

4/5 R7 Idle roller Makes paper transportation smooth.

ENWW Hardware 267

 Tray number Roller number Roller name Function

5 R8 Pickup roller Transports paper from the paper stack.

5 R9 Separation roller Transports one sheet of paper to the prefeed

roller.

5 R10 Reverse (separation) Makes sure paper is moved one at a time.

roller

5 R11 Prefeed roller Transports paper to the transport roller.

5 R12 Idle roller Makes paper transportation smooth.

Paper path

Figure 4-106 Paper path

268 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

Electrical parts locations, part numbers, and connection information

Figure 4-107 Electric parts locations/Connection information

Tray number Callouts Description Part number DC controller PCB

4 S1 Pickup no paper sensor CN502-1 to 3

4 S2 Pickup level sensor CN502-4 to 6

4 S3 Prefeed sensor CN502-7 to 9

4/5 S4 Path sensor CN502-10 to 12

5 S5 Pickup no paper sensor CN501-1 to 3

5 S6 Pickup level sensor CN501-4 to 6

5 S7 Prefeed sensor CN501-7 to 9

4 S8 Paper size sensor CN802-2 to 4

5 S9 Paper size sensor CN802-6 to 8

4 S10 Tray 3 lock home sensor CN701-3 to 5

5 S11 Tray 4 lock home sensor CN701-6 to 8

4/5 SW1 Side door open switch CN601-9 to 10

4 M1 Tray 3 pickup motor CN601-1 to 4

5 M2 Tray 4 pickup motor CN801-1 to 4

4/5 M3 Tray feed motor CN601-5 to 8

4 M4 Tray 3 lock motor CN902-2 to 3

5 M5 Tray 4 lock motor CN902-4 to 5

ENWW Hardware 269

 Sensors and functions

Figure 4-108 Sensors and functions

Tray number Callouts Description Function

4 S1 Pickup no paper sensor Detects paper empty in Tray 3.

4 S2 Pickup level sensor Detects upper limit of lifting-up of Tray

3.

4 S3 Prefeed sensor Detects paper between R2-R3 and R4-5.

4/5 S4 Path sensor Detects paper passing through R6-R7.

5 S5 Pickup no paper sensor Detects paper empty in Tray 4.

5 S6 Pickup level sensor Detects upper limit of lifting-up of Tray

4.

5 S7 Prefeed sensor Detects paper between R9-R10 and

R11-12.

4 S8 Paper size sensor Detects tray insertion and paper size in

Tray 3.

5 S9 Paper size sensor Detects tray insertion and paper size in

Tray 4.

4 S10 Tray 3 lock home sensor Detects home position of Tray 3 locking
unit.

5 S11 Tray 4 lock home sensor Detects home position of Tray 4 locking
unit.

4/5 SW1 Side door open switch Detects opening of right cover.

270 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

PCA connection

Figure 4-109 PCA connection for DCF

Connector number Item number Connection

CN902 1 DC MOTOR I/F

CN801 2 PICK/LIFT4 MOTOR I/F

CN601 3 PICK/LIFT3 & FEED MOTOR I/F

CN701 4 LOCKMOT/MOT LIFT/LCT HOME I/F

CN1001 5 TOPCOVER/OPEN INTERLOCK

CN301 6 MAIN I/F

CN401 7 UART DEBUG I/F

CN402 8 E1 JTAG DEBUG I/F

CN802 9 SENSOR PAPER SIZE

ENWW Hardware 271

 Connector number Item number Connection

CN901 10 HCI INNER DRAWER

CN302 11 SUB I/F

CN1101 12 BBP I/F

CN501 13 T4 SENSOR

CN502 14 T3 SENSOR

High capacity input tray (HCI)

Paper feeding system (rollers and functions)

Figure 4-110 Paper feeding system

Tray number Roller number Roller name Function

4 R1 Pickup roller Transports paper from the paper stack.

4 R2 Separation roller Transports one sheet of paper to the prefeed

roller.

4 R3 Reverse (separation) Makes sure paper is moved one at a time.

roller

4 R4 Prefeed roller Transports paper to the transport roller.

4 R5 Idle roller Makes paper transportation smooth.

4 R6 Separation roller Transports one sheet of paper to the basic

machine.

4 R7 Idle roller Makes paper transportation smooth.

272 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

Paper path

Figure 4-111 HCI paper path

Electrical parts locations, part numbers, and connection information

Figure 4-112 Electric parts locations/connection information

Tray number Callouts Description Part number DC controller PCB

3 S1 Pickup no paper sensor CN502-1 to 3

3 S2 Pickup level sensor CN502-4 to 6

3 S3 Prefeed sensor CN502-7 to 9

ENWW Hardware 273

 Tray number Callouts Description Part number DC controller PCB

3 S4 Path sensor CN502-10 to 12

3 S5 Tray insertion sensor CN901-15 to 17

3 S6 Knockup home sensor CN901-7

3 S7 Main tray level sensor 1 CN901-4

3 S8 Main tray level sensor 2 CN901-5

3 S9 Shift tray no paper sensor CN901-2

3 S10 Shift tray level sensor 1 CN901-10

3 S11 Shift tray level sensor 2 CN901-11

3 S12 Shift plate home sensor CN901-3

3 S13 Shift plate end sensor CN901-6

3 S14 Solenoid home sensor CN901-8

3 SW1 Side door open switch CN601-9 to 10

3 M1 Tray pickup motor CN601-1 to 4

3 M2 Tray feed motor CN601-5 to 8

3 M3 Tray lift up motor CN902-1 to 2

3 M4 Paper shift motor CN902-4 to 5

3 A1 Solenoid CN901-12 to 14

274 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

Sensors and functions

Figure 4-113 HCI sensors and functions

Tray number Callouts Description Function

4 S1 Pickup no paper sensor Detects paper empty in main tray.

4 S2 Pickup level sensor Detects upper limit of lifting up of main

tray.

4 S3 Prefeed sensor Detects paper between R2-R3 and R4-5.

4 S4 Path sensor Detects paper passing through R6-R7.

4 S5 Tray insertion sensor Detects tray insertion.

4 S6 Knockup home sensor Detects home position of knock-plate.

4 S7 Main tray level sensor 1 Detects paper residual paper quantity in

main tray.

4 S8 Main tray level sensor 2 Detects paper residual paper quantity in

main tray.

4 S9 Paper size sensor Detects paper empty in sub tray.

4 S10 Shift tray level sensor 1 Detects paper residual quantity in sub
tray.

4 S11 Shift tray level sensor 2 Detects paper residual quantity in sub
tray.

4 S12 Shift plate home sensor Detects home position of shift plate.

4 S13 Shift plate end sensor Detects end position of shift plate.

ENWW Hardware 275

 Tray number Callouts Description Function

4 S14 Solenoid home sensor Detects home position of solenoid.

4 SW1 Side door open switch Detects opening of solenoid.

PCA connection

Figure 4-114 HCI PCA connection

Connector number Item number Connection

CN902 1 DC MOTOR I/F

CN801 2 PICK/LIFT4 MOTOR I/F

CN601 3 PICK/LIFT3 & FEED MOTOR I/F

CN701 4 LOCKMOT/MOT LIFT/LCT HOME I/F

CN1001 5 TOPCOVER/OPEN INTERLOCK

CN301 6 MAIN I/F

CN401 7 UART DEBUG I/F

CN402 8 E1 JTAG DEBUG I/F

276 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 Connector number Item number Connection

CN802 9 SENSOR PAPER SIZE

CN901 10 HCI INNER DRAWER

CN302 11 SUB I/F

CN1101 12 BBP I/F

CN501 13 T4 SENSOR

CN502 14 T3 SENSOR

Side high capacity input tray (sHCI)

Paper feeding system (rollers and functions)

Figure 4-115 Paper feeding system

Roller number Roller name Function

R1 Pickup roller Transports paper from the paper stack.

R2 Separation roller Transports one sheet of paper to the prefeed roller.

ENWW Hardware 277

 Roller number Roller name Function

R3 Reverse (separation) roller Makes sure paper is moved one at a time.

R4 Idle roller Transports paper to the transport roller.

R5 Separation roller Makes paper transportation smooth.

Paper path

Figure 4-116 sHCI paper path

278 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

Electrical parts locations, part numbers, and connection information

Figure 4-117 sHCI electric parts locations/connection information

Callouts Description Part number DC controller PCB

S1 Pickup no paper sensor CN502-1 to 3

S2 Pickup level sensor CN502-4 to 6

ENWW Hardware 279

 Callouts Description Part number DC controller PCB

S3 Prefeed sensor CN502-7 to 9

S4 Paper level sensor 1 CN501-4 to 6

S5 Paper level sensor 2 CN501-1 to 3

S6 Install sensor 1 CN701-3 to 5

S7 Install sensor 2 CN701-6 to 8

SW1 Top door open switch CN1001-1 to 2

M1 Tray pickup motor CN601-1 to 4

M2 Tray feed motor CN601-5 to 8

M3 Tray lift up motor CN701-1 to 2

280 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

Sensors and functions

Figure 4-118 Sensors and functions

Callouts Description Function

S1 Pickup no paper sensor Detects paper empty in tray.

S2 Pickup level sensor Detects upper limit of lifting up of main tray.

ENWW Hardware 281

 Callouts Description Function

S3 Prefeed sensor Detects paper between R2-R3 and R4-5.

S4 Paper level sensor 1 Detects paper residual paper quantity in tray.

S5 Paper level sensor 2 Detects paper residual paper quantity in tray.

S6 Install sensor 1 Detects installation of SL-sHCI501S to the basic

machine.

S7 Install sensor 2 Detects installation of SL-sHCI501S to the basic

machine.

SW1 Top door open switch Detects opening of the top door.

M1 Tray pickup motor Drives the pickup roller.

M2 Tray feed motor Drives the transport roller

M3 Tray lift up motor Lifts up the tray.

PCA connection

Figure 4-119 sHCI PCA connection

Connector number Item number Connection

CN902 1 DC MOTOR I/F

CN801 2 PICK/LIFT4 MOTOR I/F

CN601 3 PICK/LIFT3 & FEED MOTOR I/F

282 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 Connector number Item number Connection

CN701 4 LOCKMOT/MOT LIFT/sHCI HOME I/F

CN1001 5 TOPCOVER/OPEN INTERLOCK

CN301 6 MAIN I/F

CN401 7 UART DEBUG I/F

CN402 8 E1 JTAG DEBUG I/F

CN802 9 SENSOR PAPER SIZE

CN901 10 sHCI INNER DRAWER

CN302 11 SUB I/F

CN1101 12 BBP I/F

CN501 13 T4 SENSOR

CN502 14 T3 SENSOR

Finisher system (Inner finisher)

Sectional view

Figure 4-120 Finisher system—sectional view

Table 4-8 Finisher system—sectional view

Item Description Item Description

1 Entrance sensor 7 Jam Door Open Sensor

2 Passthru Sensor 8 Front Door Open Sensor

3 Paddle Home Sensor 9 Stacker Tray Home Sensor

4 Tamper Home_F Sensor 10 Paper Separation roller

5 Tamper Home_R Sensor 11 Paper Exit roller

6 Eject Home Sensor 12 Turning Knob

ENWW Hardware 283

 Paper path

Figure 4-121 Finisher system—paper path

Table 4-9 Finisher system—paper path

Item Description

1 Finisher Main Tray – Staple/Offset/Punch

2 Finisher Top Tray – Stack only

PCA connection information

Figure 4-122 Finisher system—PCA connection information

Table 4-10 Finisher system—PCA connection information

No. Connection

1 CN3: REAR Joint I/F

2 CN1: REAR Sensor

3 CN1 : Traverse Mid Sensor

4 CN8: Debug

5 CN2: REAR I/F

6 CN7: FRONT I/F

284 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 Table 4-10 Finisher system—PCA connection information (continued)

No. Connection

7 CN6: Stacker Switch

8 CN9: Solenoid

9 CN4: Ejector & Supporter I/F

10 CN5: Main I/F

ENWW Hardware 285

 Finisher system (Stapling/Booklet finisher)

Finisher sectional view

Sensor location

Figure 4-123 Sensor locations

Table 4-11 Sensor locations

Item Name Item Name

1 IPTU Entrance Sensor 10 Main Tray Upper Level Sensor (Emitter)

2 IPTU Output Sensor 11 Feed Buffer Output Sensor

3 Feed Entrance Paper Sensor 12 Feed Booklet Entrance Sensor

4 Diverter Home Sensor 13 Stacker Full Sensor

5 Feed Main Output Sensor 14 Booklet Tray Paper Sensor (Detector)

6 Feed Top Output Sensor 15 Booklet Tray Paper Sensor (Emitter)

286 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 Table 4-11 Sensor locations (continued)

Item Name Item Name

7 Sub Tray Full Sensor (Detector) 16 Fold Output Paper Sensor

8 Sub Tray Full Sensor (Emitter) 17 Booklet Compile Paper Sensor

9 Main Tray Upper Level Sensor (Detector)

Roller location

Figure 4-124 Roller location

Table 4-12 Roller location

Item Name Item Name

1 Top Output Roller 8 TB Entrance Roller

2 Top Middle Roller 9 Feed Buffer Output Roller

3 Finisher Compile Output Roller 10 BM Compile Output Roller

ENWW Hardware 287

 Table 4-12 Roller location (continued)

Item Name Item Name

4 Middle Roller 11 BM Folding Roller

5 Entrance Roller 12 BM C-Folding Roller

6 TB Output Roller 13 BM Folding Output Roller

7 TB Middle Roller

Jam removal guide

Figure 4-125 Jam removal guide

Table 4-13 Jam removal guide

Item Name Item Name

1 Top Door Guide 6 SD Jam Clear Cover

288 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 Table 4-13 Jam removal guide (continued)

Item Name Item Name

2 IPTU Door 7 Booklet Feed Jam Clear Cover

3 Booklet Module 8 BM C-Folding Roller Knob

4 Middle Roller Knob 9 Booklet Lower Feed Jam Clear Cover

5 Feed Buffer Output Roller Knob

Paper path

Figure 4-126 Paper path

Table 4-14 Paper path

Item Name

1 Finisher Main Tray - Staple & Punch (Optional)

ENWW Hardware 289

 Table 4-14 Paper path (continued)

Item Name

2 Finisher Top Tray - Punch (Optional)

3 Booklet Tray – Folding & Staple

290 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

Electrical parts layout

Finisher and booklet module

Figure 4-127 Electrical parts layout (1 of 2)

ENWW Hardware 291

 Figure 4-128 Electrical parts layout (2 of 2)

Table 4-15 Electrical parts layout

Item Part code Description Function

S1 SENSOR-RP A: PS12 2GD4 A Feed Entrance Paper Sensor

S2 PHOTO SENSOR: KIT5033C Feed Top Output Sensor

S3 SENSOR-RP A: PS12 2GD4 A Feed Main Output Sensor

S4 SENSOR-RP A: PS12 2GD4 A Feed Buffer Output Sensor

S5 PHOTO SENSOR: KIT5033C Diverter Home Sensor

S6 PHOTO SENSOR: KIT5033C Buffer Home Sensor

S7 PHOTO SENSOR: KIT5033C Rear Tamper Home Sensor

292 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 Table 4-15 Electrical parts layout (continued)

Item Part code Description Function

S8 PHOTO SENSOR: KIT5033C Front Tamper Home Sensor

S9 AS-SENSOR: KIT5011C EF Home Sensor

S10 PHOTO SENSOR: KIT5033C Main Paddle Home Sensor

S11 PHOTO SENSOR: KIT5033C Main Tray Front Level Sensor

S12 PHOTO SENSOR: KIT5033C Main Tray Rear Level Sensor

S13 PHOTO SENSOR: KIT5033C SCU Home Sensor

S14 AS-SENSOR: KIS9009H Main Tray Upper Level Sensor (Detector)

S15 AS-SENSOR: LIS9008H Main Tray Upper Level Sensor (Emitter)

S16 PHOTO SENSOR: KIT5033C Main Tray Encoder Sensor

S17 PHOTO SENSOR: KIT5033C Offline Staple Position Sensor

S18 PHOTO SENSOR: KIT5033C Stapler Move Offline Sensor

S19 PHOTO SENSOR: KIT5033C Stapler Move Home Sensor

S20 PHOTO SENSOR: KIT5033C Stapler Move Mid-Rear Sensor

S21 PHOTO SENSOR: KIT5033C Stapler Move Mid-Front Sensor

S22 PHOTO SENSOR: KIT5033C Stacker Full Sensor

S23 AS-SENSOR: KIS9009H Booklet Tray Paper Sensor (Detector)

S24 AS-SENSOR: LIS9008H Booklet Tray Paper Sensor (Emitter)

S25 PHOTO SENSOR: KIT5033C Grip Home Sensor

S26 PHOTO SENSOR: KIT5033C PE EJT Home Sensor

S27 PHOTO SENSOR: KIT5033C PE EJT Away Sensor

S28 SENSOR-RP A: PS12 2GD4 A Compile Paper Sensor

S29 PHOTO SENSOR: KIT5033C GE Encoder Sensor

S30 PHOTO SENSOR: KIT5033C PE Encoder Sensor

S31 PHOTO SENSOR: KIT5033C Feed Booklet Entrance Sensor

S32 PHOTO SENSOR: KIT5033C TE Presser Home Sensor

S33 PHOTO SENSOR: KIT5033C Blade Home Sensor

S34 SENSOR-RP A: PS12 2GD4 A Fold Output Paper Sensor

S35 PHOTO SENSOR: KIT5033C Separate Pawl Home Sensor

S36 PHOTO SENSOR: KIT5033C Guide Home Sensor

S37 PHOTO SENSOR: KIT5033C Booklet Paddle Home Sensor

S38 PHOTO SENSOR: KIT5033C Booklet Tamper Home Sensor

S39 SENSOR-RP A: PS12 2GD4 A Booklet Compile Paper Sensor

S40 PHOTO SENSOR: KIT5033C Stopper Home Sensor

ENWW Hardware 293

 Table 4-15 Electrical parts layout (continued)

Item Part code Description Function

S41 AS-SENSOR: KIS9009H Sub Tray Full Sensor(Detector)

S42 AS-SENSOR: LIS9008H Sub Tray Full Sensor(Emitter)

SW1 MICRO SWITCH: D3V-16506-3C25 Front Door I/L Switch

SW2 MICRO SWITCH: D3V-16506-3C25 Top Door I/L Switch

SW3 MICRO SWITCH: D3V-16-3C25 Stacker Upper Limit Switch

P1 3K MAIN PCA Finisher Main PCA

P2 SWITCH PCA Offline Staple OP PCA

P3 BOOKLET PCA Booklet Main PCA

M1 ASSY: HB MOTOR: S3M15T Feed Entrance Motor

M2 ASSY: HB MOTOR: S3M15T Feed Output Motor

M3 ASSY: PM MOTOR: M0.5Z18 Buffer Motor

M4 ASSY: PM MOTOR: S2M12T End Fence Motor

M5 ASSY: PM MOTOR: S2M12T Main Paddle Motor

M6 ASSY: PM MOTOR: S2M12T Front Tamper Motor

M7 ASSY: PM MOTOR: S2M12T Rear Tamper Motor

M8 AS-MOTOR DC EJECTOR: S3M10T Grip-Eject Motor

M9 AS-MOTOR DC EJECTOR: S3M10T Pre-Eject Motor

M10 ASSY: PM MOTOR: M0.4Z17 SCU Motor

M11 ASSY: 3657 DC MOTOR: S2M14T Main Tray Moving Motor

M12 ASSY: HB MOTOR: S3M20T Stapler Move Motor

M13 ASSY: PM MOTOR: S2M20T Booklet Feed Entrance Motor

M14 ASSY: PM MOTOR: M0.5Z18 TE Presser Motor

M15 ASSY: PM MOTOR: M0.5Z18 Booklet Tamper Motor

M16 ASSY: PM MOTOR: M0.5Z18 Stopper Moving Motor

M17 ASSY: PM MOTOR: S2M12T Separate Pawl Motor

M18 MOTOR BLDC-MAIN Folding Roller Motor

M19 MOTOR BLDC-MAIN Blade Motor

M20 ASSY: PM MOTOR: M0.5Z17 C Fold Motor

M21 ASSY: PM MOTOR: M0.5Z18 Booklet Paddle Motor

M22 SOLENOID: TDS-AS-315 Stopper Solenoid

294 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

IPTU

Figure 4-129 IPTU

Table 4-16 IPTU

Item Part code Description Function

M23 ASSY: HB MOTOR: S3M15T IPTU Feed Motor

S43 PHOTO SENSOR: KIT5033C IPTU Door Sensor

S44 SENSOR-RP A: PS12 2GD4 A IPTU Entrance Sensor

S45 PHOTO SENSOR: KIT5033C IPTU Output Sensor

Punch unit

Figure 4-130 Punch unit

Table 4-17 Punch unit

Item Part code Description Function

M24 AS-HB MOTOR: M05Z18 Punch Scan Motor

ENWW Hardware 295

 Table 4-17 Punch unit (continued)

Item Part code Description Function

S46 AS-SENSOR: KIT5011C Punch Scan Home Motor

S47 AS-SENSOR: PS-R11D1-B Hole Punch Hopper Sensor

P4 AS-PCB PUNCH Punch PCA

P5 AS-PCB PUNCH SENSOR Punch Scan Sensor PCA

Each unit functions

Figure 4-131

Item Unit Function

1 Frame unit Finisher main frame and exterior.

2 Stapler unit Device used for putting staples in to sheets of paper.

296 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 (continued)

Item Unit Function

3 Feed unit Transports the paper to the compile and eject unit.

4 Compile unit Compiles the paper.

5 Eject unit Transports the stacked paper to the tray.

6 Stacker unit Stacks the stapled papers on the tray.

7 Booklet unit Folds paper, completes stapling jobs, and transports paper to
the tray.

8 IPTU Transports the paper from the main machine to the finisher
entrance.

9 Punch unit Device used for punching on the paper.

PCA connection information

Finisher PCA

Figure 4-132 Finisher PCA

Table 4-19 Finisher PCA

CN No. Connection CN No. Connection

CN1 PSU, ENGINE INTERFACE CN9 SAFETY SWITCH

CN2 FRONT DOOR SWITCH CN10 STAPLER

ENWW Hardware 297

 Table 4-19 Finisher PCA (continued)

CN No. Connection CN No. Connection

CN3 TOP DOOR SWITCH CN11 EJECTOR

CN4 FRONT PATH CN12 FRONT LOWER

CN5 FRONT COMPILE CN13 SCU

CN6 IPTU CN14 STACKER

CN7 PUNCH CN15 BOOKLET

CN8 REAR UPPER CN16 LOG

Switch PCA

Figure 4-133 Switch PCA

Table 4-20 Switch PCA

CN No. Connection

CN1 Offline Staple LED and Button

Booklet maker PCA

Figure 4-134 Booklet maker PCA

CN No. Connection

CN1 Finisher interface

CN3 Log

298 Chapter 4 Support ENWW

 CN No. Connection

CN4 Stapler/Feed Booklet Entrance Sensor

CN5 Booklet Feed Entrance Motor/TE Presser Motor

CN6 Blade Home Sensor/Booklet Tamper Home Sensor/ Booklet Compile Paper Sensor

CN7 Booklet Paddle Motor/Separate Pawl Motor

CN8 Fold Output Paper Sensor/Guide Home Sensor/C Fold Motor

CN9 Stopper Solenoid/Stopper Moving Motor

CN10 Folding Roller Motor/Blade Motor

ENWW Hardware 299

300 Chapter 4 Support ENWW
5 Service

ENWW 301
 Student performance objectives
Service

Field-replaceable unit (FRU) parts are the primary focus of this module. CSR parts are only shown if it is
necessary to remove them in order to get access to a FRU part. See the Use and maintain module of this
course for directions for removing and replacing CSR parts.

By the completion of this module, learners should be able to:

● Identify challenges associated with removal and replacement procedures.

● Service the printer.

302 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Service overview
Service videos

Use the service videos along with the Repair Manual to assist in the printer teardown. Replace parts in the
reverse order of their removal. In some cases, reinstallation tips or instructions are included in the videos.
The Service Manual details the teardown steps to get to a specific component, and provides steps on how to
replace the component. The Service Manual also includes directions for difficult or critical replacement
procedures.

IMPORTANT: Some of the images and videos in this module show a different printer than the HP LaserJet
Managed MFP E82540, E82550, E82560 and HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87640, E87650, E87660.
Although some of the hardware might be different, the procedures shown are the same.

Some videos in this module might have additional assemblies removed for clarity.

The videos shown in this module follow the procedures described in the printer Repair Manual. The step-by-
step directions have been omitted for clarity, but important information is included using the conventions
listed below.

NOTE: The videos in this module are available on the Services Media Library (SML) at thesml.hp.com. The
videos are available to Service and Support personnel. The videos are not available to customers.

See the Repair Manual for addition details and directions.

Service Part names are listed in English wherever possible to match the part names used when ordering
replacement parts.

Conventions used in this module

The conventions used in this module are the same as those used in the printer Repair Manual:

TIP: Helpful hints or shortcuts.

Reinstallation tip: Reinstallation helpful hints, shortcuts, or considerations.

NOTE: Information that explains a concept or how to complete a task.

IMPORTANT: Information that help the user to avoid potential printer error conditions.

CAUTION: Procedures that the user must follow to avoid losing data or damaging the printer.

WARNING! Procedures that the user must follow to avoid personal injury, catastrophic loss of data, or
extensive damage to the printer.

Identifies components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD).

ENWW Service overview 303

 Service notes
Remove the Output Bin And Bin Base Assembly or the Stapling Mailbox

The videos show a printer with an Output Bin And Bin Base Assembly installed.

Certain procedures require that the Output Bin And Bin Base Assembly be removed.

Input accessories

HP recommends removing the print engine from optional paper feeder input accessories before servicing the
accessory.

See the printer Service Manual for complete service instructions and procedures.

304 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

General service warnings
Flat flexible cables

● Use caution when handling a flat flexible cable (FFC). FFCs can be damaged easily during printer service
and repair.

● FFC connectors are delicate. Be careful not to damage connectors when removing and installing FFCs.

● Do not unnecessarily bend or pinch FFCs.

● Verify FFCs are properly seated during reinstallation. Sometimes it is difficult to determine if a FFC is
fully seated in a connector.

Before performing service

● Remove all media from the printer.

● Turn off the power using the on/off button.

● Unplug the power cable and all interface cables.

● Wait 30 seconds before removing any parts.

● If possible, place the printer on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap. If an ESD workstation,
mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before touching an
ESD-sensitive part.

● Remove the print cartridge or cartridges.

● Remove the tray HCI or HCIs.

Ferrites and ferrite holders

Consult the Repair Manual when removing cables with ferrites. The ferrites and holders can be damaged if
removed or installed improperly. Some of the steps and tips are difficult to show in a video.

Electrostatic discharge

Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Perform service work at an ESD-protected
workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-
metal chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Look for this symbol in the course videos and the
printer Service Manual:

ENWW General service warnings 305

 Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152-mm ((6-in)) shaft length

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

● Needle-nose pliers

● ESD strap (if one is available)

● Penlight

CAUTION: Always use a Phillips screwdriver. Do not use a Pozidriv screwdriver or any motorized screwdriver.
These can damage screws or screw threads.

306 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

For additional service and support
HP service personnel, go to the Service Access Workbench (SAW) at sawpro.glb.itcs.hp.com.

Channel partners, go to HP Channel Services Network (CSN) at www.hp.com/partners/csn.

At these locations, find information on the following topics:

● Install and configure

● Printer specifications

● Up-to-date control panel message (CPMD) troubleshooting

● Solutions for printer issues and emerging issues

● Remove and replace part instructions and videos

● Service advisories

● Warranty and regulatory information

Channel partners, access training materials in the HP University and Partner Learning Center at //
content.ext.hp.com/sites/LMS/HPU.page.

To access HP PartSurfer information from any mobile device, go to partsurfermobile.hp.com/ or scan the
Quick Response (QR) code below.

ENWW For additional service and support 307

 Service approach
CAUTION: When working on the product, do not pick up the unit by the output tray, which will detach under
the weight of the product.

Precautions when replacing parts

Precautions when assembling and disassembling
● Use only HP approved replacement parts. Make sure that the part number, product name, voltage, and
current or temperature ratings are correct. Failure to do so might result in damage to the machine,
circuit overload, fire, or electric shock.

● Do not make unauthorized changes or additions to the printer. Unauthorized changes might cause the
printer to malfunction and create electric shock or fire hazards.

● Use caution when dismantling the unit. Take note of the location of each screw or other part. This printer
contains 19 different screws. Using the wrong screw might lead to system failure, short circuit or electric
shock.

● Do not disassemble the laser scanner assembly. Once the laser scanner assembly is disassembled, dust
might enter the mirror chamber and will seriously degrade print quality. There are no serviceable parts
inside the laser scanner assembly.

● Regularly check the condition of the power cable, plug and socket. Bad contacts might lead to
overheating and fire. Damaged cables might lead to electric shock or unit malfunction.

Precautions when handling PCA

Static electricity might damage a PCA. Use approved, anti-static precautions when handling or storing a PCA.
Service personnel should use grounded ESD straps and/or mats when handling PCAs.

● Precautions when moving and storing a PCA

◦ Keep PCA in a conductive case, anti-static bag, or wrapped in aluminum foil.

◦ Do not store a PCA where it is exposed to direct sunlight.

● Precautions when replacing a PCA

◦ Disconnect power cables before disconnecting other cables.

◦ Do not touch any soldered connections, connector terminals, or other electronic parts when
handling insulated parts.

● Precautions when checking a PCA

◦ Touch a grounded area of the printer chassis to discharge static electric charge before touching a
PCA.

◦ Do not touch a PCA with bare hands or metal objects. Doing so might create a short circuit or cause
electric shock. Use caution when handling a PCA with moving parts such as sensors, motors, or
lamps, as they might become very hot.

308 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

 ◦ Use caution when fitting and removing screws. Watch for hidden screens. Make sure that the
correct screw is used and make sure that when toothed washers are removed, they are refitted in
their original positions.

◦ Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an ESD
workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis
before touching an ESD-sensitive part.

Releasing plastic latches

Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches can break easily; release them carefully.
To remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is latched.

Before performing service

● Remove all paper from the product.

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.

● Unplug the power cable and interface cable or cables.

● Remove any finishing devices and the side HCI, if they are installed.

● Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an ESD
workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before
touching an ESD-sensitive part.

● Remove the toner cartridges.

After performing service

● Plug in the power cable.

● Reinstall the output bin.

● Reinstall the toner cartridges.

● Reinstall the Tray 2 cassette.

● Load paper in the product.

ENWW Service approach 309

 Post-service test
Perform the following tests to verify that the repair or replacement was successful:

Print-quality test
1. Verify that you have completed the necessary reassembly steps.

2. Make sure that the tray contains clean, unmarked paper.

3. Attach the power cord and interface cable or interface cables, and then turn on the product.

4. Print a configuration page.

5. Print a print quality page, and then verify that there are no lines, streaks, banding, or other print quality
defects.

6. Send a print job from the host computer, and then verify that the output meets expectations.

7. Clean the outside of the product with a damp cloth.

Copy-quality test
1. Verify that you have completed the necessary reassembly steps.

2. Ensure that the input tray contains clean, unmarked paper.

3. With the power cord attached to the printer, turn on the printer.

4. Verify that the expected start up sounds occur.

5. Print a configuration page, and then verify that the expected printing sounds occur.

6. Place the configuration page in the document feeder or on the flatbed glass.

7. Print a copy job, and then verify the results.

8. Clean the outside of the printer with a damp cloth.

Fax-quality test (fax models only)

1. Place the configuration page in the document feeder.

2. Type a valid fax number, and send the fax job.

3. Verify that the send quality and the receive quality meet expectations.

Parts removal order

For procedures and/or steps that require identifying the right, left, or rear side of the printer, face the front of
the printer for correct orientation.

Order parts, accessories, and supplies

Ordering

Order supplies and paper www.hp.com/go/suresupply

310 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

 Order genuine HP parts or accessories www.hp.com/buy/parts

or

partsurfer.hp.com

Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.

Order using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) To access, in a supported Web browser on your computer, enter the printer IP
address or host name in the address/URL field. The EWS contains a link to the HP
SureSupply Web site, which provides options for purchasing Original HP supplies.

Orderable parts
Not all of the parts shown in the diagrams in this chapter can be ordered. Refer to the table following the
diagram or the parts lists at the end of this chapter to determine if a part is orderable.

Supplies and accessories

Following are the part numbers for the supplies and accessories available for the printers.

Table 5-1 Supplies and Accessories

Item Description Part number

Supplies

HP Black Managed LJ Toner Cartridge (HP Color Black toner cartridge X3A92-67904
LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)

HP Cyan Managed LJ Toner Cartridge (HP Color Cyan toner cartridge X3A92-67901
LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)

HP Magenta Managed LJ Toner Cartridge (HP Color Magenta toner cartridge X3A92-67902
LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)

HP Yellow Managed LJ Toner Cartridge (HP Color Yellow toner cartridge X3A92-67903
LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)

HP LaserJet Black Developer Unit (HP Color LaserJet Black developer unit SAM-JC96-11603A
MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)

HP LaserJet Cyan Developer Unit (HP Color LaserJet Cyan developer unit SAM-JC96-11602A
MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)

HP LaserJet Magenta Developer Unit (HP Color Magenta developer unit SAM-JC96-11601A
LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)

HP LaserJet Yellow Developer Unit (HP Color LaserJet Yellow developer unit SAM-JC96-11600A
MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)

HP LaserJet Black Imaging Drum Unit (HP Color Black imaging drum X3A92-67905
LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)

HP LaserJet CMY Imaging Drum Unit (HP Color CMY imaging drum X3A92-67906
LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)

HP Managed LJ Toner Collection Unit (HP Color Toner collection unit SAM-JC96-09590A
LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)

HP Black Managed LJ Toner Cartridge (HP LaserJet Black toner cartridge X3A74-67901
MFP E82540, E82550, E82560)

ENWW Service approach 311

 Table 5-1 Supplies and Accessories (continued)

Item Description Part number

HP LaserJet Black Developer Unit (HP LaserJet MFP Black developer unit SAM-JC96-11599A
E82540, E82550, E82560)

HP LaserJet Black Imaging Drum Unit (HP LaserJet Black imaging drum X3A74-67902
MFP E82540, E82550, E82560)

HP Managed LJ Toner Collection Unit (HP LaserJet MFP Toner collection unit SAM-JC96-11638A
E82540, E82550, E82560)

Accessories

Document feeder roller replacement kit Replacement feed rollers for the document feeder X3A83-67917

2 x 520 sheet feeder (Trays 4 and 5) Optional 2x520 sheet feeder (Trays 4 and 5) Y1F98A (new)

Y1F98-67901 (service)

Printer stand Optional stand to support the printer Y1G16A (new)

Includes installation instructions Y1G16-67902 (service)

HP Internal USB Ports Optional two USB ports for connecting third-party B5L28A (new)
devices
B5L28-67902 (service)

Analog Fax Accessory 600 Optional fax accessory CC487A (new)

CC487-67901 (service)

HP Foreign Interface Harness Optional port for connecting third-party devices B5L31A (new)

B5L31-67902 (service)

HP Trusted Platform Module Automatically encrypts all data that passes through F5S62 (new)
the printer
F5S62-61001 (service)

HP Jetdirect 2900nw Print Server USB wireless print server accessory J8031A (new)

J8031-61001 (service)

HP Jetdirect 3000w NFC/Wireless Accessory Wireless Direct Print accessory for “touch” printing J8030A (new)
from mobile devices
J8030-61001

HP LaserJet Keyboard Overlay Kit for Simplified Language-specific, adhesive overlay for the physical A7W12A
Chinese & Traditional Chinese keyboard

(586z only)

HP LaserJet Keyboard Overlay Kit for Swedish Language-specific, adhesive overlay for the physical A7W14A
keyboard
(586z only)

Related documentation and software

HP service personnel, go to the Service Access Work Bench (SAW) at http://h41302.www4.hp.com/km/saw/
home.do.

Channel partners, go to HP Channel Services Network (CSN) at www.hp.com/partners/csn.

312 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Maintenance
Machine cleaning for maintenance
Cleaning the laser scanner assembly window (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660
only)
1. Open the front cover and remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

Figure 5-1 Remove the TCU

2. Remove the laser scanner assembly window cleaning tool located on the front cover.

Figure 5-2 Remove laser scanner assembly window cleaning tool

ENWW Maintenance 313

 3. Insert the laser scanner assembly window cleaning tool into each color entrance.

Figure 5-3 Laser scanner assembly color entrances

4. Slowly remove and reinsert the cleaning tool.

5. Repeat step 4 at least four times for each laser scanner assembly window.

Cleaning the scan glass

▲ Open the flow document feeder unit. Clean the scanner glass (callout 1) using a soft, lint-free, clean
cloth.

314 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

 Figure 5-4 Clean the scanner glass

Cleaning the flow document feeder white bar and CIS

▲ Open the flow document feeder unit. Clean the simplex white bar (callout 1), the CIS (callout 2), and the
duplex white bar (callout 3) using a soft, lint-free, clean cloth.

Figure 5-5 Clean flow document feeder white bar

Cleaning the paper dust stick

The paper dust stick needs to be cleaned after a specified number of pages are printed. A clean the paper dust
stick message will appear. This is when the paper dust stick must be cleaned. Use the following procedure to
complete this task.

1. Open the front door.

Figure 5-6 Front door

ENWW Maintenance 315

 2. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

Figure 5-7 Toner collection unit (TCU)

3. Pull out the paper dust stick.

Figure 5-8 Paper dust stick

4. Remove the paper dust.

Figure 5-9 Paper dust stick, removed

5. Insert the paper dust stick back into the slot.

Figure 5-10 Paper dust stick, insert

6. Insert the toner collection unit (TCU) until it locks in place on each side.

Figure 5-11 Toner collection unit (TCU), insert

7. Close the front door. Make sure the cover is securely closed. If the message still appears, repeat Steps 3
and 4.

Figure 5-12 Front door

316 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Removal and replacement procedures (HP Color LaserJet MFP
E87640, E87650, E87660)
Accessories

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 317
 Removal and replacement: Trusted platform module

CAUTION: ESD-sensitive part.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

318 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Install accessory: HP Foreign interface harness (FIH) solution

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at an
ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from the
replacement part prior to installation.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 319
 NFC Kit Installation

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at an
ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from the
part prior to installation.

320 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Replacement of maintenance parts

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 321
 Toner collection unit (TCU) (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

322 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Imaging drum unit (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)
NOTE: Open the right door to remove the black drum.

CAUTION: Do not grip the waste toner connection when removing the drum unit.

CAUTION: Do not touch the shiny surface on the imaging drum. Cover the drum with a sheet of paper while
it is out of the printer to limit light exposure.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 323
 Developer unit (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)
NOTE: Update the firmware to the latest version before replacing the developer unit.

TIP: Also remove the adjacent drum unit to allow better access to the toner supply pipe.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the valve is fully installed on the toner collection unit connection.

Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the bracket when reinstalling it.

Reinstallation tip: Reinstall the bottom of the bracket first.

NOTE: Do not grip the toner collection unit connection when removing the developer unit.

Reinstallation tip: Hold the toner supply pipe up and out of the way when reinstalling the developer unit.

NOTE: Before filling the developer, shake the silver packet about three times to prevent the developer
powder from scattering.

NOTE: Do not touch the silver roller.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

324 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Fuser unit
CAUTION: The temperature in the vicinity of the fuser becomes heated. To prevent the potential of getting
burned, make sure the fuser unit has cooled before replacing it.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 325
 Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) cleaner (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

NOTE: The screw is captive and cannot be completely removed.

CAUTION: Do not grasp the waste toner connector.

Use care when removing the ITB cleaner as loose toner might be present on the metal shelf along the side of
the cleaner.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

326 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) unit (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

NOTE: The screw is captive and cannot be completely removed.

CAUTION: Do not grasp the waste toner connector.

Use care when removing the ITB cleaner as loose toner might be present on the metal shelf along the side of
the cleaner.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

TIP: Use a magnetized screwdriver to prevent the screws from falling into the printer..

CAUTION: Do not touch the ITB belt and be careful not to damage the it by hitting it on the door during
removal.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 327
 Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers
NOTE: HP recommends that all three rollers are replaced at the same time.

Reinstallation tip: After installing the new rollers, slide the return guide toward the rear of the printer to
prevent paper jams.

NOTE: The figure shows the pickup assembly removed from the printer to more clearly show the positions
of the couplers and rollers.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

328 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Tray 1 pickup/reverse/feed roller
NOTE: The plastic tabs on the edges of the cover might require extra pressure to remove.

NOTE: It is recommended to replace all three rollers at the same time.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 329
 Flow ADF pickup roller assembly
NOTE: The shaft is engaged in the coupler.

330 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Flow ADF separation roller assembly

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 331
 Formatter cover

332 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Accelerator board
CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

NOTE: A connector on the back of the accelerator board holds the board on the formatter.

IMPORTANT: Do not lift the accelerator board by the heat sink.

ENWW Accelerator board 333

 Island of data (IOD)
CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

IMPORTANT: Do not replace the HDD and the island of data (IOD) at the same time. Replace one component,
turn the printer on and off, and then replace the second component.

334 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Formatter hard disk drive (HDD)
IMPORTANT: Do not replace the HDD and the island of data (IOD) at the same time. Replace one component,
turn the printer on and off, and then replace the second component.

ENWW Formatter hard disk drive (HDD) 335

 Formatter
CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

NOTE: A connector on the back of the accelerator board holds the board on the formatter.

IMPORTANT: Do not lift the accelerator board by the heat sink.

IMPORTANT: Do not replace the HDD and the island of data (IOD) at the same time. Replace one component,
turn the printer on and off, and then replace the second component.

IMPORTANT: Do not replace the formatter and the main PCA at the same time. Replace one component,
turn the printer on and off, and then replace the second component.

336 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Control panel
CAUTION: Do not pry against the scanner glass when removing the control-panel bezel.

Reinstallation tip: Align the four tabs at the rear or control panel, and then snap in the control panel.

ENWW Control panel 337

 Keyboard (z models)
CAUTION: Do not pry against the scanner glass when removing the control-panel bezel.

Reinstallation tip: Align the four tabs at the rear or control panel, and then snap in the control panel.

338 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU)

ENWW Intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU) 339

 Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640,
E87650, E87660)

340 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Front top inner cover

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 341
 Front power cover
CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

342 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Front power switch
CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 343
 Output bin

344 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Top right cover
CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 345
 Left cover

346 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Lower rear cover

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 347
 Upper rear cover

348 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Left rear corner cover

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 349
 Right rear cover

350 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Paper dust brush (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 351
 Front cover

352 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Inner front cover (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)
CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 353
 Front cover open sensor (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)
CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

354 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

High voltage power supply (HVPS) board (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650,
E87660)

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 355
 Laser scanner assembly (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)
Reinstallation tip: Align the locator pin on the back of the assembly with the opening in the printer sheet
metal frame to guide the assembly into place. The screw holes on the front of the assembly will line up with
the screw holes in the sheet metal when the assembly is correctly installed.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the laser scanner assembly, make sure that the flat cable that routes
over the top of the assembly does not become trapped under the assembly.

356 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Laser scanner assembly fan (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 357
 Tray 2 (color)

358 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Formatter and cage (ACCESS ONLY)

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 359
 Main board (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)
IMPORTANT: Press in on the center part of the cable connector to release the latch, and then pull the cable
away from the printer to disconnect it. Do not pull on connector without depressing the center latch.

IMPORTANT: Do not lose or damage the MSOK chip. It must be installed on the replacement main board in
the correct orientation in order for the printer to function. The MSOK chip is extremely difficult to replace if it
is lost or damaged.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

360 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Main board and cage (ACCESS ONLY)
IMPORTANT: Press in on the center part of the cable connector to release the latch, and then pull the cable
away from the printer to disconnect it. Do not pull on connector without depressing the center latch.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 361
 Low voltage power supply (LVPS) cover

362 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Low voltage power supply (LVPS) fans
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 363
 Low voltage power supply (LVPS) board 1
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

NOTE: Many of the connectors on this board have retainers attached. Be sure to release the retainer before
attempting to disconnect the connector.

364 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Low voltage power supply (LVPS) board 2
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

NOTE: Many of the connectors on this board have retainers attached. Be sure to release the retainer before
attempting to disconnect the connector.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 365
 Low voltage power supply (LVPS) board 3
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

NOTE: Many of the connectors on this board have retainers attached. Be sure to release the retainer before
attempting to disconnect the connector.

366 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

LVPS board 3 and cage (ACCESS ONLY)
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 367
 Fuser drive board
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

NOTE: Many of the connectors on this board have retainers attached. Be sure to release the retainer before
attempting to disconnect the connector.

Reinstallation tip: Two of the connectors (callout 1) can be mistakenly switched and connected to the
wrong connector on the fuser drive board. If this happens, the printer will not power on. Make sure that the
cables are installed in the correct positions.

368 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage (ACCESS ONLY)
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 369
 Developer fan
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

370 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Lower tray connector

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 371
 Fuser fan
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the fan in the housing and install the replacement fan in the
same orientation.

372 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Main drive unit (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 373
 Alienation motor

374 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Inductor unit
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 375
 Auto closing unit
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

376 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Fuser/output drive unit
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 377
 Right door open sensor
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

378 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Right door open switch
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 379
 Pickup drive unit 1
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

380 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Pickup drive unit 2

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 381
 Feed/Tray 1 drive unit

382 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Registration drive assembly

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 383
 Toner supply drive unit (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)
Reinstallation tip: Transfer the cables from the toner supply drive unit to the replacement part.

384 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Toner supply and toner reservoir motors

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 385
 CRUM connector
Reinstallation tip: Transfer the cables from the toner supply drive unit to the replacement part.

386 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Toner collection unit (TCU) drive (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 387
 Toner collection unit (TCU) sensor (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)
Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

388 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Reservoir unit (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)
CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

NOTE: The toner reservoirs must be removed in this order: black, cyan, magenta, and yellow. If you are
replacing the yellow reservoir, the black, cyan, and magenta reservoirs must all be removed first. Follow the
instructions below to remove only those reservoirs required to reach the target reservoir.

NOTE: The toner reservoirs must be removed in this order: black, cyan, magenta, and yellow. If you are
replacing the yellow reservoir, the black, cyan, and magenta reservoirs must all be removed first.

NOTE: Removing the yellow toner reservoir requires removing the high voltage power supply.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 389
 Auto size sensor

390 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Front cover open sensor (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)
CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 391
 Feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper (ACCESS ONLY)

392 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Right door
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 393
 Fuser out sensor (on the right door)
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

394 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Feed 2 sensor (on the right door)
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 395
 Tray 1(on the right door)
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

CAUTION: The feed roller assembly is still attached to the right door. Do not attempt to remove it
completely.

396 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Tray 1 empty sensor
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

CAUTION: The feed roller assembly is still attached to the right door. Do not attempt to remove it
completely.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 397
 Tray 1 paper length sensor

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

CAUTION: The feed roller assembly is still attached to the right door. Do not attempt to remove it
completely.

398 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Tray 1 solenoid
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

CAUTION: The feed roller assembly is still attached to the right door. Do not attempt to remove it
completely.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 399
 Output unit
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

400 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Return sensor (on the output unit)
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 401
 Duplex 1 sensor (on the output unit)
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

402 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Output 1 bin full sensor (on the output unit)
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 403
 Output gate solenoid (on the output unit)
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

404 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Pickup unit 2
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 405
 Pickup lifting and empty sensor (pickup unit 2)
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

406 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Prefeed sensor 2 (pickup unit 2)
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 407
 Pickup unit 1
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

408 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Pickup lifting and empty sensor (pickup unit 1)
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 409
 Prefeed sensor 1 (pickup unit 1)
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

410 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Registration assembly (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

NOTE: The bushing is flat along the top and bottom edges. Install the bushing so the flat edges match the
keyed opening in the sheet metal.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 411
 Registration sensor assembly (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660)
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

NOTE: The bushing is flat along the top and bottom edges. Install the bushing so the flat edges match the
keyed opening in the sheet metal.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

412 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Internal hard disk drive (HDD)

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP Color LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660) 413
 Removal and replacement procedures (HP LaserJet MFP E82540,
E82550, E82560)
Accessories

414 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Removal and replacement: Trusted platform module

CAUTION: ESD-sensitive part.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 415
 Install accessory: HP Foreign interface harness (FIH) solution

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at an
ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from the
replacement part prior to installation.

416 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

NFC Kit Installation

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at an
ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal
chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive
assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from the
part prior to installation.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 417
 Replacement of maintenance parts

418 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Tray 2 (mono)

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 419
 Toner collection unit (TCU) (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560)

420 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Imaging drum unit (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560)
NOTICE: Do not grip the waste toner connection when removing the drum unit.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 421
 Developer unit (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560)
NOTE: Do not grip the waste toner connection when removing the developer unit.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the developer unit, press on the unit just above the waste toner auger,
and then slide the unit into the printer.

NOTE: Before filling the developer, shake the silver pack about three times to prevent the developer powder
from scattering.

NOTE: When filling the developer, intermittently rock and gently shake the developer from side to side to
avoid overflow.

422 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Fuser unit
CAUTION: The temperature in the vicinity of the fuser becomes heated. To prevent the potential of getting
burned, make sure the fuser unit has cooled before replacing it.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 423
 Paper transfer belt (PTB) (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560)
Reinstallation tip: Before reinstalling the connector cover, roll the wires around the connector to ensure
they are all contained under the cover.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the PTB, slide it all the way to the back of the printer to engage the
prongs on the bottom of the PTB.

NOTE: There is one unused connector on the right door under the PTB.

424 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers
NOTE: HP recommends that all three rollers are replaced at the same time.

Reinstallation tip: After installing the new rollers, slide the return guide toward the rear of the printer to
prevent paper jams.

NOTE: The figure shows the pickup assembly removed from the printer to more clearly show the positions
of the couplers and rollers.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 425
 Tray 1 pickup/reverse/feed roller
NOTE: The plastic tabs on the edges of the cover might require extra pressure to remove.

NOTE: It is recommended to replace all three rollers at the same time.

426 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Flow ADF pickup roller assembly
NOTE: The shaft is engaged in the coupler.

ENWW Removal and replacement procedures (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 427
 Flow ADF separation roller assembly

428 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550,
E82560)

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 429
 Front top inner cover

430 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Front power cover
CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 431
 Front power switch
CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

432 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Output bin

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 433
 Top right cover
CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

434 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Left cover

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 435
 Lower rear cover

436 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Upper rear cover

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 437
 Left rear corner cover

438 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Right rear cover

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 439
 Paper dust brush (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560)

440 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Front cover

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 441
 Inner front cover (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560)
CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

442 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Front cover open sensor (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560)
CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 443
 Low voltage power supply (LVPS) cover

444 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Laser scanner assembly (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560)

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 445
 Developer fan
NOTICE: Do not grip the waste toner connection when removing the drum unit.

NOTE: Do not grip the waste toner connection when removing the developer unit.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the developer unit, press on the unit just above the waste toner auger,
and then slide the unit into the printer.

NOTE: Before filling the developer, shake the silver pack about three times to prevent the developer powder
from scattering.

NOTE: When filling the developer, intermittently rock and gently shake the developer from side to side to
avoid overflow.

Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the fan in the duct and install it in the same orientation when
replacing it.

Reinstallation tip: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

446 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Formatter and cage (ACCESS ONLY)

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 447
 High voltage power supply (HVPS) board (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550,
E82560)

448 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Main board (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560)
IMPORTANT: Press in on the center part of the cable connector to release the latch, and then pull the cable
away from the printer to disconnect it. Do not pull on connector without depressing the center latch.

IMPORTANT: Do not lose or damage the MSOK chip. It must be installed on the replacement main board in
the correct orientation in order for the printer to function. The MSOK chip is extremely difficult to replace if it
is lost or damaged.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 449
 Main board and cage (ACCESS ONLY)
IMPORTANT: Press in on the center part of the cable connector to release the latch, and then pull the cable
away from the printer to disconnect it. Do not pull on connector without depressing the center latch.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

450 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Toner supply drive unit (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560)
IMPORTANT: Press in on the center part of the cable connector to release the latch, and then pull the cable
away from the printer to disconnect it. Do not pull on connector without depressing the center latch.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 451
 CRUM connector (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560)
CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

452 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Low voltage power supply (LVPS) fans
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 453
 Low voltage power supply (LVPS) board 1
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

NOTE: Many of the connectors on this board have retainers attached. Be sure to release the retainer before
attempting to disconnect the connector.

454 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Low voltage power supply (LVPS) board 2
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

NOTE: Many of the connectors on this board have retainers attached. Be sure to release the retainer before
attempting to disconnect the connector.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 455
 Low voltage power supply (LVPS) board 3
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

NOTE: Many of the connectors on this board have retainers attached. Be sure to release the retainer before
attempting to disconnect the connector.

456 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

LVPS board 3 and cage (ACCESS ONLY)
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 457
 Fuser drive board
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

NOTE: Many of the connectors on this board have retainers attached. Be sure to release the retainer before
attempting to disconnect the connector.

Reinstallation tip: Two of the connectors (callout 1) can be mistakenly switched and connected to the
wrong connector on the fuser drive board. If this happens, the printer will not power on. Make sure that the
cables are installed in the correct positions.

458 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage (ACCESS ONLY)

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 459
 Fuser fan
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the fan in the housing and install the replacement fan in the
same orientation.

460 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Main drive unit (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560)
NOTICE: Do not grip the waste toner connection when removing the drum unit.

NOTE: Do not grip the waste toner connection when removing the developer unit.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the developer unit, press on the unit just above the waste toner auger,
and then slide the unit into the printer.

NOTE: Before filling the developer, shake the silver pack about three times to prevent the developer powder
from scattering.

NOTE: When filling the developer, intermittently rock and gently shake the developer from side to side to
avoid overflow.

NOTE: Remove only those screws marked in blue in the figure below.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 461
 Inductor unit
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

462 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Auto closing unit
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 463
 Fuser/output drive unit
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

464 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Right door open sensor
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 465
 Right door open switch
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

466 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Pickup drive unit 1
WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 467
 Pickup drive unit 2

468 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Feed/Tray 1 drive unit
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 469
 Registration drive assembly

470 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Toner collection unit (TCU) sensor (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560)

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 471
 Reservoir unit (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560)
NOTE: Do not grip the waste toner connection when removing the developer unit.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the developer unit, press on the unit just above the waste toner auger,
and then slide the unit into the printer.

NOTE: Before filling the developer, shake the silver pack about three times to prevent the developer powder
from scattering.

NOTE: When filling the developer, intermittently rock and gently shake the developer from side to side to
avoid overflow.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the reservoir assembly, install the tab in the back first, and then
rotate the assembly toward the sheet metal wall over the screw opening.

472 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Auto size sensor

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 473
 Front cover open sensor (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560)
CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

474 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper (ACCESS ONLY)

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 475
 Right door
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

476 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Fuser out sensor (on the right door)
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 477
 Feed 2 sensor (on the right door)
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

478 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Tray 1 unit (on the right door)
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

CAUTION: The feed roller assembly is still attached to the right door. Do not attempt to remove it
completely.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 479
 Tray 1 empty sensor
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

CAUTION: The feed roller assembly is still attached to the right door. Do not attempt to remove it
completely.

480 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Tray 1 paper length sensor

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 481
 Tray 1 solenoid

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

CAUTION: The feed roller assembly is still attached to the right door. Do not attempt to remove it
completely.

482 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Output unit
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 483
 Return sensor (on the output unit)
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

484 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Duplex 1 sensor (on the output unit)
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 485
 Output 1 bin full sensor (on the output unit)
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

486 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Output gate solenoid (on the output unit)
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any residual
energy.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 487
 Internal hard disk drive (HDD)

488 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Pickup unit 2
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 489
 Pickup lifting and empty sensor (pickup unit 2)
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

490 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Prefeed sensor 2 (pickup unit 2)
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 491
 Pickup unit 1
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

492 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Pickup lifting and empty sensor (pickup unit 1)
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 493
 Prefeed sensor 1 (pickup unit 1)
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it completely

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

494 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Registration assembly (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560)
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

NOTE: The bushing is flat along the top and bottom edges. Install the bushing so the flat edges match the
keyed opening in the sheet metal.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 495
 Registration sensor assembly (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560)
CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the tension off
of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

NOTE: The bushing is flat along the top and bottom edges. Install the bushing so the flat edges match the
keyed opening in the sheet metal.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

496 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

High voltage terminal (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560)

NOTICE: Do not grip the waste toner connection when removing the drum unit.

IMPORTANT: Press in on the center part of the cable connector to release the latch, and then pull the cable
away from the printer to disconnect it. Do not pull on connector without depressing the center latch.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

ENWW Replacing the main SVC part (HP LaserJet MFP E82540, E82550, E82560) 497
 Flow (z bundles) document feeder
Document feeder jam access cover

498 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Document feeder input tray

ENWW Flow (z bundles) document feeder 499

 Document feeder contact image sensor (CIS)
Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the CIS front alignment cover for reinstallation; the cover must
reinstalled with the same orientation.

500 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Document feeder front motor
Reinstallation tip:

a. Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.

b. Loosely install the motor mount screws.

c. Install the tension spring.

d. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount screws) is
providing the tension to the belt.

ENWW Flow (z bundles) document feeder 501

 Document feeder rear motors
Reinstallation tip: Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.

TIP: Remove the connector harness from the cable retainer, and then disconnect the connector.

Reinstallation tip:

a. Reinstall the motor on the motor mounting screws, and then lift the gear belt up to engage the motor
pulley.

b. Install the tension spring.

c. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount screws) is
providing the tension to the belt.

Reinstallation tip:

a. Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.

b. Install the tension spring.

c. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount screws) is
providing the tension to the belt.

502 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Document feeder PCA fan
Reinstallation tip: Install the fan with the correct orientation when reinstalling.

ENWW Flow (z bundles) document feeder 503

 Document feeder contact image sensor (CIS) fan

504 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Document feeder ultrasonic sensor with PCA

ENWW Flow (z bundles) document feeder 505

 Document feeder white backing (z bundles)
White backing

1. Open the document feeder cover.

2. Peel the white backing away to remove.

3. Position the new white backing on the scanner glass.

4. Replace any damaged or missing velcro tabs by positioning them on the new white backing.

5. Close the document feeder cover to attach the white backing.

6. Open the cover again and smooth the white backing.

Document feeder white backing (dn bundles)

IMPORTANT: Remove all the tape and foam from the bottom of the document feeder.

506 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Scanner unit (image scanner unit)
Scanner whole unit
IMPORTANT: Note the alignment marks on the hinge stops. Any new document feeder must be reinstalled
with the same alignment.

NOTE: Complete a shading test and a skew alignment after replacing the document feeder unit.

CAUTION: Do not pry against the scanner glass when removing the control-panel bezel.

NOTE: At the front of the scanner, remove the bracket (callout 2) and install it on the new scanner whole
unit.

NOTE: After reassembly, utilize the target to adjust the scanner location as necessary.

Reinstallation tip: Reinstall the scan bed by lowering the left side first and then lower the right. Align the
screw holes on the right, and then install the screws.

Reinstallation tip: Reinstall the lower cover and ensure the cables are routed through the opening for the
control panel and the bracket is properly aligned in the cover.

Reinstallation tip: Align the four tabs at the rear of the control panel, and then snap in the control panel.

ENWW Scanner unit (image scanner unit) 507

 Scan glass

508 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Scanner LED lamp module

ENWW Scanner unit (image scanner unit) 509

 Scanner imaging unit
CAUTION: Do not remove or adjust the other two screws shown as they require factory setting only.

510 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Scan joint board
NOTE: There are two empty connectors.

ENWW Scanner unit (image scanner unit) 511

 Scanner APS sensor

512 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Front cover open switch (HP Color LaserJet MFP E77822, E77825, E77830)

ENWW Scanner unit (image scanner unit) 513

 Scanner front cover open switch (HP LaserJet MFP E72525, E72530, E72535)

514 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Right door open switch

ENWW Scanner unit (image scanner unit) 515

 Dual HCI feeder (DCF)
● Dual HCI feeder (DCF) rear cover

● Dual HCI feeder (DCF) right door

● Dual HCI feeder (DCF) motor

● Dual HCI feeder (DCF) pickup motor

● Dual HCI feeder (DCF) PCA

● Dual HCI feeder (DCF) pickup units

516 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Dual HCI feeder (DCF) rear cover

ENWW Dual HCI feeder (DCF) 517

 Dual HCI feeder (DCF) right door

518 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Dual HCI feeder (DCF) motor

ENWW Dual HCI feeder (DCF) 519

 Dual HCI feeder (DCF) pickup motor

520 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Dual HCI feeder (DCF) PCA

ENWW Dual HCI feeder (DCF) 521

 Dual HCI feeder (DCF) pickup units

522 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Bottom high-capacity input (HCI) tray
Bottom HCI rear cover

Bottom HCI tray feed motor

ENWW Bottom high-capacity input (HCI) tray 523

 Bottom HCI tray pickup motor

524 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Bottom HCI tray PCA

ENWW Bottom high-capacity input (HCI) tray 525

 Bottom HCI tray lift-up motor

526 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Bottom HCI tray shaft motor

ENWW Bottom high-capacity input (HCI) tray 527

 Side high capacity input (sHCI)
sHCI right cover

sHCI cable cover

sHCI rear cover

sHCI feed motor

528 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

sHCI pickup motor

ENWW Side high capacity input (sHCI) 529

 sHCI PCA

530 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

sHCI lift-up motor

ENWW Side high capacity input (sHCI) 531

 Inner finisher
Remove and replace
● Entrance sensor

● Entrance motor

● Exit sensor

● Exit motor

● Sub Paddle Shaft Sub assembly

● Front Jogger Motor

● Front Jogger Home Sensor

● Rear Jogger Motor

● Rear Jogger Home Sensor

● Stapler

● Stapler position sensor assembly

● Traverse Motor

● Stacker Motor

● Stacker Encoder Sensor

● Stacker Lower Limit Switch

● Stack Beam Sensor

● Stack Position Sensor

● Paper Holding Lever Solenoid

● Paper Support Motor

● Paper Support Home Sensor

● Ejector Motor assembly

● Main Paddle Motor

● Main Paddle Home Sensor

● Main Paddle

● Ejector assembly

● Punch Dust Full Sensor

● Door Switch

● Top Door Switch

● End Fence Home Sensor

532 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Entrance sensor

ENWW Inner finisher 533

 Entrance motor
CAUTION: Do not damage the sensor flag.

534 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Exit sensor

ENWW Inner finisher 535

 Exit motor

536 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Sub Paddle Shaft Sub assembly

ENWW Inner finisher 537

 Front Jogger Motor
Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the printer when reassembling.

NOTE: Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while holding the arms. Let the second wheel
rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel. The rack and
pinion may need to be engaged several times to level the assembly.

NOTE: Move cable out of the wiring guide to access the third screw.

NOTE: The wire harness will hang loosely after the harness guide is removed.

Reinstallation tip: The cam must be installed with the same orientation as the cam on the opposite side.

Reinstallation tip: The actuator home cam paddle is installed hollow side out

NOTE: Note the orientation of paddles and use caution to not break the plastic locator pin on the paddle.

Reinstallation tip: Position the upper left-corner of the sub tamper, and then carefully rotate it counter-
clockwise into position.

538 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Front Jogger Home Sensor

ENWW Inner finisher 539

 Rear Jogger Motor
NOTE: Move cable guide out of position to access the screws.

540 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Rear Jogger Home Sensor

ENWW Inner finisher 541

 Stapler
NOTE: Ensure the tab on the back of the stapler unit clears the chassis while removing.

542 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Stapler position sensor assembly
Reinstallation tip: Connect the sensors, lock the cable restraints, and then connect the FCC.

ENWW Inner finisher 543

 Traverse Motor

544 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Stacker Motor

ENWW Inner finisher 545

 Stacker Encoder Sensor

546 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Stacker Lower Limit Switch
Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the printer when reassembling.

NOTE: Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while holding the arms. Let the second wheel
rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel. The rack and
pinion may need to be engaged several times to level the assembly.

NOTE: Move cable out of the wiring guide to access the third screw.

NOTE: The wire harness will hang loosely after the harness guide is removed.

Reinstallation tip: The cam must be installed with the same orientation as the cam on the opposite side.

Reinstallation tip: The actuator home cam paddle is installed hollow side out

NOTE: Note the orientation of paddles and use caution to not break the plastic locator pin on the paddle.

Reinstallation tip: Position the upper left-corner of the sub tamper, and then carefully rotate it counter-
clockwise into position.

ENWW Inner finisher 547

 Stack Beam Sensor
Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the printer when reassembling.

548 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Stack Position Sensor

ENWW Inner finisher 549

 Paper Holding Lever Solenoid
Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the printer when reassembling.

NOTE: Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while holding the arms. Let the second wheel
rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel. The rack and
pinion may need to be engaged several times to level the assembly.

NOTE: Move cable out of the wiring guide to access the third screw.

NOTE: The wire harness will hang loosely after the harness guide is removed.

550 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Paper Support Motor

ENWW Inner finisher 551

 Paper Support Home Sensor
NOTE: The black paddle is inside the chrome bracket at rear of ejector

552 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Ejector Motor assembly
NOTE: The black paddle is inside the chrome bracket at rear of ejector

Reinstallation tip: When reassembling the drive shaft, ensure the paper supports are in the full down
position (against the stops).

ENWW Inner finisher 553

 Main Paddle Motor

554 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Main Paddle Home Sensor

ENWW Inner finisher 555

 Main Paddle

556 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Ejector assembly
NOTE: The black paddle is inside the chrome bracket at rear of ejector

Reinstallation tip: When reassembling the drive shaft, ensure the paper supports are in the full down
position (against the stops).

ENWW Inner finisher 557

 Punch Dust Full Sensor
CAUTION: Do not damage the sensor flag.

558 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

Door Switch

ENWW Inner finisher 559

 Top Door Switch
Reinstallation tip: Push the paper stopper arms into the printer when reassembling.

NOTE: Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while holding the arms. Let the second wheel
rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel. The rack and
pinion may need to be engaged several times to level the assembly.

560 Chapter 5 Service ENWW

End Fence Home Sensor

ENWW Inner finisher 561

562 Chapter 5 Service ENWW
6

ENWW 563
564 Chapter 6 Course exam ENWW
7 Library

ENWW 565
 Additional resources
Clink a link below to view the following resources:

Related documents

Link to instructor guide

566 Chapter 7 Library ENWW

8 Course elements

NOTE:

WARNING!:

CAUTION:

TIP:

Reinstallation tip:

Course home

Return

Next

Back

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

ENWW 567
 16.

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

25.

Exam

Library

Choose language

HP logo

To begin, click the Next topic arrow ► above.

This course requires a JavaScript-enabled browser.

Product orientation: FRONT

Product orientation: RIGHT-FRONT

Product orientation: RIGHT

Product orientation: RIGHT-REAR

Product orientation: REAR

Product orientation: LEFT-REAR

Product orientation: LEFT

Product orientation: LEFT-FRONT

Product orientation: TOP

Product orientation: BOTTOM

Product orientation: LEFT-BOTTOM

Product orientation: RIGHT-BOTTOM

Product orientation: LEFT-TOP

Product orientation: RIGHT-TOP

568 Chapter 8 Course elements ENWW

 Variables used:

● copyright.year

2017

● edition

1, 4/2017

● html_copyright_date

2017

● part.number

● product.name.group

HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540, E82550, E82560 and HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87640,
E87650, E87660

● url.software.support.group.1

www.hp.com/support/pagewidecolor556

● product.name.1

HP Color LaserJet MFP 7400, 7500, 7600

● product.name.2

HP LaserJet MFP E87640, E87650, E87660

IMPORTANT:

Click the Next topic arrow ► to continue.

Predecessor parts

Notes

CERTIFICATE

of course completion

has successfully completed

Print

Edit

Enter your name as you want it to display on the certificate.

Enter the course name that will appear on your certificate.

Continue

Reinstallation

© Copyright 2017 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.

ENWW 569
 The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products
and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services.
Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical
or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.

This is an HP copyrighted work that may not be reproduced without the written permission of HP

Downloading the course

1. Copy course_xxxxx to your PC (about 153MB).

2. Find the file on your PC.

3. Double-click the file to run the installation procedure. This procedure copies all the required files
(153MB) for running the course on your PC.

4. Close this course.

Running the course from your PC

▲ Select Start → Programs → HP Training → HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540, E82550, E82560 and
HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87640, E87650, E87660 service and support training

Removing the course from your PC

1. Select Start → Settings → Control Panel.

2. In Control Panel, double-click the Add Remove/Programs icon to display the Add/Remove Program
Properties window.

3. Follow the online directions to remove the program HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540, E82550, E82560
and HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87640, E87650, E87660 service and support training.

570 Chapter 8 Course elements ENWW

A HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540, E82550,
E82560 and HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP
E87640, E87640, E87650 service and
support training training

Course description

This course provides service and support information for the HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540,
E82550, E82560 and HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87640, E87650, E87660 series printers. Topics
include the features, architecture, and functionality of the printer. Detailed information is also provided
on removal and replacement procedures for Customer Self Repair (CSR) parts.

After completing this course, learners should be able to set up, configure, and service the HP LaserJet
Managed MFP E82540, E82550, E82560 and HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87640, E87650, E87660
series printers as well as provide technical sales support for both printers.

Audience
● Service engineers

● Support engineers

● Field service engineers

● Solution architects

Length

Approximately three to four hours.

IMPORTANT: Some of the images and videos in this course might show a different printer than the one
referenced in this training. Although the hardware and some elements of the firmware shown might be
different, the procedures displayed are relevant to this printer.

ENWW 571
572 Appendix A HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540, E82550, E82560 and HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP ENWW
E87640, E87640, E87650 service and support training training